Home

LINX-10X User Manual

1. Master 5V R il Pull Up 6 e D1 B e e e e LT 04 LT 04 e DO A e e eo e Common mcd Pull Down e e R R Slave 1 Slave n Figure 161 Modbus RS 485 network LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 221 LOYTEC 14 LINX 10X Firmware Update The LINX 10X firmware supports remote upgrade over the network and the serial console To guarantee that the LINX 10X is not destroyed due to a failed firmware update the LINX 10X firmware consists of two images e LINX 10X fallback image e LINX 10X primary image The LINX 10X fallback image cannot be changed Thus if the update of the primary image fails or the image is destroyed by some other means the fallback image is booted and allows reinstalling a valid primary image When the LINX 10X boots up with the fallback image the OPC LED the CEA 709 port LED and the CNIP LED are flashing red 14 1 Firmware Update via the LINX 100 200 Configurator The LINX 10X primary image can be updated using the LINX 100 200 Configurator For this purpose the LINX 10X must be connected to the Ethernet and must have a valid IP configuration see Section 4 2 4 The LINX 100 200 Configurator must be installed see Section 6 1 To Update the Firmware using the LINX 100 200 Configurator
2. Figure 124 Register Server dialog in the bridge software 6 Additionally enter the operator as the User name and its Password on the device Enter the default timing parameters min update rate 3 sec wait time 10 sec hold time 0 For information on the timing parameters refer to Section 9 3 6 7 To test the connection to the LINX press the button 8 Click OK 9 3 6 Bridge Timing Parameters The OPC bridge uses three timing parameters to operate on the OPC XML DA side The defaults for those parameters are good for most cases For specific use cases however they might need to be adapted e Minimum Update Rate This parameter defines the rate at which the LINX server will update its value caches In general value changes could occur much more frequently than the value caches are updated Therefore the minimum update rate determines the granularity at which updates may be notified to the OPC client If an OPC client specifies an update rate less than this value for a group of subscribed data Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 168 LOYTEC points the group will not be updated faster If the group specifies a slower update rate however the LINX will be polled less often Lowering this parameter gives better responsiveness to data changes but also increases the XML DA traffic and impacts overall performance The recommended default is 3 seconds e Wait Time This parameter specifies how
3. eese nnns T9 6 2 0 CEA 709 Properties ai eet ax aetate Det aie eo eS tO 76 63 Project SCtUmgs cios iecit are PO net ve kiero sb E evdei ie see eas ones 78 OSMMMSICISCN NT TR 78 6 3 2 Data Point Naming Rules sees 79 0 9 3 C BAN709 SENOS cocta EL Ea 79 5 9 2o ASES MI OS ae tes estates saad a Foto E es oM s IE eEE 80 6 325 DEVICES OM Ot ATOM Soit eun patent landen ns 82 64 Workflows for the LINX TUX oo iivccicccecccescsccsececciicectisvectcedevecessasscecdcceucscsdantesesas 82 64 1 Thivolyed Contib tation Files muiere uriene EEEE 83 6 4 2 Configure With LN Soie e eal a ected een E CLE sed e 83 6 4 3 Configure without ENS ied bt t ED REIR RE NRI NI M ABUNU EISE M REEMA E LEBA 84 6 4 4 Configure without LNS Using Bindings eeeeeeeeeeeesee 84 64 5 Replace a LINX LUX cas cscacenscteredeasnatstiacsecoudaeeoadgaateatot ens Na 85 65 Addim ELINX IOX noinen d eere ai 86 6 6 Replace a LINX IU X eieeeiee sese s epa pe e uana eater ra ne vanno vanas aba enn a pata vaa aa a a reete Vara ea 89 6 7 Using the LINX 10X Configurator ccccsssssscscccccccccsssssscssssssssssssssecs 92 CLI Starting as dm LNS Plus M cotra aie reno Ra RR 92 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 6 LOYTEC 6 7 2 Slate SELTBOSATOBO sind ne eee eee 92 6 7 3 Uploading the Configuration cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93
4. E mail server user name E Uu Leave empty to disable authentification E mail server password mmm O jua D C Figure 30 E mail Configuration Page 4 2 11 Data Points Version 3 5 The device s Web interface provides a data point page which lists all configured data points on the device An example is shown in Figure 31 The data point page contains a tree view Clicking on a particular tree item fills the right part of the page with a data point list of that tree level and all levels below Thus one can get an easy overview of all data points The data point list displays the data point name direction type current value and data point state Inactive points are displayed in gray If the data point list does not fit on one page there are page enumerator links at the bottom Important data point states and their implications are listed in Table 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Config System Passwords Backup Restore Port Config CEA 709 Router CEA 852 Server CEA 852 Ch List E mail Data Points Trend Scheduler m Calendar B Alarm Statistics Reload LOYTEC LINX 10X User Manual o ad C3RooOT p 7 e Folder System Registers User Registers e CEA709 Pi i U mere Name Dir Type ELITS State C CE4852 Port System Time input analog 1267190525 normal QU CPU Load input analog 7 8 normal OH Free Memory input analog 8
5. ess Collection of several CEA 709 packets into a single CEA 852 packet POST o r NAE Alarming Scheduling Trending BOOTPiurueo E Em Bootstrap Protocol RFC 1497 CEA JOI orori ia Protocol standard for LONWORKS networks CEA SOZ om irt Protocol standard for tunneling CEA 709 packets over IP channels CON aaraa Rp tres change of value CRo eee Channel Routing d EE EE Configuration Server that manages CEA 852 IP devices Ip TE Data Access Web service DAC Porania Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 RFC 2132 DIE DIFE utm Data Information Field Data Information Field Extension 1 curent DR ES Data Logger Web service DN aare aae tec emet Domain Name Server RFC 1034 TS D EEEE A T E Daylight Saving Time GOM Eea Greenwich Mean Time uem m TET Internet Protocol IPSS dies renbisene i vetus logical IP channel that tunnels CEA 709 packets according CEA 852 CSD T oye Rewer err ee LOYTEC System Diagnostics Tool MAC oona Media Access Control MD iactura Pe OP EIU Message Digest 5 a secure hash function see Internet RFC 1321 M BUS Lact tet eee oen otn Meter Bus Standards EN 13757 2 EN 13757 3 NA os aetate ot acetone test Network Address Translation see Internet RFC 1631 hee die neonate Network Variable OP eco oes eee Open Process Control PUC aR e hi Id LEE Programmable Logic Controller RN ied ait ech aes Remote Network Interface LESE Dae eee eee een NOR ROM Round Trip Time RTU Stare PE Remote Terminal Unit
6. LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual ri flag auth G flag priority cfg flag priority J flag service type cfg o progr o pee LE Lc NA NV self doc 12 2 2 Node Object Example G2 9 nvoTemp m m elo elo Olo 9000A44850060402 80000000C8C8 NO Go J DC amp 3 2 0 2 N 0 4 LOYTEC Description A numeric value of the SNVT as defined in the SNVT master list The example value 39 represents a SNVT temp The NV index in decimal notation of the NV on the network node Index starts at 0 The NV selector in decimal notation of the NV on the network node The NV programmatic name of the NV on the network node Defines if this NV is an output on the network node 1 means the NV is an output on the network node defines that authentication can be configured for this NV on the network node 1 defines that the NV is authenticated 1 defines that the priority can be configured for this NV on the network node 1 defines that the NV is using priority 1 defines that the service type can be configured for this NV on the network node 1 defines that the NV is using acknowledged service 1 defines that the NV is using the polled attribute This field is a numeric reference to a device description If it is the first occurrence of this reference in the file 1 defi
7. The LINX 101 can be used together with the PC based i LON Configuration Server utility or with any LOYTEC configuration server If multiple CEA 852 devices behind one NAT router are added the Auto NAT setting in the CEA 852 devices is recommended to be used with the LINX 101 configuration server or an L IP configuration server Please refer to the following sections on how to setup the device and the configuration server If the Auto member feature is enabled in the configuration server the CEA 852 device can add itself to the IP 852 channel without explicitly adding the device at the configuration server Note that enabling auto member is a potential security hole since any device can add itself to the IP 852 channel 7 3 Configuration Server for Managing the IP 852 Channel 7 3 1 Overview Note Every logical IP 852 channel requires one configuration server that manages all CEA 852 devices LINX 101 L IP LOYTEC NIC852 i LON 1000 i LON 600 LonMaker etc on this channel A simple example is shown in Figure 110 A configuration server keeps a list of all devices on a logical IP 852 channel and distributes the routing information between those devices If a device wants to join an IP 852 channel it needs to register itself at the configuration server Traditionally a dedicated Windows PC is used to act as the configuration server The LINX 101 contains an embedded configuration server and can therefore replace the PC The configu
8. The basic classes of data points are e Analog An analog data point typically represents a scalar value The associated data type is a double precision machine variable Meta data for analog data points include information such as value range engineering units precision and resolution e Binary A binary data point contains a Boolean value Meta data for binary data points includes human readable labels for the Boolean states 1 e active and inactive texts e Mlulti state A multi state data point represents a discrete set of states The associated data type is a signed integer machine variable Each state is identified by an integer value the state ID State IDs need not be consecutive Meta data of a multi state data point includes human readable descriptions for the individual states state texts and the number of available states e String A string data point contains a variable length string The associated data type is a character string International character sets are encoded in UTF 8 A string data point does not include any other meta data e User A user data points contains un interpreted user defined data The data is stored as a byte array A user data point does not include any other meta data This type of data point also serves as a container for otherwise structured data points and represents the entirety of the structure 5 2 2 Timing Parameters Version 3 5 Apart from the meta data data points can be c
9. The data point has a value but it is considered unreliable for an unspecified reason The data point is mapped to a port which is not configured e g the port 1s disabled The data point is inactive Values can be written but no network communication is triggered This can be the case if a data point is not used in the configuration or it is connected to a dynamic NV which is not present on the device Table 5 Data Point States The data point names are links Clicking on such a link opens a detailed page on that data point If the data point supports it the user can also enter a new data point value as depicted in Figure 32 The Status field is discussed in Table 5 The Flags Poll cycle Min Max send time and Max age fields are the common timing parameters for the data point See Section 5 2 2 for a closer discussion on timing parameters Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 4 2 12 Trend Version 3 5 networks under control back Reload Data Point Details 45 Path CEA709 Port Datapoints tn50 Name NV tn50Controller 1nvoO00temp Direction input Type analog Value 2d degrees Celsius Enter for invalid Timestamp 26 02 2010 13 24 21 Status normal Flags Poll cycle 0 ms Min send time 0 ms Max send time Max age 0 ms 1 ms Description Native Name Figure 32 Data point details page
10. To make a data point persistent enable the Persistent property of the respective data point The persistency option is only available for the base data point classes analog binary multi state string and user More complex objects such as calendars schedules etc have their own data persistency rules For structured data points only all or none of the structure members can be made persistent The configuration of the top level data point which represents the entire structure serves as a master switch Setting the top level data point to be persistent enables persistency for all sub data points Clearing it disables persistency for all sub data points 5 2 5 Behavior on Value Changes Version 3 5 The value of a data point can change if it is written by the application or over the network For all data points input and output the application connection user control etc can be notified when the value is written to The property Only notify on COV defines whether the notification is done with each write or only if the value changes change of value COV If only notify on COV is disabled writing the same value multiple times will result in multiple notifications When the value of an output data point is updated an update 1s usually sent out onto the network The property Send On Delta decides how the update is reflected on the network If send on delta is inactive each update of the value is sent If send on delta is active
11. j ve D math Object Configuration 0 Items ie B Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items Figure 146 Data Point Manager Dialog with Modbus folder list Direction di Ti Eg Datapoint Marne Device Mame Start Address Register Type Data Length 1 M n vARh cap net ugsii 1 1 180 HOLD 4 1065 2 M m vARh ind net ugbii 1 1 178 HOLD 4 1066 3 M m vAh net ugbii 1 1 176 HOLD 4 1067 4 v n wh net ugbii 1 1 174 HOLD 4 1068 5 M m VARh cap del ugbii 1 1 172 HOLD 4 1069 6 M n vARh ind del ugsii 1 1 170 HOLD 4 105A y Iv Tn Woh del S11 1 1 1AA HAI r 4 1NAR Figure 147 Datapoint Manager Dialog with Modbus Data Point List 11 4 3 Folder List At the left is a list of folders which is used to sort the available data objects by their category There are a number of predefined Modbus folders available All other folders are described in Section 6 2 1 e Device Templates This folder contains created data point templates for the different technologies o Modbus Device Templates This folder contains a sub folder for each device which is imported from an Modbus device template This device folder also contains a sub folder with the data points specified in the template Data points can be added to the folder Additionally suitable data objects can be created for the use on the device by selecting the Use on Device option e LINX 10X This is the device folder of the LINX 10X It contains all the necessary data points which
12. 2 Select Commission Device if the LINX 10X is already connected to the network 3 In the Device Template group box select the existing device template of the LINX 10X Select LINX 10x FT 10 if the LINX 10X is configured to use the FT 10 interface or LINX 10x IP 10L if the LINX 10X is configured to be on the IP channel For information on how to configure which port to use refer to Section 4 2 5 for the Web UI 4 Select the channel which the LINX 10X is connected to and click Next 5 The following dialog shown in Figure 66 appears click Next New Device Wizard l xX Device name lin Location Ping Interval si BOO 500000000 Never Description Zur ck Finish Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 66 Leave defaults for Location 6 Check Service Pin as the device identification method as shown in Figure 67 and click Next Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 88 LOYTEC New Device Wizard E Figure 67 Use Service Pin 7 Click Next in the following screens until you get to the final dialog shown in Figure 68 8 Ifthe device is already on net select Online New Device Wizard E Figure 68 Final dialog 9 Click Finish A dialog will prompt to press the service pin Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 89 LOYTEC Echelon LonMaker E 7 Please press the service pin on device lin Options Display data from service pin Total
13. 6 12 1 Create an Alarm Server To generate local alarms an alarm server needs to be created at first The local alarm sources will report alarms to that alarm server The alarm server is the interface to access local alarms This can be done over the network or the Web UI Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 126 LOYTEC To Create an Alarm Server 4 Under the port folder select the Alarm sub folder to create an alarm server Elf CEA709 Port D Datapoints D Items dsl Calendar 0 Items T 1 Scheduler 0 Items C Alarm 0 Items feo F r Pow Right click in the data point list view and select New Alarm Server In the Create New Alarm Server dialog box as shown in Figure 103 enter Name and Description of the alarm server Create New Alarm Server x Name Critical Description Ciritical System Alarms omen Figure 103 Create New Alarm Server dialog box Click Create The alarm server appears now in the data point list view 6 12 2 Create an Alarm Condition To generate alarms from data points intrinsic reporting is used For each data point an alarm condition must be defined This condition employs an intrinsic algorithm to generate alarms based on the data point s value Depending on the data point type analog binary multi state different conditions are defined The alarm is reported to the attached alarm server To Create an Intrinsic Alarm Condition L
14. Datapoints Statistics Leb Projects s omo Model No oo Set Auto Remote Datapoints Datapoint Name Filter No Direction Datapoint Marne Remake NV Func Block In ie Datapoint Configuration Imported 0 7 CEAZ 8 CSY File 0 Items E CEA7 8 LNS Scan 1 Mv En20Controller_inyvoO0temp nvat temp SMVT Eemp tnz Controller 1 E tni 2 Qut Mv Enz Caentroller inviditemp nvitditemp SMVT Eemp tnz Controller 1 T V Datapoints 20 Items 3 In MV En2 Contraller 1nvonzlux nva zlux SMYT lux tn2 Controller 1 Aea id 4 Qut MV Enz Centraller 1nvitr3lux nitralux SMYT lux tnz Controller 1 e LINY 100 z In Mv En20Controller_invoO4ley_percent nvo 4lev percent SMYT lev percent Enz Controller 1 aa System Registers 9 Items 6 uk MV rnz centraller invild5lev percent nvi0Sley percent SMVT lev percent Enz Controller 1 ve User Registers 0 Items T In Mv Enz Centraller 1nva 6bkemp F nvot6temp F SMVT temp fF tn2 Controller 1 E B CEA 703 Port 8 ut MV En2 Controller 1nvi 7temp f nvi 7temp f SNVT temp f tn20 Controller 1 ES c VHS Den EH 3 In MV Enz Ccoentraller 1rrvoD8swibch nva amp 8swikch SNVT_switch tnzO Controller 1 m S B 10 out MV En2 cController 1nvilSsvibch nvi0 switch SNVT swiEch En2 Controller 1 off Alarm B Items ll In MV En20Controller 1nvoi motor state nvoi motor state 5MVT motor state tn20 Controller 1 j m Trend 0 Items 12 Out MV tne controller 1nvilimokor state n
15. Mo Direction Mame Description ID 1 My Formula This adds temperatures 1000 Right click and select Configure Math Object from the context menu Edit the math object as described in Section 6 15 1 To replace an input data point by another input data point without re writing the entire formula click the Replace Input DP button This opens a data point selector dialog Select the replacement data point there To detach an input data point click the Detach Input DP button This leaves the respective variable slot empty To finalize the edit click on Save Changes LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 139 LOYTEC 7 The LINX 101 Router The LINX 101 is equipped with a standard CEA 709 router 1 e an embedded L IP which connects the FT port and the CEA 852 port Depending on the use case the LINX 101 s router supports different operating modes how packets are routed between the CEA 709 side and the IP 852 side The LINX 101 also contains a configuration server CS to manage members on an IP 852 channel 7 1 CEA 709 Router Version 3 5 135 23 2 51 135 23 2 52 Figure 109 The LINX 101 supports different methods to route packets between the CEA 709 and IP 852 channel Depending on the CEA 709 router configuration see Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden the LINX 101 supports 4 different methods to route packets between the CEA 709 and the IP 852 channel The 4 operating mode
16. 1 Start the LINX 10X Configurator from the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt LOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator gt Configure LINX 100 2 Select the menu Connection gt Connect via FTP This opens the FTP connection dialog as shown in Figure 162 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 227 LOYTEC FTP Connect to Device x Target Device Recent Connections Steve s LIN 100 Save Delete Hostname or IP Address 192 168 24 98 User admin Password EERE FTF Fort zl Telnet Pork 23 T Figure 162 FTP connection dialog 3 Inthe FTP connection dialog enter the IP address of the LINX 10X as well as the FTP user name and password The default user name and password are admin and admin This can be changed via the Web interface see Section 4 1 and reset via the console UI see Section 15 2 2 4 Click on Connect 5 Select the menu Firmware Update 6 This opens the Firmware Update dialog as shown in Figure 163 Click on the button and select the firmware image linx10x 3 3 0 dlI Firmware Update Download Target Device 192 168 38 2 Firmware File T iprj FeLINE 1100firmwareMinx 11x 1 0 0 primarwv dl m Progress Uo Status Idle Contrals Stark Download Abort Download Close Figure 163 Firmware Update dialog of the LINX 100 200 Configurator 7 Click on Start Download 8 Observe the download progress When the down
17. Clear Status Log stopped Seng 58 69 7O 71 fe 73 74 75 76 ff 78 Timestamp Dir sene Type Starti Lengthi Length Stark C Field Address CI Field Crede Stop Payload 2009 05 14 13 57 26 955 SND Short Frame 10 SB oF be 16 2009 05 14 13 57 27 048 RCV Long Frame 66 32 3z 68 na oF 72 06 16 01014152 AE 4C 48 OF 44 60 00 DE 2009 05 14 13 57 27 378 SND Short Frame 10 7B oF B2 16 2009 05 14 13 57 27 470 REY LongFrame 68 32 32 68 na oF 72 2g i 01014182 AE 4C 48 OF 45 60 00 DOC 2009 05 14 13 57 27 800 SND Short Frame 10 SB oF be 16 2009 05 14 13 57 27 881 RCV Long Frame 66 32 3z 68 na oF 72 B4 16 01014152 AE 4C 48 OF 46 60 00 DE 2009 05 14 13 57 28 221 SND Short Frame 10 7B oF B2 16 2009 05 14 13 57 28 312 RCY LongFrame 68 32 32 65 na oF fe B4 16 010141 82 AE 4C 48 OF 47 6000 OF 2009 05 14 13 57 28 643 SND Short Frame 10 SB oF bz 16 2009 05 14 13 57 26 734 RCV Long Frame 66 32 3z 68 na oF 72 CA 16 01014152 AE 4C 48 OF 48 60 00 DE 2009 05 14 13 57 29 064 SND Short Frame 10 7B oF B2 16 Figure 140 Typical protocol analyzer output for M Bus port Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 192 LOYTEC 11 Modbus 11 1 Introduction The Modbus is a de facto industrial standard which was initially intended for the communication between PLCs In the meantime the Modbus has become an important interface for automatic meter reading applications and industrial applications As the Modbus is an open protocol
18. Device Address xus 0 255 Heat REL 1 1 online x Device Baud rate z400 Electricity MzR 5 1 5 online d 6 Water IMWV amp amp anline x E Scan Device Information Electricity JAM 4 4 online x Water SEM 7 7 online x Optional Device Information Manufacturer ID Version fo 255 Medium other Model Mame Device Capabilities Default Read Selective Read Controls Greate Device Greate From Template Remove Device Greate with DR Network Scan 300 Baud 2400 Baud 9600 Baud Progress bean Device Data Oo Update Device Export Device Template Figure 132 M Bus network management dialog To Add an M Bus Device Manually Without Scanning 1 Fill in the Device Address and select a Device Baudrate from the drop down box 2 A Device Name can be specified If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the end address can be specified in the input field on the right hand side of the Device Address field Device Address 7 L 0 255 3 The device capabilities specify what kind of M Bus read requests the device is able to process If nothing is specified here Default Read is used Default read usually means that the M Bus device transfers all its data during a read Selective read means that the data point which is to be read can be selected during the read request If the device 1s able to perform such
19. Device Address 5 T 0 255 online Device Baud rate s600 online 6 6 li x oe Scan Device Information 4 online x 7 online x Optional Device Information Manufacturer ID NzR version 1 fo 255 Medium Electricity Model Mame Network Scan Scan Far Devices 300 Baud 2400 Baud M RE Abort Device Scan 9600 Baud Scan Device Data Pragress Oo Device Capabilities v Default Read selective Read Contrals Greate Device Greate From Template Remove Device zreabe with DP Update Device Export Device Template Version 3 5 Figure 137 M Bus Network Management dialog 2 The device list shows all devices of the current configuration Select a device 3 Press the Export Device Template button This opens the M Bus Export Template dialog Export M Bus Device Tei nplate X Template Properties Template File zt Creator Company Mame version Cancel Export 4 Press the button and select a template file from the Save dialog 5 Enter the Creator Company Name and Version for the template This information is stored in the template file when importing the template file the information is displayed after selecting the file 6 Press the Export button To Create an M Bus Device Template File Using a Device Template 1 Right click on the folder of the device template that has to be exported or its data point folder and
20. LINX 10X L INX M Automation Server User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Contact LOYTEC electronics GmbH Blumengasse 35 1170 Vienna AUSTRIA EUROPE support loytec com http www loytec com Version 3 5 Document Ne 88073007 LOYTEC MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU AND LOYTEC SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS PRODUCT IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE IN EQUIPMENT INTENDED FOR SURGICAL IMPLANT INTO THE BODY OR OTHER APPLICATIONS INTENDED TO SUPPORT OR SUSTAIN LIFE FOR USE IN FLIGHT CONTROL OR ENGINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT WITHIN AN AIRCRAFT OR FOR ANY OTHER APPLICATION IN WHICH IN THE FAILURE OF SUCH PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION IN WHICH PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of LOYTEC LC3020 L Chip L Core L DALI L GATE L INX L IP LPA L Proxy L Switch L Term L VIS L WEB and ORION stack are trademarks of LOYTEC electronics GmbH LonTalk LoNWoRks Neuron LONMARK LonMaker i LON and LNS are trademarks of Echelon Corporation registered in the United States and other countries LINX 10X
21. The UID is the unique ID of the alarm log object The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list of the alarm log folder similar to obtaining the UID of trend log objects For a more user friendly listing of the files the Alarmlogname contains the alarm log s object name It is truncated after 23 ASCII characters to fit the requirements of the file system A trend CSV file for the alarm log object alarmlog0O and the UID 100C would result in the CSV file data allog alarmlog0_100C csv The UID remains constant for the life time of the object even when the name is changed The CSV format of the alarm log CSV file is identical to the trend log CSV format as described in Section 12 1 2 12 2 CEA 709 Interface 12 2 1 NV Import File Version 3 5 Network variables can be imported to the LINX 10X Configurator in a CSV file The format of this file 1s described in this section The first line of the file must contain a comment starting with a hash character specifying the format version and import technology dpal_csv_config Version 1 Technology CEA709 After that line any number of comment lines starting with the hash character are allowed Lines that are not comments specify one NV per line using the column information as described in Table 10 The columns are separated by commas or semi colons Which separator is used can be configured in the Web UI see Section 4 2 1
22. oe Scheduler 0 Items 4 Alarm 0 Items Eis J Trend 0 Items 7 Statistics 18 Items IJ Remote Devices 2 Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the NV creation dialog 3 Click on the tab External as shown in Figure 85 Create New NV Static External Application Device Properties Datapoint Mame my external switch Remote NV Mame nyol _switch Resource File STANDARD Tvpe switch 85 Select a Device Device Mame Direction Output 25 MV Selector ox D18F hv Index 50 Address Type subnetiNode Create External MV Figure 85 Create a new external NV 4 Select the device in the box Select a Device on the left hand side 5 Enter the properties of the external NV on that device starting with the local data point name the remote programmatic NV name the NV type SNVT and direction Note that the direction is the direction of the external NV on the LINX 10X Therefore the remote output NV nvo0O switch becomes an input on the LINX 10X Also enter the NV selector in hexadecimal and the NV index in decimal notation Choose the preferred addressing mode e g Node ID 6 Click Create External NV to add this NV to the data point list 7 The external NV now appears in the data point list as shown in Figure 86 For external NVs which are inputs to the LINX 10X adapt the poll cycle property to your needs Version 3 5 LOYTEC ele
23. 3 Press the OK button Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 cEAz 9 ast Device Configuration El System p Device To activate M Bus in the device the DIP switch 7 must be ON o C CSN delimiter E Mail l Port configuration l Port 1 gt Disable ify FT 10 Modbus 25 485 l Serial 2 i Console Important If the M Bus Port is deactivated via the checkbox or a firmware or model version is chosen which does not support M Bus the complete M Bus configuration is deleted In this case a dialog is displayed which has to be confirmed 10 5 2 Data Point Manager for M Bus The Configurator uses a central concept to manage data points The data point manager as shown in Figure 127 is used to select create edit and delete data points The dialog is divided into three sections e The folder list Figure 127 e The data point list Figure 128 e Anda property view Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 173 LOYTEC 5 Datseeink Contar aii Dmported EA CSV Fie 0 Thig QOEATUS UNG Scan M Bus Network Scan Ebcrety MIR OS T Datapoints 6 Ibems Deve Templates o Wie Device Templates Heat REL amp i5 Daria 7 Themes Ii Bus 13 Electricity NIR 5 3 Dems 3 System Registers 15 Dems o User opgeberg 0 Trees OEATT Pert L5 Doataponts 0 Them LS Calendar 0 Theres L3 Scheduler 0 Reve Lo Alwm 0 berg i2 Trend
24. Alarms that can be acknowledged have an Ack button Press on the Ack button to acknowledge the alarm Depending on the technology this and older alarm records will be acknowledged Acknowledged active alarms are rendered in red Click on Reload to refresh your alarm list Inactive alarms that have been acknowledged disappear from the list To record historical information about those alarms the alarm log must be used See Section 4 3 8 for the alarm log Web interface 4 3 Device Statistics The device statistics pages provide advanced statistics information about the CEA 709 device the CEA 852 device the System Log the scheduler the Alarm Log and the Ethernet interface Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 4 3 1 IP Statistics Figure 39 shows the IP statistics page It allows finding possible problems related to the IP communication Specifically any detected IP address conflicts are displayed if the LINX 10X s IP address conflicts with a different host on the network LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Config Statistics Alarm Log L Web Reset Contact Logout 4 3 2 CEA 852 Statistics The CEA 852 statistics page displays the statistics data of the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X It is only displayed if the CEA 852 interface is enabled The upper part of the CEA 852 statistics page 1s depicted in Figure 40 To update the statistics data press the button Update all CEA
25. Backup Configuration Device Info Press the backup link to download the current configuration and store it as a file on your computer Config E System m P m Passwords m Backup Restore Restore Configuration To restore a configuration select the backup file e g backup zip and press the Restore button Filename Durchsuchen Restore E mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar E Alarm networks under control Figure 21 Backup Restore page 4 2 3 Port Configuration This menu allows configuring the device s communications ports For each communication port which is available on the device and shown on the label e g Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet a corresponding configuration tab is provided by the Web UI An example is shown in Figure 22 Each port tab contains a selection of available communication protocols By selecting a checkbox or radio button the various protocols can be enabled or disabled on the communication port Some ports allow exclusive protocol activation only other ports e g the Ethernet port allow multiple protocols bound to that port LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin re Jackup Resto m Port Config O Port1 Pot2 Ethernet Device Info oam C sa Transceiver FT 10 O CEA 709 U Bitrate 78 1 kBit D Save Settings Get Settings Status active O Figure 22 Port Configuration Page When selecting a protocol on a communication port the protocol s communic
26. C Supply voltage 23 7V Device Info Config Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout networks under control Project Information Project file linx 21 remote sched linx0 Project timestamp 2010 02 18 15 40 13 CEA 709 application unique node IDs and program IDs CEA 709 inactive NID 80 00 00 01 DF A9 Online Send Senice Pin Mog wo PID 90 00 D7 46 16 8A 19 03 Send Service Pin Msg goahead WEBSERVER Figure 17 Device Information Page The device information page shows information about the LINX 10X and the current firmware version It includes the unique node IDs Neuron IDs of the CEA 709 network interfaces This page can also be used to send the CEA 709 service pin messages This is a useful feature when commissioning the LINX 10X since it is not necessary to be on site to press the device s status button Click through the menus on the left hand side to become familiar with the different screens If you click on Config in the left menu you will be asked to enter the administrator password in order to make changes to the settings as shown in Figure 18 Enter the default administrator password admin and select Login LOYTEC LINX 100 Device Info Enter your username and password Account admin Password eee ee Data Points B Scheduler Calendar E Alarm Statistics networks under control Figure 18 Enter admin as the default administrator password The
27. Device Main Menu Show device information Serial firmware upgrade System configuration CEA 709 configuration IP configuration CEA 852 device configuration CEA 852 server configuration Reset configuration factory defaults Device statistics OMONAA OF Co ho ES a Data Points 0 Reset device Please choose Figure 4 LINX 101 Main Menu Select 5 from the LINX 10X Configuration Menu and enter the IP address netmask and gateway address Note that you must use different IP addresses 1f you are using multiple LINX 10X in your setup IP Configuration Menu 1 DHCP disabled 2 IP Address 192 168 24 99 3 IP Netmask PDs AO D d 9p x 4 IP Gateway 2 lO el OS ela 5 Hostname test linx101 6 Domainname lt unset gt 7 DNS Servers S Xp Ou 9 MAC Address 00 0A B0 01 0A 4C factory default 0 NTP Servers lt unset gt out of sync b Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect q Quit without saving x Exit and save Please choose Figure 5 Enter basic IP settings Press x to save the IP settings and reset the LINX 10X with the main menu item 0 in order to let the new IP settings take effect Important The default IP address 192 168 1 254 is only set for configuration access It must be changed in order to make the device functional You should now be able to connect to the LINX 10X with a Web browser and add the LINX 101 s router to an IP 8
28. Device Mame Device Address Datapoints Baudrate Settings 300 Baud if 2400 Baud 9600 Baud M Bus Transmission Settings Use Secondary Addressing C Use Primary Addressing Abort Device Scan Stan Device Bata Scan Progress OF Idle Figure 131 M Bus Network Scan dialog In M Bus Transmission Settings choose the address scanning mode The default is secondary address scanning This prevents problems with duplicate primary addresses of previously uninstalled M Bus devices Select all applicable baud rates for the device scan Baudrate Settings 300 Baud iY 2400 Baud 9600 Baud Selecting 300 baud results in a very slow scan Aborting the scan is possible using the Abort Device Scan button Start the scan by pressing the Start Device Scan button The progress bar shows the progress of the scan Under the progress bar a text displays which device is currently scanned When a device is found it is displayed in the device list The name of the device is automatically created as described in section 10 5 7 1 The scan can be aborted by selecting the Abort Device Scan button When the device scan 1s finished either aborted or ended the devices can be selected for a data scan Also multi select 1s possible Select the devices which have to be scanned for data points and press the Scan Device Data button This scans all data points of the selected devices For every device a folder with the name
29. For value lines in a multi column CSV this field indexes the first column which has a value For the ERROR record type the field indexes the data source that caused the error For LOGSTATE TIMECHANGE records this field is not applicable and can be left at zero 5 2 The record type LOGSTATE 0 BOOL 1 REAL 2 ENUM 3 UNSIGNED 4 SIGNED 5 NULL 7 ERROR 8 TIMECHANGE 9 l Error Time This field is valid for records of type ERROR Change Log TIMECHANGE and LOGSTATUS Status Date Time 2007 11 02 15 34 22 The date time of the log record This is in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS 0 5000 Logged value from source n 1 or empty m E Table 9 Columns of the Trend Log CSV File There are as many value columns as value sources specified in the header If at a given date time more values are logged all of them appear in the same line If at that given time some sources did not log values those columns are left empty The Source column in a multi value CSV refers to the first data source that supplied a value in a given line 12 1 3 Alarm Log CSV File Version 3 5 The historical alarm logs are also accessible as CSV formatted files The alarm log CSV files are accessible either via their UID only or in combination with contents of the alarm log object name The files are located in LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 214 LOYTEC tmp uid allog UID csv data allog Alarmlogname UID csv
30. It shows the poll group the data point is connected to 11 4 6 Modbus Workflow Version 3 5 This section discusses the workflows for setting up a Modbus environment Modbus does not provide a scan function and therefore the network has to be setup offline This can be eased by the use of templates If no templates are available the data points have to be set up manually Figure 148 describes the workflow for setting up a Modbus network For using Modbus the Modbus ports of the LOYTEC device and the Modbus devices have to be configured The RS 485 Modbus port must get a Baud rate the parity 1s fixed at none and the stop bits are configured to 2 The Modbus TCP port must get the TCP port number of the slave devices The Modbus devices have to be configured according to the LOYTEC device s port configuration When no device template is available for a Modbus device it can simply be created by configuring the Modbus data points for the device and exporting the device template The exported device template can then be used to easily add additional Modbus LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 199 LOYTEC devices with the same data point configuration Also mixing the two methods is possible When using the device templates also data points can be added manually The configuration is then downloaded to the device and the device is rebooted START Configure Modbus RS 485 port Configure Modbus TCP port Y Configure Modbus device
31. LINX 10X User Manual 127 LOYTEC Important Choose different priorities for different exceptions If two exceptions are valid for a given day and their priorities are equal it is not determined which exception is in effect 6 11 6 Configure Exception Days Version 3 5 When a local calendar is used its calendar patterns need to be configured with exception days pattern entries The calendar patterns can be configured in the LINX 100 200 Configurator software or be modified at run time over the Web UI or over the network When configuring in the software the current exception days should be uploaded from the device to work on the current configuration To Configure Exception Days in a Calendar Pattern LR Click on the Upload calendar scheduler configuration button File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web De Eius Alyy e in the tool bar of the main connections window Click OK when the upload is finished Select the Calendar sub folder and select the calendar pattern which shall be configured No Direction Calendar Mame Index Func Black Use ID E 1 In 1 calendar 1030 1 1 Holidays 1032 Right click and select Configure Pattern in the context menu The Configure Pattern dialog appears as shown in Figure 101 Add dates to the calendar pattern by entering a Date Configuration Then click Add Entry The date appears in the Pattern Entries list on the right hand side Edit an excep
32. LINX 10X User Manual 130 LOYTEC 6 Click on the button Add on top of the Logged Alarm Objects list Logged Alarm Objects Add Remove Datapoint 7 A data point selector dialog opens Select one or more alarm objects that shall be logged and click OK The alarm objects appear in the list 8 Click Create to create the alarm log object 6 12 5 Limitations for CEA 709 Alarm Servers Local CEA 709 alarming supports only one alarm server object This alarm server object is represented by the device s LONMARK node object and facilitates the SNVT alarm2 output network variable Acknowledging alarms in the alarm server is adhering to the LONMARK specification and relies on the RO CLEAR ALARM mechanism 6 13 Local Trending 6 13 1 Create a Local Trend The value of a data point can be logged over time This is referred to as trend data To generate trend data a trend object has to be created The trend data 1s stored in a data logger file This file can be downloaded via FTP in binary or CSV format see Section 12 1 2 CEA 709 trend objects can generate trend logs for multiple data points and can be operated in one of three basic modes e Interval Mode In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged into the data logger file e COV Mode In this mode each of the trended data points is logged separately if and only if its value changes For analog data points a specific COV increment can be configured in the dat
33. LINX 10X User Manual T4 LOYTEC Version 3 5 NV Allocation This property defines how a data point shall be allocated on the device Choices are Static NV Dynamic NV and External NV If the allocation type cannot be changed this property is locked SNVT This property defines the SNVT of the NV e g lux 79 Invalid Value This property defines the invalid value for the NV If set this specific value will be interpreted as invalid in the data point If known by the SNVT the invalid value is filled in Otherwise the user can specify an invalid value CEA 709 Mapping Information This information is derived from the SNVT It defines how the NV contents are mapped to the data point NV Scaling A B C These are the scaling factors known from the SNVT table The scaling factors are applied to translate a raw NV value into the scalar representation of the data point Data Type This is the basic NV data type This 1s usually filled in from the SNVT definition Local NV Member Index This property specifies the NV member index within a given functional block This must be a unique index in the functional block which identifies the NV after other NVs have been added or removed from the interface Local Remote NV Index This property specifies the NV index For local static NVs this 1s the NV index of the static NV For external NVs this 1s the NV index of the NV on the remote device Local Remote NV Name This p
34. LOYTEC Clicking on the Set button writes the new value to the device s data server When setting a value the Web page displays the status of the action Successfully set value The new value has been successfully set in the data point and the update has been sent on the network if it is a network data point Could not send value update The new value has been set but it has not been sent out on the network The reason can be that the peer node is currently offline or there is a configuration error The data point status reflects this error Could not set value error code The new value has not been set because of an internal error Please contact LOY TEC with the error code The Web interface provides a configuration page to re configure trend logs at run time The changes made to the trend logs take effect immediately without the needs for a reboot of the device Allocating new trend logs can only be done in the configuration software see Section 6 13 1 The trend log main page displays all available trend logs Click on the trend log to be edited This opens the trend log configuration page An example is shown in Figure 33 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 46 LOYTEC LOYTEC Logged in as admin O Save Reload Device Info 4 E C LL O Name trend1 VJ Description E System intesa SOY B Pascon QU Mode B Backup Restore po Fill Mode Ring Buffer m Port Config c m E mail a ogee
35. LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 22 LOYTEC hoy LOYTEC LINZ 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt E E 8 m x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web lej x jiDBGBgpU I xtuBub9btvstb it J Datapoint Configuration Remote Datapoints Datapoint Mame Filter B f Imported 23 CEA709 CSV File D Items No Direction Datapoint Name Remote Rv Remote De Ig 1 In E CEA709 LAS Scan MV _tn2O0Controller_invo0Okemp nvall be SAT temp tnt BS tne Z Qut NV _tn20Controller_inviditermp n SNVT temp Enzo Datapoints 20 Items In Mv Enz cantroller 1nvo talux naltrzlux SMYT lux Enn n HC I Di 2m Qut N _tn20Controller_invi0Slux nivitrslux SMYT lux tn2n Ed LINx 100 In Mv tnz controller 1rnwvo 4lev percent nwo 4lev percent SNVT lev percent En20 71 System Registers 9 Items Qut MV rtne controller 1nvi 5lev percent nvi 5lev percent SMVT lev percent En20 1 User Registers 0 Items m Ny En20controller 1nvo amp te nvo Bte SNVT temp f tn2 ET CEA709 Port amp Out NV Enz Contraller 1nvi ztemp f nvib7temp f SMVT temp f tn20 Datapoints 0 Items a 9 ee Calendar 0 Items lt lt ee cem ncm unum In Mv En2 controller 1nvoe amp swibch nvoOeswitch SMVT switch tnz E oe Scheduler 0 Items ow J Alarm 0 Items E Trend 0 Items nf Selected Datapoints g ov Statistics 18 Items inf Datapoint Status amp Inactive Sl Remot
36. Standard if some are not unique the mode is Extended NAT mode Please refer to Section 7 4 2 to learn more about the implications of this mode LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin i O Config server status enabled Device Info rar Config server port 1629 Config O NAT address WU Channel name default M System a Channel members 2 Wl O Channel mode Standard C Pri SNTP server 123 leave empty to disable l vn Sec SNTP server 123 lt leave empty to disable l O Channel timeout ms m E mail leave empty to disable m Data Points Far ar D Auto members off Hon B C Roaming members fonz MDS authentication off Statistics Warning This internet connection is insecure All data will be transmitted in clear text Use the L Web console interface to change the MD5 secret in a secure way MDS secret 16 bytes hex Reset Save Settings Get Settings Contact _Save Settings Logout n Figure 28 Configuration server settings Enter NTP timer server address and ports in the fields Primary SNTP and Secondary SNTP The LINX 101 will synchronize to NTP time if primary or primary and secondary NTP servers are specified A list of available timeservers can be found at www ntp org The Channel timeout is an IP 852 channel property and indicates how old a packet can be before it is discarded The channel timeout is set in ms To disable the channel timeout enter a value of 0 To
37. ae x Log Size 500 L Calendar O Log Interval 3 sec E Alam lt Fill Level Notification a0 96 T D C Logged Data Points sss Renee Name COV delta Type CEA709 Port Datapoints abs humid vae ICEA709 Port Datapoints motor state fo Value v Trend Enable Disable Data Point User Registers trend_enable_Read Bil Remove Figure 33 Trend log configuration page The user can change the Trend Mode the Fill Mode the Log Interval and the Fill Level Notification Furthermore data points can be added to the trend log by clicking the Add button A data point selector dialog opens Click on a data point for adding it For removing a data point from the trend log click on it in the Logged Data Points list and hit the Remove button Save the changes made by clicking the Save button For more information on how a trend log can be configured please refer to the Configurator Section 6 13 4 2 13 Scheduler Version 3 5 The Web interface provides the scheduler page to edit its schedules at run time 1 e change the times and values that shall be scheduled Allocating new schedules can only be done in the configuration software see Section 6 11 The scheduler main page displays all available schedules Click on the schedule to be edited This opens the scheduler page An example is shown in Figure 34 The effective period defines when this schedule shall be in effect Leave From and To at to make this schedule al
38. d V FTP Server Hold register start address jo 0 65535 W Telnet Server Ll IP 652 Hold register end address 39 0 55535 Modbus TCP Upload Download Figure 145 Project settings for Modbus If the Modbus port ts deactivated via the check box or a firmware or model version is chosen which does not support Modbus the entire Modbus configuration is deleted In this case a dialog is displayed which has to be confirmed 11 4 2 Data Point Manager for Modbus Version 3 5 The Configurator uses a central concept to manage data points The data point manager as shown in Figure 146 is used to select create edit and delete data points The dialog is divided into three sections e The folder list Figure 146 e The data point list Figure 147 e Anda property view LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 197 LOYTEC Datapoint Configuration El Imported lf CEA7DS CSV File 0 Items oof CEA709 LNS Scan Device Templates E pe Modbus Device Templates Fo uge110 1 wolf Datapoints 40 Items o 7 CEATD9 Elf LINS 100 A System Registers 15 Items E User Registers D Items E 3 CEA7D8 Port Datapoints D Items ff Calendar 0 Items 77 Scheduler 0 Items 7 Alarm 0 Items 77 Trend 0 Items olf Statistics 18 Items El Modbus Port R5485 lf Datapoints 40 Items Elf Modbus Port TCP 71 Datapoints 0 Items de 9 E Mail Configuration 0 Items
39. enter the e mail address of the LINX 10X s e mail account In the field Source E mail Sender Name enter a name that the e mail will display as the source name Note that only ASCII characters are allowed in the name If replies shall be sent to another e mail address specify this in the Reply E mail Address If the provider s SMTP server requires authentication enter the required user name and password Note that only username password is supported SSL TLS authentication is not supported by the LINX 10X e g Hotmail gmail cannot be used To verify the e mail configuration reboot the device to let the changes take effect and return to the e mail configuration page Then press one of the Send Test E mail buttons Note that a DNS server must be configured in the IP settings see Section 4 2 4 to resolve the e mail server host name The Web UI displays a warning message at the top of the page if the DNS configuration is missing LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Warning Currently no DNS server configured Save Settings Get Settings Data Points B Scheduler Calendar E Alarm i IP Configuration Device Info end Goto IP Configuration to set DNS server ww Config 5 Outgoing e mail server SMTP mgate chello at U Outgoing e mail server port 25 QJ Source e mail address linx 1 OO0 chello at Send Test E mail OH Source e mail sender name Manual Reply e mail address opt fhuber aon at Send Test E mail
40. o M Bus Network Scan This folder holds data points scanned online from an attached M Bus network When scanning an M Bus device a subfolder is created under M Bus Network Scan The name of this subfolder is generated automatically from the information of the scanned device Additionally under the device sub folder a data point folder is created Data objects in the import folder are not stored on the device when the project is downloaded They represent data objects which are available on remote devices and are shown here as templates to create suitable data objects for use on the device by selecting the Use on Device option e Device Templates This folder contains created data point templates for the different technologies Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 174 LOYTEC o M Bus Device Templates This folder contains a sub folder for each device which is imported from an M Bus device template This device folder also contains a sub folder with the data points specified in the template Data points can be added to the folder Additionally suitable data objects can be created for the use on the device by selecting the Use on Device option Filter templates This folder contains filter templates for scanned M Bus devices o M Bus This folder contains a folder with data points for each created filter template LINX 10X This is the device folder of the LINX 10X It contains all the necessary data points which con
41. v Enable Alarm Condition Alarm Server ctia ml Alarm Description Emergency Button Time Delay jo 5 Enable data point li 0M Ex Remove Alarm value me v Remove Alarm Gondition Cancel Figure 105 Alarm Condition for a Binary Data Point 6 For enable a data point can be attached by clicking the button This data point is used by the device to determine the actual values at run time Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 128 LOYTEC 7 For a multi state data point the dialog as shown in Figure 106 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select the Alarm States which triggers the alarm by clicking the arrow buttons Create Alarm Condition x v Enable Alarm Condition Alarm Server ctia m Alarm Description Wenblsionalam 0000000 Time Delay jo s Enable data point NENNEN E Remove Mot Alarmed Alarm on States MOTOR MUL MOTOR_DECELERATING MOTOR _ STOPPED MOTOR STOPPINa MOTOR STARTING MOTOR ACCELERATING MOTOR AT STANDBY MOTOR AT MORMAL MOTOR AT REFERENCE Remove Alarm Gondition Cancel Figure 106 Alarm Condition for a Multi State Data Point 8 For enable a data point can be attached by clicking the button This data point is used by the device to determine the actual values at run time 9
42. value changes only are sent The send on delta property is only valid for output data points For analog data points the COV or send on delta takes an extra argument which specifies by what amount the value must change to regard it as a change for action Both COV and send on delta for analog data points check the Analog Point COV Increment property A LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 61 LOYTEC change is detected if the value increment is bigger or equal to the specified increment If the property is zero all updates are considered 5 2 6 Custom Scaling Custom scaling is applied to all analog data points when they communicate values to or from the network This feature can be used if a network data point has engineering units not suitable for the application e g grams instead of kilograms The scaling is linear and applied in the direction from the network to the application as A kN d where N is the network value k the custom scaling factor d the custom scaling offset and A the application value When sending a value to the network the reverse scaling is applied If this property is enabled the analog values are pre scaled from the technology to the data point The custom scaling is in addition to any technology specific scaling factors and can be applied regardless of the network technology 5 2 7 System Registers The LINX 10X provides a number of built in system registers They are present without
43. vitet pvc EM HET Send List SMTP cdi tipo EM ESAE simple Mail Transfer Protocol DINI LS deste castetretee catia simple Network Time Protocol SNV Metrum RR Standard Network Variable Type Dolo e ii aes Secure Socket Layer ES OPERUM Transport Layer Security BE a feum ibat eas User Interface UNV T S i ete RR User defined Network Variable Type NIE TEE rensei Value Information Field Value Information Field Extension 2G S utes E inact eee eXtensible Markup Language LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 12 LOYTEC Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 13 LOYTEC 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview Version 3 5 The LINX 10X is a high performance reliable and secure network infrastructure component that contains an embedded OPC server and exposes a defined set of data points as OPC tags It implements the OPC XML DA standard which lets OPC clients access the data points via Web services The LINX 10X can provide up to 1000 OPC tags Which native data points are exposed to OPC can be configured by a configuration software which provides a fast and easy way to configure the LINX 10X Using the supplied L Web designer users can easily generate a Web based visualization for the LINX 10X Easy to understand diagnostic LEDs allow installers and system integrators to install and troubleshoot this device without expert knowledge and dedicated troubleshooting tools The CEA 709 OPC Server LINX 100 LINX 101 is equip
44. 10X on the correct port You can also send the service pin using the Web interface see Section 4 1 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 92 LOYTEC Echelon LonMaker E 7 Please press the service pin on device lin Options Display data from service pin Total Received i Filter on program ID Fitter on channel 8 After the service pin has been received LonMaker commissions the replacement device creates the dynamic NVs again if any and installs the bindings 6 7 Using the LINX 10X Configurator 6 7 1 Starting as an LNS Plug In In LonMaker the plug in is started by right clicking on the LINX 10X device shape or the Gateway functional block and selecting Configure from the pop up window In NL 220 the Plug in is started by right clicking on the LINX 10X node then selecting the Option LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator in the PlugIns sub menu In Alex the Plug in is started by right clicking on the LINX 10X device and selecting the LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator in the Starte PlugIn sub menu A window similar to what 1s shown in Figure 75 should appear EA LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt i ioj x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help la x D g d Eu Sa Aaa Et Elt Connected Device test linx100 5ubsyskem 1 flinx100_1 Channel 1 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Connections Connection Overview Statis
45. 2 Version 3 5 Select a data point Right click and select Create Alarm Condition from the context menu For an analog data point the dialog as shown in Figure 104 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select Low Limit and High Limit and put check marks if they shall be employed Enter a Deadband to account for hysteresis LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 127 LOYTEC Create Alarm Condition x v Enable Alarm Condition Alarm Server mica m Alarm Description overheat Time Delay 5 5 Enable data point Ct EX Remove Get limit From data point Deadband 0 00 e Remove Low Limit 0 00 o Remove v High Limit 100 ae Remove Remove Alarm Gondition Cancel Figure 104 Alarm Condition for an Analog Data Point 4 For enable deadband low limit and high limit data points can be attached by clicking the button Those data points are used by the device to determine the actual values at run time 5 For a binary data point the dialog as shown in Figure 105 appears Select the Alarm Server Optionally enter an Alarm Description If left empty the description of the data point is used Enter a Time Delay after which the condition is evaluated Select the Alarm Value which triggers the alarm Create Alarm Condition X
46. 3 Reset all passwords 4 Clear data point configuration oa YOu Please choose Figure 169 Reset to Factory Defaults Menu Select option 1 to reset the entire device to factory defaults including error log configuration files passwords etc Select option 3 to reset all passwords Web interface FTP server etc to factory defaults Select option 4 to clear all configured data points such as CEA 709 network variables or user registers This effectively clears the entire port configuration The LINX 10X must be rebooted to let the changes take effect This option does not reset the configuration of the built in router of the LINX 101 The nodes connected by the router are still reachable after clearing the data point configuration 15 2 3 Device Statistics Menu Version 3 5 Select 9 from the device main menu to get to the device statistics menu This menu holds relevant information regarding the device statistics of the device This section describes those statistics which are not available on the Web UI The device statistics menu 1s shown in Figure 170 Use this menu only for debugging purposes There is no need to access this menu if the network is running smoothly Statistics Menu 4 Show IP statistics 8 Show DPAL statistics 9 Show Reg DPAL statistics q Quit Please choose Figure 170 Device Statistics Menu on the Console LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Man
47. 36 To add a new data point click the Add button To remove a data point select the the data point in the list Scheduled Data Points by clicking on it and then press the Remove button Finally store the changes by clicking the Save button After modifying the scheduled data points go back to the Presets tab and enter descriptive value label names Section 6 11 4 For more information on how to configure a scheduler please refer to the Configurator LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 48 LOYTEC DLOYTEC Logged in as admin O Schedule Configuration Presets Data Points Device Info 4 Save Reload O Scheduled Data Points T Add Remove T3 Data Point Name Group C CEA709 Port Datapoints abs humid ad Uu B Scheduler Y E Calendar O Schedule Enable Disable Data Point B Alarm El Remove T Statistics D Enable Disable Feedback Data Point Es m Remove Scheduled Preset Name El Remove Figure 36 Re configure scheduled data points on the Web UI 4 2 14 Calendar The Web interface provides the calendar page to edit its calendars at run time 1 e change the exception days The calendar main page displays all available calendars Click on the calendar to be edited This opens the calendar configuration page An example is shown in Figure 37 The effective period defines when this calendar shall be in effect Leave From and To at to make this calendar always
48. 4 This creates data points in the LINX 10X CEA709 Port folder All data points in that folder will actually be created on the LINX 10X device after downloading the configuration Tip Data points can be edited by selecting a single point or using multi select The available properties to be edited are displayed in the property view below 6 7 8 Change the NV Allocation After selecting the Use on device action on scanned or imported NVs they are assigned a default NV allocation in the LINX 10X CEA709 port folder This default allocation can be Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 100 LOYTEC Tip changed e g for imported NVs when they shall be allocated as static NVs on the LINX 10X To Change the NV Allocation Type 1 In the data point view select the NVs in the LINX 10X CEA709 port folder for which the NV allocation shall be changed By using Ctrl A all NVs can be selected 2 Select the NV allocation property as indicated by the red rectangle in Figure 83 3 To make the data points static NVs on the LINX 10X select Static NV GD Only notify on COV lo CD Persistent o ET Send on Delta a es Point Type a User Datapoint Direction NV Allocation Static NV TFA aba Tuna TEIT Figure 83 Change the NV allocation type 6 7 9 Create Static NVs Version 3 5 The LINX 10X can be configured to change its static interface and boot with a new one Apart from creat
49. 57 LOYTEC e reset the data point configuration from a remote location This option clears all data points and the entire port configuration It leaves the IP settings intact The Contact item provides contact information and a link to the latest user manual and the latest firmware version The Logout item closes the current session Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 58 LOYTEC 5 Concepts 5 1 CEA 709 OPC Server Version 3 5 The LINX 10X implements an embedded OPC server which exposes network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs from the CEA 709 network to OPC The OPC server is based on OPC XML DA Web service The LINX 10X has one physical FT port and one IP 852 port which is accessible over Ethernet On the LINX 100 the OPC server node is internally connected either to the FT port or to the IP 852 port Which one is used can be configured in the CEA 709 configuration see Section 4 2 5 The schematic is shown in Figure 48 a If configured for the FT channel the LINX 100 provides an RNI for remote access to the FT channel The RNI can be used to commission nodes and trouble shoot communications on the FT channel The LINX 101 possesses a CEA 709 router which connects the FT port and the IP 852 port On the LINX 101 the OPC server node is always internally connected to the FT port The schematic is shown in Figure 48 b IP 852 Channel FT or IP 852 Channel FT Channel a
50. 6 7 2 In the Configurator import data points from a CSV import file see Section 6 7 5 Select the data points that the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 6 7 7 For the NVs used on the LINX 10X select the static NV allocation type see Section 6 7 8 Alternatively you can create static NVs manually see Section 6 7 9 For network management tools which do not support the ECS enhanced command set network management commands the legacy network management mode must be configured see Section 6 7 14 Please contact the tool s vendor for information whether ECS 1s supported or not LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 85 LOYTEC Download the configuration onto the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 12 Finally export a XIF file see Section 0 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to a disk file for being able to replace a LINX 10X in the network START Start LINX 101 Configurator stand alone Section 6 7 2 Y Import network variables from file Section 6 7 5 Select NVs and use on L OPC Section 6 7 7 Switch NVs to static Section 6 7 8 Create other static NVs manually Section 6 7 9 Tool supports ECS o Enable Legacy NM Mode Section 6 7 14 yes y Download configuration to L OPC Section 6 7 12 r Export XIF file Section 6 7 13 DONE Figure 63 Basic d
51. 709 inactive NID 80 00 00 01 DF A9 Online Send Senice Pin Mey wo PID 90 00 D7 46 16 8A 19 03 Send Service Pin Msg goahead WEBSERVER Figure 6 Example Start Screen Click on Config in the left menu You will be asked to enter the administrator password in order to change the IP settings Enter admin and select Login LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 20 LOYTEC LOYTEC LINX 100 Device Info Enter your username and password Account admin Password eee eel Config E mail B Data Points B Scheduler Calendar E Alarm Statistics networks under control Figure 7 Enter admin as the default administrator password 6 The Config menu opens Click on Port Config and change to the tab Ethernet The TCP IP settings are selected as shown in Figure 8 Enter the IP address the IP netmask and IP gateway for this LINX 10X B LOYTEC Logged in as admin O Port1 Port2 Ethernet Device Info Enable DHCP L v O Te IP Address 192 168 24 21 v Telnet i IP Netmask 255 255 192 0 ds QD 2h IP Gateway 192 168 1 1 mB Restore UO x rs B Port Config Cc Hostname m E mail 5 i ooo E Data Points A Domainname es Y Save Settings Get Settings rato disable gt iu regan O DNS Server 2 E Alarm leave empty to disable QD DNS Server 3 EE leave empty to disable MAC Address Iv Use Factory Default oo 0A B0 01 0C 9F
52. 852 statistics To reset all statistics counters to zero click on the button Clear all CEA 852 statistics The field Date Time of clear will reflect the time of the last counter reset Version 3 5 networks under control 50 Update IP statistics Ethernet Interface Statistics Rx packets lo Rx bytes 545299785 Rx dropped 0 Rx no clusters D Rx CRC errors D Rx missed errors 0 Tx collisions 0 Tx resends 0 Tx packets 0 Tx bytes 290463 Rx no mbuf D Rx oversize errors 0 Rx runt errors 0 Tx ok 0 Tx dropped Total IP packets received 537557 Total IP packets generated here 4744 Total TCP packets sent 4397 Total TCP data packets sent 2156 Total TCP data bytes sent 514252 Total TCP packets received 4303 Total UDP packets received 532640 Total UDP packets sent 338 Update IP statistics Figure 39 IP Statistics Page LOYTEC LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Config Statistics IP system Log CEA 852 Enh Comm Test CEA 709 M Bus OPC Server Alarm Log networks under control L Web Reset Contact Logout 51 Clear all CEA 852 statistics Update all CEA 852 statistics Seconds since cleared E9000 Date Time of clear GMT Mon Jan 19 15 24 12 2009 No of registered members 2 LT Packets received lo LT Bytes received unknown LT Packets sent 3 LT Bytes sent
53. Click on Create In the alarm column the alarm sign a will be added for those data points that have an alarm condition 6 12 3 Deliver Alarms via E mail Updates in the alarm summary of an alarm object can be used as a trigger to send e mail For setting up e mails the account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden Then an e mail template can be created and the alarm point attached as a trigger To Create an E mail Template for Alarms 1 Create or configure an e mail template as described in Section 6 10 1 2 Change to the Mail Triggers tab 3 Click the Add button and select an alarm data point 4 Inthe Mail Triggers list select the added trigger data point Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Critical Alarm Condition 5 In the Manage Trigger Conditions list put a check mark on alarm conditions that shall invoke the transmission of the e mail Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 129 LOYTEC Manage Trigger Conditions Enabled Conditions State to Active State En Ackd Active State to Ack Pending State En Ackd State En Inactive Offnarmal Alarms LowsliriE Alarrns HighlirniE Alarrns FaulE Alarms S SISISISIC T 171 T8 BufFer Alarms 6 Change to the Common E Mail Properties tab 7 Add the alarm data point as a data source and insert the place holder into the e mail text as described in
54. Close button to finish editing When the poll groups have not been saved a dialog asks whether the changes have to be saved or not Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 209 LOYTEC To Create a Trigger Based Modbus Poll Group l 9 Select the Modbus dialog by clicking on the Modbus button t f 58 ahs in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab This opens the Modbus Management dialog In the Modbus Management dialog open the Pollgroups tab This displays the poll groups management tab displayed in Figure 155 Enter a new poll group name and select Trigger based Create the poll group by pressing the Create New button Select the new poll group This enables the Add and Remove buttons from the triggers Press the Add button and select a trigger data point This can for example be a binary user register The selected trigger data point appears in the trigger list as shown Triggers Condition Datapoint Tvpe Triggerdatapoint Read Value Update Select the trigger from the list and check the desired trigger conditions Conditions Enabled Conditians 7 True 12 D False 0 7 Invalid Offline The trigger conditions are then displayed in the trigger list Triggers Condition Datapoint Type Triggerdatapoint_Read Value Update True 12 0 False 0 10 Press the Save button to store the changes in the poll groups 11 4 7 6 Modbus Protocol
55. Config menu opens Click on Passwords in the Config menu which opens the password configuration page as shown in Figure 19 The LINX 10X has three user accounts 1 guest allows the user to view certain information only e g the device info page By default the guest user has no password 2 operator is able to read more sensible LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 33 LOYTEC information such as calendar data 3 admin has full access to the LINX 10X and can make changes to its configuration Note that the user accounts are also used to log on to the FTP and Telnet server LOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin Enter the desired password for the Administrator and Guest accounts The Administrator has full access to the device whereas a Guest can only view the status information but not change the configuration In order to clear a password leave the password fleld empty Account admin New password eee se Retype password esse Device Info Config E System m P Passwords m Backup Restore m CEA 709 Change password Iz E Calen E Alarm Statistics networks under control Figure 19 Password Configuration Screen Please change the administrator password in order to protect yourself from unwanted configuration changes by anyone else To do so select the admin account in the drop down box and enter the new password If the administrator password is left empty password protection 1s turned
56. Device button The protocol data can be stored as CSV file using the Save button with the Clear button the shown protocol is deleted Network Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer Start Protocol Stop Protocol Load From Device Save Clear Status Log stopped Frame Type Stark1 Lengthi Lengthz Shark C Field CI Field Payload Version 3 5 Figure 139 M Bus protocol analyzer Figure 140 shows a typical protocol analyzer output for the M Bus port It shows the following information e Seq sequence number which is automatically created in the device This number is unique for one port e Timestamp transmission time e Frame Type M Bus frame type Short Frame Control Frame Long Frame E5 in this case no other data follows e Dir direction Either SND send or RCV receive e Starti Start2 Start byte must be equal e Lengthl Length2 Frame length according to the M Bus standard must be equal e C Field Control field e Address M Bus address e CI Field Control information field e Checksum Checksum of the frame LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 191 LOYTEC e Stop Stop byte e Payload Payload in hexadecimal numbers this column cannot be used for sorting Some frame types do not contain the full set of fields Please refer to the M Bus standard for additional information Network Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer Start Protocol EZ Load From Device Save
57. Figure 108 This would result in the trend CSV file data trend out_temp_107C csv Naz Direction Trend Mame Object Mame Obj Type Instance Alloc Use B ID 1 Qut out temp out temp Trend Object 25 50 107C Figure 108 UID of data points Because the contents are generated on the fly the file size in the FTP client will appear as 0 Bytes The decimal point and CSV column separator can be configured in the system configuration of the Web UI see Section 4 2 1 Note that for a comma as the separator the decimal point is a point This is useful for English U S applications For countries that use the comma as the decimal point select the semicolon as the CSV separator 6 13 5 Deliver Trend Data via E mail Version 3 5 Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP This requires an active action by the user Alternatively trend data can be sent as an e mail attachment For doing that an e mail template has to be setup for the trend log to be transmitted The fill level condition in the trend object can be used as a trigger to send an e mail with the trend s data logger CSV file as an attachment LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 134 LOYTEC For setting up e mails the account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden Then an e mail template can be created and the trend object attached as a trigger T
58. LOYTEC 10 M Bus 10 1 Introduction The M Bus Meter Bus is a European standard EN 13757 2 EN 13757 3 designed for remote reading of meters With its standardization as a galvanic interface for remote readout of heat water and energy meters this bus has become an important interface for automatic meter reading applications with different vendor s meters on the same cable The M Bus is a serial bus which is controlled by a single bus master This master can request data from several slave devices connected to the network The data transmission from master to slave is done by a modulation of the output voltage 36 V means a logical 1 24 V means logical 0 During data transmission from slave to master the current is modulated 1 5 mA represent the logical 1 11 20 mA represent a logical 0 M bus devices can be powered over the bus The number of devices which can be powered depends on the M Bus transceiver used 10 2 Hardware Installation For using the M Bus with the device an external M bus interface with an RS 232 connector is required The external interface must be connected to the serial console connector The M Bus functionality must be enabled on the device itself This is done by setting DIP switch 7 to ON This disables the console of the device and activates M Bus over the console connector After the device is rebooted the M Bus is active on the device When rebooting the device with M Bus activated
59. LonMaker TE but other LNS based network management tools can be used as well to install and configure the LINX 10X We also show how to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 6 1 Installation 6 1 1 Software Installation The LINX 10X Configurator must be used to setup the data point configuration of the LINX 10X The Configurator is installed as a plug in tool for all LNS based network management tools as well as a stand alone tool for systems without LNS System requirements e LNS 3 1 Service Pack 8 or LNS TE SP5 or higher for LNS mode e Windows XP Windows 2003 Server Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server The LINX 10X Configurator can be downloaded from the LOYTEC Web site http www loytec com When asked for the type of installation there are two options to choose from Select Typical to install the required program files Select Full to install the LONMARK resource files along with the software This option is useful when the system does not have the newest resource files 6 1 2 Registration as a Plug In Version 3 5 If the LINX 10X shall be configured using LNS based tools e g NL200 or LonMaker the LINX 10X Configurator needs to be registered as an LNS plug in In the following the process is described for LonMaker TE Otherwise please refer to the documentation of your network management tool on how to register an LNS plug in To Register in LonMaker TE 1 Open LonMaker and create a new network 2 C
60. NAT Network Address Translation router as shown in Figure 112 Note that in general only one CEA 852 device can be used behind the NAT router This mode of operation is referred to as Standard channel mode It is fully compliant with CEA 852 LOYTEC s newer devices such as the L IP and the LINX 101 support more than one CEA 852 channel member behind a NAT router This mode of operation is referred to as Extended NAT channel mode This mode introduces extensions to the standard mode which need to be supported by all members Other devices supporting the extended NAT mode are the 7 LON 600 See Section 7 3 4 on compatibility with the i LON 600 7 4 1 Automatic NAT Configuration Version 3 5 In order to use the LINX 101 behind a firewall the public NAT address and the local IP address must be set in the IP configuration menu see Section 4 2 4 By default the NAT address is determined automatically when adding the LINX 101 to the channel in the configuration server Alternatively the NAT address can be configured manually Furthermore the NAT router must be configured to forward ports 1628 and 1629 for UDP and TCP packets to the private IP address of the LINX 101 192 168 1 100 in Figure 112 In summary we can say the following parameters must be set in order to operate a LINX 101 behind a NAT router e Specify the IP address private IP address 192 168 1 100 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 145 LOYTEC e Sp
61. OK The drop down box shows all available M Bus filter templates As additional information when a filter template is chosen the number of data points is displayed which match the template Select OK to use the data points on the device 10 5 7 3 Network Management Functions Version 3 5 This section describes how the M Bus network management functions can be used It describes adding and removing M Bus devices as well as changing the baud rate or the primary address The tasks can be performed offline as well as online The Network Management dialog shown in Figure 132 shows a list of devices Devices which have been scanned using a network scan have the status online devices which have been created manually or using device templates have the status offline If a device which is online also has been scanned for device data a green checkmark is displayed in the Data column To Start the M Bus Network Management Dialog L rA Connect to the device via FTP as described in section 6 7 2 Select the M Bus dialog by clicking on the M Bus button sees pe in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab The M Bus Management dialog opens showing the Network Management tab displayed in Figure 132 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 179 LOYTEC Network Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer Device List Device Properties Device Mame Device Name Device Address Datapoints Other REL 2 2 online x
62. Section 6 10 1 6 12 4 Create an Alarm Log The alarm objects on the device contain an alarm summary live list of currently active and acknowledge pending alarms As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary To store a historical log of alarm transitions an alarm log needs to be created An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm objects Its size is configurable The alarm log is a ring buffer As soon as its size limit is reached the oldest alarm log records are overwritten by new alarm transitions To Create an Alarm Log 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the Alarm Log Object Configuration sub folder zi Global Objects fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items m 9 math Object Configuration Items Alarm Log Object Configuration i0 Items 2 In the data point list right click and select New Alarm Log from the context menu common Properties Name System Alarm Log Description Logs all system alarms 0 Log Size oo items 782 25 kB 3 Inthe Create New Alarm Log dialog enter a Name for the alarm log Optionally enter a Description 4 Entera Log Size which defines how many transitions are resident in the alarm log 5 Define a percentage for Fill Level Notification which can be used to trigger the ransmission of E Mails Fill Level Notification ic B Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
63. Subnet node learning subnet node Device Info Group learning Get Settings Config E System E mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm networks under control Figure 27 CEA 709 Router Configuration Page 4 2 8 CEA 852 Server Configuration Version 3 5 This page is only available on the LINX 101 On this configuration page the configuration server on the LINX 101 can be enabled or disabled In the drop down box Config server status select enabled and click on Save Settings to activate the configuration server Then the configuration server settings page appears as shown in Figure 28 If the configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 40 LOYTEC server is enabled the green configuration server LED labeled CS will be on otherwise it will be off The configuration server port can be changed in the Config server port field It is recommended to keep the default port setting of 1629 The field Channel name is informational only and can consist of up to 15 characters The field Channel members displays the current number of members on the IP 852 channel The field Channel mode reflects the current channel mode The LINX 101 configuration server automatically determines this mode Depending on if there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple CEA 852 devices behind one NAT router If all IP addresses are unique the mode is
64. The alarm main page displays all available alarm data points Alarm objects which have active alarms are displayed in red Click on the alarm object to be viewed This opens the alarm summary page An example is shown in Figure 38 E Alarm Microsoft Internet Explorer O x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras ay zur ck J x E v5 Suchen Favoriten 3 E Aw 4 WHIZ c F Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui config alarm_objhandle 0x 10e9Sef0 amp src_hndl 0x10e972708sre_dev O8 amp scr_id 0 amp tv_sec 12185738518tv_us Y LOYTEC LINX 100 Logged in as admin wechseln zu Links amp Snagit er Q Reload Alarm Log Summary Device Info C Alarm Object Name alarms Config O UJ Summary D Active not acknowledged 1 O Active acknowledged 1 Inactive not acknowledged 1 Others 0 i d dye 2 Details ERI AlarmTime Type Priority Description Source Name Wale Calendar O 7 Srey EUM ae ae Alarm gt o 12 08 2008 20 45 01 ow limit o overheat Alarm ar 12 08 2008 20 44 11 high limit D Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 Statistics D Q 12 08 2008 20 44 01 high limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 200 000000 cC L Web Reset Contact Logout l E a nterne A Figure 38 Alarm Summary Page Active alarms are highlighted red Inactive alarms which have not been acknowledged are rendered in green
65. XML This document contains the calendarCfg element as the root element e Caps string read only This tag contains the calendar capabilities The data type is string and the format is in XML The XML document contains the calendarCapabilities element as the root element 9 1 3 3 Alarm Objects The LINX 10X alarm objects provide the alarm summary and can be used to acknowledge alarms The alarm objects are exposed to XML DA tags Each alarm is uniquely identified by an XML alarm ID XAID The XAID must identify the alarm object and the alarm ID in that object The XAID is used in the acknowledge service to identify the alarm The XAID can also be transmitted in e mail notifications Each alarm object is represented by a folder in the OPC name space In that folder the following OPC tags shall be available e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains alarm It identifies this folder as an alarm folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Summary string Read only Reading from this tag the current alarm summary can be obtained The data type is string and the tag contains an XML document This tag should not be subscribed to as it contains a large document Subscribe to NotifyCnt instead to get notified about new alarms The root element of the XML document is the alarmSummary element e NotifyCnt unsigned R
66. and the console connected a couple of boot messages are displayed in the console before the console is turned off If the console is needed again set the DIP switch 7 to OFF and reboot the device This is required if the firmware shall be updated over the serial port using the LSU tool 10 3 M Bus Network Version 3 5 The M Bus network utilizes a two wire connection Several M Bus slave devices are connected in parallel to the transmission medium Each M bus device has a primary address in the range from 0 to 250 This primary address must be unique for each device Also a secondary address can be used for the slave devices The secondary addressing mode is currently not supported by the LOYTEC device The M Bus network also supports two kinds of broadcast messages A broadcast to address 255 does not force the slaves to give a response A broadcast to address 254 forces an answer from the slave This broadcast message is mainly used for peer to peer connections LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 170 LOYTEC The M Bus allows the use of devices with different Baud rates of up to 9600 baud M Bus devices are not always able to fulfill the complete functional specification of the M Bus standard For readout two different modes are known some slave devices implement both e A default read usually reads all the data of a device e A selective read selects the data points which are to be read Some devices also support writing s
67. b Figure 48 a OPC server node on LINX 100 b OPC server node and router on the LINX 101 If the OPC server shall only expose network variables from the local FT channel and there is no IP 852 backbone then the router is not needed In this case the user needs to commission only the OPC node To attach the FT channel to an IP 852 backbone the router in the LINX 101 needs to be commissioned See Chapter 7 for more information on the built in router and configuration server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 50 LOYTEC 5 2 Data Points 5 2 1 Overview Data points are part of the fundamental device concept to model process data A data point is the basic input output element on the device Each data point has a value a data type a direction and a set of meta data describing the value in a semantic context Each data point also has a name and a description The entire set of data points 1s organized in a hierarchy At the data point level the specific technological restrictions are abstracted and hidden from the user Working with different technologies at this level involves common work flows for all supported technologies The direction of a data point is defined as the network view of the data flow This means an input data point obtains data from the network An output data point sends data to the network This 1s an important convention to remember as different technologies may define other direction semantics
68. by the manufacturer using a DIF DIFE combination Function Field This property defines the function field of the M Bus data point Possible values for this property are instantaneous value maximum value minimum value and value during error state This number can also be specified by the manufacturer using a DIF DIFE combination Data Coding This property defines how the value for this data point is coded The information is not relevant for input data points but it is mandatory for output data points Possible values for this property are instantaneous value maximum value minimum value and value during error state This number can also be specified by the manufacturer using a DIF DIFE combination VIF VIFE The VIF and VIFE Value Information Field and VIF Extension specify the counter type and its scaling When the most significant bit of a VIF or VIFE is set another VIFE follows Up to ten VIFEs can be specified When this combination is entered also the M Bus counter type and the unit are updated according to the VIF VIFE combination M Bus Counter type This information is derived from VIF VIFE It informs about the type of the data point value e g Energy counter value or operating time LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 175 LOYTEC e M Bus Device Name This property shows the name of the M Bus device the remote data point is connected to e M Bus Device Address This property shows the address name of the M Bus
69. cal J System Registers 9 Items EH 5 In Nv aifFf az adses rctrnvons swibch nvo0S switch SMVT switch aiFFaz da207 A User Registers D Items EH 7 In Mv amp SifF r d32 rckrmeo n6 switch nyog switch SMVT swibch aifraz d3207 Be ee rae HH 8 In Mv Biff z d3207Ctrlnvo07 switch nwo switch SMVT switch eiff aza da207 a usi E 3 Ot Nw Biff z ds2 7Ckrinwi08 temp nwiD8 temp SMVT temp 61FF070d3207 nn alengar ems Mah RUIL Ma CCAD ol ee ee ma s L am CRIT Ll oo J Scheduler 0 Items 4 lud m3 chan 42 m 7 Alarm 0 Items Datapoint N ame MV STHUUds20zCtrnvill8 temp vee 2 Trend D Items Datapoint Description i i olf Remote Devices B9 Global Objects 0 0 Analog Datapoint ind Data Type M Unsigned Long 16 bit unsigned integer DLOYTEC Configurator ready E Figure 82 CEA 709 network scan results 10 Click Close when all devices needed have been scanned 6 7 7 Select and Use Network Variables Data points in the CEA709 LNS Scan folder the CEA709 Network Scan folder or in the CEA709 CSV File folder can be selected for use on the device Select those NVs which shall be used on the device To Use NVs on the Device l Go to any of the CEA709 LNS Scan CEA709 Network Scan or the CEA709 CSV File folder 2 Use the multi select feature by holding the Shift or Ctrl keys pressed 3 Click on the button e Use on Device in the tool bar
70. channel or shut down itself due to an internal error condition Off Device is non functional because the CEA 852 device has not started This can be the case if the LINX 10X uses DHCP and it has not received a valid IP configuration address from the DHCP server Flashing red at 1 Hz Device is non functional because the CEA 852 device is started but has not been configured Please add the device to a CEA 852 IP channel register in configuration server Flashing green or orange at 1 Hz The LINX 10X s CEA 709 side of the gateway has not been commissioned yet The color indicates the CEA 852 IP channel status as described above Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 28 LOYTEC 3 4 8 CS RNI LED On the LINX 101 this LED indicates the status of the CEA 852 configuration server If illuminated green the configuration server is enabled On the LINX 100 this LED indicates the remote network interface RNI status The LED is dark if RNI is not supported by this device or the interface is not enabled The LED is green if the RNI is currently in use 3 4 9 Wink Action If the LINX 10X receives a wink command on any of its network ports it shows a blink pattern on the CNIP and the CEA 709 activity LEDs The CEA 709 activity and the CNIP LED turn green orange red each 0 15 s This pattern is repeated six times After that the CNIP LED flashes orange six times if the wink command was received on the IP channel or
71. connect those data points to other technologies and expose M Bus data points to OPC tags All AST functions can be used directly on M Bus data points Especially trending data and polling for data on M Bus devices has been optimized for automatic meter reading applications For debugging purposes a protocol analyzer is included in the firmware For more information on how to set up the device for using M Bus configuring and using M Bus data points refer to Chapter 10 In addition to the basic network technologies above this device supports the Modbus RTU and the Modbus TCP interface To gain access to the Modbus network the appropriate interfaces have to be activated either in the console user interface or in the web UI Modbus RTU is operated with 8N1 A Modbus port can either be operated as Modbus master or Modbus slave Through the Modbus interface the device can be used to connect data points to other technologies and expose Modbus data points to OPC tags All AST functions can be used directly on Modbus data points Especially trending data and polling for data on Modbus devices has been optimized for automatic meter reading applications For debugging purposes a protocol analyzer is included in the firmware For more information on how to set up the device for using Modbus configuring and using Modbus data points refer to Chapter 11 This document covers LINX 10X devices with firmware version 3 5 and the LINX 10X Configurator v
72. connection_csv_ver 1 ConnectionName HubDPName TargetDPName nvoAbs humidl LINX 100 CEA709 Port abs humidl LINX 100 User Registers abs humidl nvoAbs humid2 LINX 100 CEA709 Port abs humid2 LINX 100 User Registers abs_humid2 nvoAbs humid3 LINX 100 CEA709 Port abs humid3 LINX 100 User Registers abs humid3 nvoAbs humid4 LINX 100 CEA709 Port abs humid4 LINX 100 User Registers abs humid4 Figure 97 Example Connection CSV File 4 Select the menu Tools Import Connections 5 If connections that are not part of the connection CSV file shall be deleted click Yes when prompted Click No if the other connections shall be left as is j Clear existing connections before importing Ja Mein Abbrechen 6 Choose the file to import and click Ok 7 When the import has completed optionally view the log to check which connections have been added modified and deleted 6 9 3 Modify Connections Version 3 5 Connections can be edited and deleted This is also done in the Connections tab of the main window Editing connections does not influence the data point configuration This means when deleting a connection or adding removing data points to from a connection the data points are not deleted To Edit a Connection 1 Change to the Connections tab of the main window 2 Select the connection to edit Then follow the steps as applied when creating a connection 3 To delete a targe
73. data point Tip After creating a data point the poll group can be changed in the data points property view Also multi select can be used Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 184 LOYTEC 10 5 7 5 Importing via Device Templates For some M Bus devices special templates are available which specify all available data points of an M Bus device as well as the device properties Such templates can be imported into the configuration To import an M Bus Device Template 1 Right click on the Folder M Bus Device Templates and select Import device template from the context menu 2 This opens the Import M Bus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 135 Import M Bus Template Template File i Creakor Creation Dake amp Time Company Mame Version Ee Device Model Name Cancel Import Manufacturer Code Figure 135 Import M Bus Device Template dialog 3 Press the button and select a template file from the Open dialog 4 After selecting the file the device information is displayed 5 Press Import for importing the template or Cancel for closing the dialog without any changes 6 When a template is imported a folder with the name of the device is created Under this folder a Datapoints folder containing the data points from the template file is created Tip Data points can be added to the data points of the template by right clicking in the data point list an
74. default for input data points The poll cycle can be edited individually in the properties view of the data point manager Use state member of SNVT switch as This setting defines how the state member of the SNVT switch shall be mapped to a data point Depending on how the data point shall be used it can be binary or multi state The multi state setting allows setting the UNSET state explicitly As a binary point the UNSET state is implicitly chosen if the value 1s invalid Omit unused child data points of UNVT UCPT structures This setting defines that if set also unsued sub data points of user defined structure types are not downloaded onto the device This option can reduce the total amount of data points in the configuration As a default it is not enabled to allow full structure information after an upload to the PC even if the user does not have the original resource files installed Configuration Download This group box contains self configuration settings for the CEA 709 ports This is necessary if the device shall be used without being commissioned by a network management tool Set the check mark and enter the CEA 709 domain and subnet node information If operated in self configured mode the CEA 709 network can be scanned using the network scan see Section 6 7 6 and external NVs can be used on the device Note that the domain must match the nodes domain on the network and the subnet node address must not be used by another dev
75. defines if the last written value shall be stored as a persistent value Persistent data points restore that value after a restart from the persistent storage See Section 5 2 4 Default Value This property defines a default value see Section 5 2 3 Enter a default value to enable this feature in the data point Delete the value entirely to remove the default value If no default value is defined this property reads N A The default is no default value Point Type This is the base data point type e g Analog Datapoint Direction This is the data point direction Use input or output as directions Unit Text For analog data points this property contains a human readable text for the engineering units of the scalar value e g kilogram Analog Datapoint Max Value For analog data points this property contains the upper limit of the supported value range Note that this does not define an alarm limit Analog Datapoint Min Value For analog data points this property contains the lower limit of the supported value range Note that this does not define an alarm limit Analog Datapoint Precision For analog data points this property defines the number of decimals 0 specifies an integer value Display units may use this to format the floating point value accordingly Analog Datapoint Resolution For analog data points this property defines the smallest possible value increment Analog Point COV Increment This pr
76. dialog asks whether the changes have to be saved or not Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 189 LOYTEC To Create a Trigger Based M Bus Poll Group l 9 Select the M Bus dialog by clicking on the M Bus button sees s sw in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab In the M Bus Management dialog open the Pollgroups tab This displays the poll groups management tab displayed in Figure 138 Enter a new poll group name and select Trigger based or Trigger based with synchronization Create the poll group by pressing the Create New button Select the new poll group This enables the Add and Remove buttons from the triggers Press the Add button and select a trigger data point This can for example be a binary user register The selected trigger data point appears in the trigger list as shown Triggers Datapoint Type Triggerdatapoint Read Value Update Condition Select the trigger from the list and check the desired trigger conditions Conditions Enabled Conditions 7 True 12 D 7 False 0 7 Invalid offline The trigger conditions are then displayed in the trigger list Triggers Condition Datapoint Type Triggerdatapoint Read Value Update True 12 0 False 22 0 10 Press the Close button to leave the dialog 10 5 7 8 Trending Synchronized Meter Data The use of trigger based poll groups with synchronization allows trending synchron
77. disabled e g LINX 100 The CEA 852 protocol settings are displayed in the settings box on the right hand side as shown in Figure 26 Typically the device is added to an IP channel by entering the relevant information on a configuration server The configuration server then contacts the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X and sends its configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 38 LOYTEC Version 3 5 Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Changes will take effect after reset v TCP IP 5 Config server address 192 168 24 23 Iw FIP Config server port 1629 Iv Telnet Config client port 1628 IV HTTP Device name device 23 iv CEA 852 CEA 709 over IP Channel mode Standard Pri SNTP server Get Settings Sec SNTP server off Channel timeout ms Escrow timeout ms 64 leave empty to disable Aggregation timeout ms 16 leave empty to disable MD5 authentication off Warning This internet connection is insecure All data will be transmitted in clear text Use the console interface to change the MD5 secret in a secure way MD5 secret 16 bytes hex Location string unknown NAT Address Iv Automatic NAT leave empty to disable Multicast Address 255 0 0 39 leave empty to disable Figure 26 CEA 852 Device Configuration Page The field Config server address and Config server port display the IP address and port of the configuration server which manages the LINX 10X and the IP chan
78. doing so the original schedules in the project are replaced by the uploaded schedules If dynamic NVs were synchronized click on Finish 6 7 4 Scanning for Network Variables When the LINX 10X Configurator is connected to an LNS database network variables can be scanned from that data base Version 3 5 To scan network variables from the LNS database l Click on the Datapoints tab Fie View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help i Dco 2 El t E D Dt Connected Device 192 168 24 101 Connections Connection Overview Statistics L web Projects Click on the button a Scan channel This scans in all NVs on all devices connected to the CEA 709 channel of the LINX 10X After the scan has completed the folder LNS Database Scan is populated with the found NVs Data point names for those NVs are automatically generated following the data point naming rules defined in the project settings see Section 6 3 2 By default the name is generated from node name object name and NV name These names are ensured to be unique by adding a counter for multiple occurrences of the same name LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 95 LOYTEC how LOYTEC LINZ 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt i m x File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 8 x D HSJ t 8E sot Connected Device linsc100 test3 Subsystem 1ilins Channel FT 10 Info Status Configured Online
79. encoded using Code 128 An additional label is also supplied with the LINX 10X for documentation purposes A virtual ID VID is a Node ID on the IP channel 3 3 Mounting The device comes prepared for mounting on DIN rails following DIN EN 50 022 The device can be mounted in any position However an installation place with proper airflow must be selected to ensure that the LINX 10X s temperature does not exceed the specified range see Chapter 18 3 4 LED signals 3 4 1 Power LED The LINX 10X power LED lights up green when power is supplied to terminals 16 and 17 3 4 2 Status LED The LINX 10X is equipped with a red status LED see Figure 14 This LED is normally off During boot up the status LED is used to signal error conditions red If the fall back image is executed the status LED flashes red once every second 3 4 3 OPC LED The OPC Server LED illuminates green when at least one OPC client is connected to the OPC server The LED flickers on OPC XML DA traffic activity Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 27 LOYTEC 3 4 4 FT Activity LED The FT port on the LINX 10X has a three color LED green red and orange see Figure 14 Table 1 shows different LED patterns of the port and their meaning GREEN flashing at 1Hz The OPC node or LINX 101 s router port is On the LINX 101 this LED only unconfigured stops flashing 1f both node and router are commissioned RED flashing fast Traffic with hi
80. group address not yet learned are forwarded The router has no learning strategy for broadcast addresses As a result all subnet or domain wide broadcasts are always forwarded If subnet wide broadcasts shall not be forwarded please use the smart switch operating mode without subnet broadcast forwarding see Section 7 1 4 The router has no learning strategy for unique node ID addresses Node ID addressed messages are always forwarded LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 141 LOYTEC This operating mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it is fully plug amp play and no router configuration is required The disadvantage is that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with more than 10 IP 852 devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Please use the configured router mode from Section 7 1 1 for larger IP channel configurations Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for routers in the smart switch mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 7 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 7 1 3 Store and Forward Repeater The router can be configured to operate in a repeater mode where all messages ar
81. in effect Otherwise enter dates such as 30 1 2000 backto schedule O Save Reload O U T Name Calendar Description 9 Effective Period From F hey ES To f T T Uu Calendar Patterns Pattern Configuration ah HB Pattern Name Pattern Name holiday O Type Date 7 Add new entry T gt e Ae Y Delete Selected Add new entry 14 A hd EE Delete Selected Figure 37 Calendar Configuration Page On the remainder of this page work from left to right Click on a calendar pattern or create a new calendar pattern by clicking Add new entry A calendar pattern defines a set of pattern entries which defines the actual dates or date ranges In the example in Figure 37 the calendar pattern Holidays is selected In the Pattern Configuration box the calendar pattern s name can be edited It also lists the entries New entries can be added by clicking Add new entry Existing entries can be Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 49 LOYTEC selected and edited in the box on the right hand side In the example in Figure 37 the date 14 7 is selected which means The 14 7 of every year Other entry types such as Date Range and Week and Day can be selected See Section 5 4 3 for more information about defining exception dates 4 2 15 Alarm The Web interface provides the alarm page to view the currently pending alarms of its alarm data points
82. in the data point manager drag it onto a scheduler data point and drop it on the scheduler data point 6 Enter a short text in the Description field in the second column of each line This text will serve as a label which will be shown on the device s UI to identify the data point Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Detach Selected Datapoint Attach Datapoints Description Location Group Default nvo current LINA 11 0 00 7 Add new value presets by entering a name and pressing the Create button next to the input field Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 120 LOYTEC Tip Tip Mew Preset Mame devi Create To generate presets automatically for multi state data points click the Auto Create button This button is available if no other presets have been defined yet 8 For each new preset a new column will appear in the list In this column enter the desired value for each of the attached points which will be set when this value template is scheduled The user may later edit the values for each preset on the device but cannot add new value presets unless there is only one line one value in the list 0 00 16 00 9 Ifthere are multiple output values which belong together they can be grouped in order to save space on the device For each group the entered value is stored only once even if there are more data points in the same group Default day oo0 2100 16 00 LIN
83. is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines whether the tag is read only or read write e Item Description String This is the description of the data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 159 LOYTEC 9 1 2 5 Structured Data Points Important Structured data points are modeled as one user type data point which contains the entire structure value as a byte array The respective structure fields are created as sub data points of appropriate class For example a SNVT switch in CEA 709 would be modeled as one user type data point of 2 bytes length and two sub data points one an analog value member and one a multi state state member The relation between user type data point and sub data points is also exposed to OPC In this case an OPC node is created for the user type data point In that node the sub data points are exposed as OPC tags The entire structure is also exposed as a user type OPC tag under the same OPC node Deselect any un used structure members from OPC exposure to reduce the number of total OPC tags It is important to note that when using structured data points the top level and all its structure members are exposed as OPC tags by default Using many structured data points may lead to e
84. make CEA 852 protocol features like Escrowing Channel Timeout work properly The SNTP timeserver can be specified on the IP 852 channel level in the configuration server which distributes the timeserver address to all CEA 852 devices on the IP 852 channel A primary and a secondary SNTP server can be defined please refer to Section 4 2 6 and Section 4 2 8 on how to enable the SNTP server 7 8 Advanced Topics 7 8 1 Aggregation Aggregation or packet bunching is a technique that collects multiple CEA 709 packets into a single larger IP packet Aggregation improves overall system performance since one IP 852 packets now carries multiple CEA 709 packets und with the same number of IP 852 transactions more CEA 709 packets can be exchanged between LINX 101 devices thus reducing protocol overhead The Aggregation Timeout defines the time period in ms in which the transmitting device collects the CEA 709 packets before it transmits the IP 852 packet over the IP 852 channel Please refer to Section 4 2 6 on how to enable aggregation Note that aggregation adds a delay to the transactions but dramatically improves the throughput of your IP 852 channel Use aggregation if you have a high channel load but can tolerate some additional propagation delay given by the aggregation time value 7 8 2 MD5 Authentication Version 3 5 MDS authentication is a method of verifying the authenticity of the sending device Only devices that have MD5 enable
85. modified later at run time To Create a Calendar Pattern In 2 Select an existing calendar data point Right click and select Create Calendar Pattern Enter a Pattern Name in the Create Calendar Pattern dialog Create New Pattern Pattern Name Holidays Click Create Pattern The dialog closes and the calendar pattern appears beneath the calendar data point Local calendar objects Mao Direction Calendar Mame Index Func Black Use ID E 1 In calendar D 1030 6 11 3 Create a Local Scheduler For scheduling data points a scheduler object must be created Under each port folder multiple local scheduler objects can be created These local schedulers can then be configured to schedule data points Version 3 5 To Create a Local Scheduler l Under the port folder select the Scheduler sub folder to create a scheduler Ef CEA7D8 Port 77 Datapoints 1 Items 7 Calendar 1 Items SE Right click in the data point list view and select New Local Scheduler Enter a name for the schedule and a description Note that the schedule automatically detects a calendar if it has previously been created LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 119 LOYTEC Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Mame scheduler Description Heating Setpoint Schedule Calendar calendar 4 Click Create Schedule The new schedule appears in the data point list of the Scheduler sub folder 6 11 4 Configure
86. number of devices can be specified in the input field under the Device IP Address field LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 202 LOYTEC 3 Click on the Create with DP button This opens the Import Modbus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 150 4 Press the button and select a template file from the Open dialog 5 After selecting the file the device information is displayed 6 Press Import for importing the template or Cancel for closing the dialog without any changes 7 When a template is imported a folder with the name of the device is created Under this folder a Datapoints folder containing the data points from the template file is created 8 The created device is shown in the list together with the number of data points To Remove a Modbus Device 1 Select the device which has to be removed also multi select is possible 2 Press the Remove Device button If the device already has data points these data points have to be deleted before the remove can be performed To Change the Properties of a Modbus Device 1 Select the device This shows the device properties Device Properties Type Rs 485 Device Mame us110 15 Device Address 5 i 55 Device IP Address Sis Number of Devices lf J Increase Device Address Read Single Registers Manufacturer Details Manufacturer elmeasure Model ugs 10 2 Update the properties which have to be changed 3 Pres
87. number of Modbus packets received e Rx bytes number of bytes received e Tx packets number of Modbus packets sent e Tx bytes number of bytes sent e Timeout errors number of communication errors timeout Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 195 LOYTEC e Checksum errors number of communication errors wrong checksum 11 3 4 Modbus Protocol Analyzer By activating the link Protocol Analyzer available in all Modbus statistics tabs the protocol analyzer page is shown as displayed in Figure 144 LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as guest Start Protocol Analyzer Status Stopped Device Info Protocol analyzer log is empty Config Statistics m P Alarm Log L Web networks under control Figure 144 Modbus protocol analyzer Next to the button the status of the protocol analyzer is shown If the analyzer is started an automatic refresh is performed every 60 seconds By pressing the button Start Protocol Analyzer Stop Protocol Analyzer the protocol analyzer can be started stopped For every frame sent or received a line 1s presented using comma separated values 11 4 Configurator This section describes how to use the Configurator software for the management of Modbus data points For further information on the Configurator software refer to Chapter 6 11 4 1 Activating Modbus Configuration Before a new Modbus configuration can be managed the Modbus option must be enable
88. of value conditions or when a trigger is activated Trend log objects can trend either local or remote data points The trend data is stored in a binary format on the device The capacity of a given trend log is configured The trend log can be operated in one of two modes 1 In linear mode the trend file fills up until it reaches its capacity It then stops logging 2 In ring buffer mode In this mode the oldest log records are overwritten when the capacity is reached Trended data points can be logged as their actual values at given time instants or as an aggregated value over the defined log interval Aggregation can be calculated as minimum maximum or average Aggregation can be beneficial if the trended value changes more frequently than the selected log interval Using aggregation the log interval can be chosen to limit the amount of logged data while preserving information of the trended value How many data points can be trended in one trend log is limited by the underlying technology So are some of the log modes Refer to the technology sections for more information The e mail function can be combined with the other AST features The format of an e mail is defined through e mail templates An e mail template defines the recipients the e mail text value parameters inserted into the text and triggers which invoke the transmission of an e mail An e mail template can also specify one or more files to be sent along as an attachmen
89. off and everyone can access the LINX 10X without entering a password Click on Change password to activate the change 4 2 Device Configuration The device configuration pages allow viewing and changing the device settings of the LINX 10X Here are some general rules for setting IP addresses port numbers and time values e Anempty IP address field disables the entry e Anempty port number field sets the default port number e An empty time value field disables the time setting 4 2 1 System Configuration Version 3 5 The system configuration page is shown in Figure 20 This page allows configuring the device s system time and other system settings The TCP IP Configuration link is a shortcut to the Ethernet port configuration Follow that link to change the IP settings of the device The time sync source can be set to auto manual NTP or LonMark In the auto mode the device switches to the first external time source that is discovered Possible external time sources are NTP LonMark The option manual allows setting the time manually in the fields Local Time and Local Date In manual mode the device does not switch to an external time source Note that if NTP is selected the NTP servers have to be configured on the IP Configuration page see Section 4 2 4 The time zone offset must be defined independently of the time source It is specified as the offset to GMT in hours and minutes e g Vienna Austria is 01 00 New York USA i
90. shows up under Already Registered Network Properties x Authentication Domain Timing LonMiaker Options Remote Lightweight Client Access Permission Lightweight Client Options Maming Server Location Network Interface Resource File Languages Logon Plug in Registration Plug in Registration El Not Registered Reuister H Echelon LNS Report Generator Version 3 20 Echelon Lontiaker XML Interface version 3 20 LOYTEC Gateway Configuration tility Version 3 0 13 LOYTEC XIF Builder version 1 4 0 LPAConvFlugin version 2 2 Enable H L Vis Configuration version 3 1 1 E ORION Firmware Loader Version 1 0 i i Disable El Already Registered Echelon Lonblaker Bra Dereqister EELOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator version 3 0 Remo i Disabled EITIWE i Mot Installed Locally v Skip this prompt when re opening this drawing Register all new plug ins when re opening this drawing Abbrechen bernehmen Hilfe Figure 53 Check that the LINX 10X Configurator is properly registered Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 71 LOYTEC 6 1 3 Operating Modes The Configurator can be used in on line off line and stand alone mode On line and off line mode refers to the 2 operating modes of your LNS network management software e On line Mode This is the preferred method to use the configuration utility The network management tool is attached to the network and all net
91. software in the download process 6 15 Math Objects 6 15 1 Create a Math Object Version 3 5 Math objects are advanced application objects that can execute mathematical operations on data points A math object takes a number of input data points variables vi v Vn and calculates a result value according to a specified formula When configuring a math object the input data points output data points and the formula must be configured by the user Input data points can be configured with a change of value condition to trigger the math calculation only if the value changes more than a certain delta To Create a Math Object 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the Math Object sub folder il Global Objects ae 9 E mail Configuration 0 Items aoe Math Object Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select New Math Object from the context menu 3 Inthe Create New Math Object dialog enter a name and optionally a description for the math object Create New Math Object Mame wy Formula Description This adds temperatures LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 137 LOYTEC 4 Attach input data points by clicking the Add Input DP button E Remove Input DP Replace Input DP Detach Input DP Datapoint Path COV delta nviTemp1 LINX 100 CEA709 Port Datapoints 0 0 v2 nviTemp2 LINX 100 CE4709 Port Datapoints 0 0 Input Datapoint 5 In the data point selector dialog s
92. technology Maintenance Days Monday gt Result y LI 7 E NN 07 SSS S 05 NN 10 oo 1 00 qa oo 188 Tam 7500 68 47 00 88 79 00 208 oy 00 728 235 Version 3 5 10 00 00 Invalid Figure 51 Example using withdraw in an exception schedule The configuration of exceptions is done by calendar patterns in the calendar Each calendar pattern contains a number of pattern entries These entries can define the following A single date This defines a singe date Wildcards may be used in the year to specify July 14 of every year A date range This defines a range Starting with a start date and ending with the end date No wildcards should be used LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 66 LOYTEC 5 4 4 Trending 5 4 5 E mail Version 3 5 e A Week and Day definition This defines dates based on a week such as every Ist Friday in a month every Monday every last Wednesday of a month While exception days of a calendar are accessible to all schedules on a device specific exceptions can be defined which are embedded into a specific schedule These are referred to as an embedded calendar In contrast to a regular calendar each calendar pattern of an embedded calendar can hold exactly one date entry This can be a single date or a date range The embedded exception days are only visible to the schedule they are defined in Apart from these restrictions embed
93. the Attach File drop down box Attach File systemlog 7 ad 5 Click the Add button The file appears in the Attachments list Attachment Device File Path system lag jvar lag system log 6 To remove an attachment select the attachment file in the Attachments list and click the button Remove 6 10 4 Limit E mail Send Rate The transmission of e mails is triggered by the configured trigger conditions It is not predictable how often the trigger condition will cause the transmission of an e mail The e mail template can be configured to limit the number of transmitted e mails This 1s done in the Configure E mail Template dialog To configure an E mail Rate Limit configure the settings Max E mails per day This setting defines how many e mails can be sent on average per day The actual number of transmitted e mails on a specific day may be slightly higher than this setting depending on burst rates The default is 100 e mails per day This results in an average interval of one e mail per 14 minutes Send burst count This setting defines how many e mails may be transmitted shortly after each other not limited by the above average interval After the burst count the average mails per day limit takes effect The default is a maximum of 20 e mails in a row 6 11 Local Schedule and Calendar 6 11 1 Create a local Calendar As the first step the required data points must be created A calendar must be created if the schedul
94. the network to be used on the LINX 10X e g select the NVs in the CEA 709 network nodes 2 Create necessary registers math objects 3 Select those data points on the LINX 10X which shall be exposed as OPC tags The CEA 709 NVs on the LINX 10X can be created in three different ways e Static NV For each selected NV on the network there is a static NV created on the LINX 10X This NV can be bound to the NV on the network Note that adding static NVs to the LINX 10X results in a change to the default XIF file The LINX 10X is assigned a new model number to reflect this change see Section 5 5 2 Static NVs are the way to use NVs in non LNS systems where NVs shall be bound instead of using polling e Dynamic NV For each selected NV on the network there is a dynamic NV created on the LINX 10X Compared to static NVs dynamic NVs do not change the XIF interface of the LINX 10X The dynamic NVs are created by the network management tool Currently only LNS based tools can manage dynamic NVs As for static NVs with dynamic NVs it is possible to use bindings instead of polling e External NV The selected NVs on the network are treated as external NVs to the LINX 10X The LINX 10X doesn t create any NVs on the device but instead uses polling to read from those NVs and explicit updates to write to the NVs Therefore no bindings are necessary for external NVs For input data points using external NVs however a poll cycle must be configur
95. to can be changed in the properties view of the data points The poll group can also be changed for multiple data points using multi select To Create a Time Based Poll Group 1 Select the Modbus dialog by clicking on the Modbus button Tto a CEA H Moo WEN UU t 708 Bus LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 208 LOYTEC in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab This opens the Modbus Management dialog 2 Open the Pollgroups tab This shows the dialog displayed in Figure 155 Modbus Device Management Pollaroups Protocol Analyzer R5 485 Protocol Analyzer TCP Pollgroups Properties Pollgroup Mame Default Pollgroup FPollcycle 5 60 Pollgroup Mode Time based Delayed response Hald tirne ms Wait time ms Delete Selected Update Selected Create Mew Group Enable Disable Datapoint E sel Remove Triggers Conditions Default Pollgroup 60 Condition Enabled Conditions dd Remove Figure 155 Pollgroup Management dialog 3 The default poll group is selected and its properties are displayed Enter the name of the new poll group and enter the poll cycle in seconds Make sure that under Pollgroup Mode Time based 1s selected 4 Press the Save button to store the poll group and continue editing 5 Ifa poll group needs to be updated or deleted select the poll group edit the data and press the Update Selected or Delete Selected button 6 Press the
96. writing TRUE to this tag the log is purged e TotalCnt unsignedInt read only This tag contains the total number of logged records This number can be larger than the BufferSize e BufferSize unsignedInt read write The size in records of the log buffer Writing to this tag can resize the log buffer if it 1s disabled e LogHandle string read only const This handle specifies the data log The logHandle must be used with the proprietary Data Log Web service e CsvFile string read only const This tag specifies the file path and file name of the CSV data log file e CentralDLO CentralDL1 string read write These tags serve as placeholders for the central data logger to store its URI The tag CentralDLO is intended for the primary CentralDL1 for the secondary central data logger The tags are stores in non volatile memory and retain their values over a power on reset For more information on the central data logger refer to LWEB 801 User Manual 4 9 1 3 5 E mail Templates E mail templates can be configured in the LINX 10X Configurator software When an e mail template is triggered the corresponding e mail is transmitted The e mail template can also be triggered over the OPC interface Therefore a node is added to the OPC name space for each e mail template under the E Mail node Each e mail node is named after the e mail template and contains the following OPC tags e ServiceType string Read only const T
97. 0 ect L3 Statistics 18 Ttems Egma Denies ceaes2 Port i M Bus Port L3 Doateponts 3 Theres Bl E Mal Configuration 0 Iter Math Object Configuration 0 Theme Bl Alert Log Cegecr Configuration 0 Rems Figure 127 Data Point Manager Dialog with M Bus folder list eal EN o la E petapoin Mame M Bus Counter Type Storage Tariff Subuni Function Device Address 1D Electricity JAM 4 Operating Time Operating Time 2 instal 4 1055 20 4 In Eleckriciby JAM 4 Operating Time Operating Time E instal 4 1056 HEHN Electricity JAN 4 Operating Time3 Operating Time n n instal 4 22 mM In Electricity JAM 4 Operating Timet Operating Time 5 insEVal 4 1058 24 mM In Electricity JAM 4 Operating Time5 Operating Time n 6 instal 4 1059 24 mM In Electricity JAM 4 Operating Timed Operating Time instal 4 1054 23 M In Electricity J M 4 Current Current B 4 instal 4 1056 26 v In Electricity JAM 4 Power Power B B 5 inst Val 4 1 5c ef mM In Electricity _JAM_4_Power1 Power B 6 instal 4 1050 22 rz a ee A E um i oe Figure 128 Datapoint Manager Dialog with M Bus Data Point List 10 5 3 Folder List At the left is a list of folders which is used to sort the available data objects by their category There are a number of predefined M Bus folders available All other folders are described in section 6 2 1 e Imported This folder has a number of sub folders for different import methods
98. 05 07 16 33 57 288 RTL RCV 1 27892 29 0103 1800 00 00 00 an 00 an 000000000000 a0 0000000000 B C 14 009 085 07 16 33 7 2851 RTII Mh 1 1771 7 pnt ns nn nn AN nme 45 Figure 158 Typical protocol analyzer output for Modbus RS 485 port Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 212 LOYTEC 12 Operating Interfaces 12 1 Common Interface 12 1 1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files The daily schedule and calendar pattern configuration can be changed at run time over the Web UI or the network An alternative way to change that configuration is to download a schedule and calendar XML file via FTP onto the device After the file has been downloaded the new configuration becomes effective immediately The device does not need to be rebooted The files are located in tmp uid sched UID xml tmp uid cal UID xml The UID is the unique ID of the data point The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list as shown in Figure 108 A schedule data point with UID 107C would result in the schedule XML file tmp uid sched 107C xml The UID remains constant for the life time of the data point even when the name or description is changed The content of the XML file must be compliant to the scheduleCfg schema This schema can be found at the LOYTEC Web site The XML documents can refer to the target namespace http www loytec com xsd scheduleCfg 1 0 12 1 2 Trend Log CSV File Version 3 5 The CSV file format fo
99. 0Controller 1nvi 3lux output analog invalid value 5 G3 Alam NV tn50Controller 1nvo04ley percentinput analog 0 8 normal a NV_tn50Controller_ 1nvi 5lev percent output analog invalid value un a Trend NV tn50Controller 1nvoO06temp f input analog 0 800000071525574normal E E mail x C3 Statistics NV tn50Controller 1nvi 7temp f output analog invalid value B Data Points Oo Remote Devices NV tn50Controller 1nvoO08switch input user 0000 normal i Trend C CE4852 Port value input analog 0 normal B Scheduler Far state input multistate 0 normal Calendar D NV tn50Controller 1nvi 9switch output user invalid value W Alarm C value output analog invalid value state output multistate invalid value Statistics Figure 13 Verify the data point configuration on the Web interface Note that the auto generation created dynamic NVs as counterparts to the scanned NVs on the CEA 709 network and also created bindings for those NVs If static NVs or external NVs with polling shall be used on the CEA 709 network or more advanced NV selection schemes shall be employed please refer to Chapter 5 to learn more about the Configurator software 2 4 Connect with an OPC XML DA Client After the configuration has been downloaded to the LINX 10X it is ready to serve OPC XML DA clients Connect to the LINX 10X using the URL http 192 168 24 99 DA given that 192 168 24 99 is the IP address of the LINX 10X Note that by default writing to OPC tags
100. 110 1 1 44 moddev 1 moddewv 2 moddey 3 ugsiio_i_i_ dl Version 3 5 Device Address IP Address 4 Datapoints Template D evice Properties Type ns 485 ed 44 R5 485 45 elmeasuretempla 1 R5 485 Device Mame p5 185 0 Device Address 1255 3 R5 485 Device IP Address E MED x NEU 1 192 168 34 TCP 45 elmeasuretempla Mumber of Devices i Increase Device Address Read Single Registers Manufacturer Details Manufacturer Model Device Operations ateate Device Greate From Template Rene Device Greate with BR Update Devine Export Device Templi Figure 149 Modbus management dialog To Add a Modbus Device Manually m Fill in the Device Address and select the Type either RS485 or TCP from the drop down box A Device Name can be specified If no device name is specified the device name is created automatically If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the number of devices can be specified in the input field under the Device IP Address field If a number of TCP devices has to be created subsequent IP addresses are configured If the checkbox Increase Device Address is checked also the Device Addresses unit IDs of the TCP devices are increased Number of oevel The Device Address specifies the address of the Modbus device ranging from 1 to 255 In case of a TCP device the device address specifies the unit ID For a RS
101. 14 2 Firmware Update via the Console eee eee eere eere eee eene nene 223 15 Bnrdinrnpueee ti devetoccccsdieteecveseseabsceetedevelocccbschezeecvexecedbsceatetess 225 Isl Technical SuppOEt 5o itii teretes ep err Dore o oeste ry edes cond ees EAEra deseas 225 15 2 Statistics on the Consoles ien di E xoi rt DU edt Exe dues ecaD 225 I5 2 1 Connecting to the Console uuu rase t Rn RRHREUEN EE E UE 225 15 2 2 Reset configuration load factory defaults ssssss 226 15 253 DEVICE stasies Meninos esed rubato ten tet erbe demi 226 EG ADDIICAHOn NO GS o iieect eo one eee RISE EE ARE O a eee ne open EEN OU dcs 229 WGA Whe LSD L00L zaoinici ceoe ie eiiete iei P eteot cob etoa toi bot ea eet 1i Poo E Cortos coi tado 229 16 2 Use of Static Dynamic and External NVs on a Device 229 LPP IPM WAC V CFSIONS saccvscessinsvecessselasstasseddcaccvcsesseaasecessbelanssadseedcaceuseoaccedecsast 230 TS SPCC CAUTIONS e e 231 181 TEN Xe VON qu M 231 PS Physical SpectHicdliofis dose nete tp e oie tpm e odas 231 IS Resource TCLHHES cuo ooa Er EA N A EA 231 IO Reier it eS anana r A E 233 ZU Revision PHISEOEY otii iei ci doin e eaa aa Teaia 234 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 11 LOYTEC Version 3 5 Abbreviations NOOB aSe T oiin 100 Mbps Ethernet network with RJ 45 plug Aggregation
102. 149 T nternet Timing ASP eCts sisscesesessesssses cccdetesderasscssctesiessansscecncteadestisccssccatessesssiees 150 Teele Chann TI OU E NT T tats tate T TT 150 oe Meanie RID TL M 150 7 7 3 Escrowing Timer Packet Reorder Timer sessesssss 151 Telk SINSDPCEIBOSSCEVOE onana a E OA 151 LS Advanced TO PCS uiii rh ERE EI v loe p aii ia ai 151 TO SASOLTOBOLTOED sedeo ten Mese pat a ERbU Tet Masse bad a tubo et Mese bedoes 151 758 2 IVD SAUCE AG OI oer Ergo op Ra ERU Sacenceaasacsharsdotieguanacecomsanecensniaee 151 Tos Dynami NAT Addtesseson eee tet ien eem redeem a 152 8 The LINX 100 RN c cccccscsscsssoccccsccsccscescescescescsscuscuscuscescsscscesecsecsecsessscenees 153 MEE Igi Er 153 85 2 Remote LEA Op ration iiio nti uerb oras e FLEVO aes seteaasevtouicassdevecvessaveeses 153 Ml s dad ge c T 155 9 1 XML DA OPC Server 1 i eirees Pese eben idea asina e eed beu aea Pl Ee age peRA Dua ee RR e eed oe iode 155 OC Access MEUIOQS nien Itin a uU Rs diRs eda dE 155 LEZ Data POMS oe irc oett etea aede O AE 156 DAS AS OIC CUS deae s RENE UA ORE EM MI na AEN 159 92 Usmo E WEDB uer unie eios ee iie resin 161 92 L Created new Lew EG Project sse ee ert tu AER EST ru RUE 162 922 Starta Graphical L WEB D SIPti ies t tete is 163 923 Organize LW ED Projects xcexodtose to ndr I eee nee a 163 9 5 Usine the OPC Br
103. 19 LOYTEC 13 Network Media 13 1 FT The LINX 10X FT port is fully compatible to the parameters specified by LONMARK for this channel FT ports can also be used on Link Power LP 10 channels However the LINX 10X does not provide the power supply for Link Power channels When using the Free Topology Segment feature of the FT only one termination Figure 159 is required and can be placed anywhere on the free topology segment Instead of building the termination one can order the L Term module LT 33 from LOYTEC which can be used to properly terminate the bus 100 uF 50V 52 3 Q E 100 uF 50V Figure 159 FT Free Topology Termination In a proper bus topology two terminations are required Figure 160 These terminations need to be placed at each end of the bus Here also L Term modules can be used at either end 100 uF 50V 100 uF 50V 105 Q 105 Q 100 uF 50V 100 uF 50V Figure 160 Termination in an FT Bus Topology Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 220 LOYTEC 13 2 M Bus The LINX uses the RS 232 console interface for the connection to an external M Bus transceiver repeater The M Bus specifies no special topology requirement though it is not advised to use a ring topology A maximum of 250 M Bus slave devices can be connected to the bus in fact the external bus transceiver can have a lower limit of connected devices Please refer to the datasheet of the transc
104. 415116 normal 7 Free Flash input analog 3871588 normal Supply Voltage input analog 15 1 normal a System Temp input analog 41 5 normal v Application Vendor input analog invalid value Authentication Code output analog invalid value N Authentication Result input binary FALSE normal 011301 S Serial Number input string 300000039E88 normal Dy MAC Address input user 000AB00126F7 normal ae Firmware Version input X string 3 5 0 normal Device IP Address input X string 192 168 24 101 normal Device IP Port input analog 80 normal TZ Offset input analog 3600 normal Figure 31 Data point page The data point is in normal operation state and possesses a value The data point has no valid value offline config unreliable offline unreliable range not configured Line grayed out The data point has a value but it is not reflected on the network due to a configuration error not commissioned no binding no client mapping etc The data point has a value but it is not reflected on the network due to a communication error e g the peer node is not online The data point has a value but it is considered unreliable because it was derived from a source which was offline e g the value was fed from a connection where the source is offline The data point has a value but it is considered unreliable because the value source specified an out of range value The value is limited to the supported range
105. 485 device the device address has to be unique TCP devices can have equal device addresses For TCP devices the Device IP Address has to be specified If the device is not able to read adjacent registers with one read command activate the checkbox Read Single Registers The optional manufacturer details just represent Manufacturer name and Model name This information is used to identify device templates Click on the Create Device button This creates the Modbus device and adds it to the device list on the left hand side of the dialog When a device is selected the device information is displayed in the appropriate fields on the right hand side of the dialog The information can be changed in the fields Press the Update Device button to store the changes If a device has to be deleted select the device and press the Remove Device button LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 201 LOYTEC Tip Version 3 5 To Add a Modbus Device Manually Using a Template without Creating Data Points 1 Enter a name for the Modbus device in the Device Name field If no name is specified the name is created automatically from the name in the template file 2 Fill in the Device Address and select the Type either RS485 or TCP from the drop down box If TCP is selected also enter the Device IP Address If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the number of devices can be specified in the i
106. 52 channel in the configuration server member list If the LINX 101 should also act as the configuration server please proceed to Section 4 2 8 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 19 2 2 2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface Version 3 5 LOYTEC Optionally to using the console interface one can also use the Web interface to configure the client device In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192 168 1 254 of the LINX 10X Note that if your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192 168 1 xxx please open a command tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the LINX 10X To Add a Route to the Device 5 Windows START gt Run Enter cmd and click OK In the command window enter the command line route add 192 168 1 254 sSCOMPUTERNAME Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192 168 1 254 DLOYTEC LINX 100 Device Info Config Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout networks under control Product name LINX 100 Product code LINX 100 Firmware LINX 10x Primary Image Version 3 5 0 Build date 2010 02 25 16 48 37 Serial number 011501 80000001DFA6 Free memory 8042K 561K Free flash 4267K CPU load 2 6 System temperature 43 0 C Supply voltage 23 7V Project Information Project file linx 21_remote_sched_linx0 Project timestamp 2010 02 16 15 40 13 CEA 709 application unique node IDs and program IDs CEA
107. 6 7 4 Scanning for Network Variables sse 94 6 7 5 Importing Network Vartablesco usse epi ed Dad de oet ES 95 6 7 6 Scanning NVs online from the Network sss 96 6 7 7 Select and Use Network Variables sese 99 6 78 Change the NV Allocation c ced eet a eere pet bertus tees 99 OTO CREASE Sale NV S gic esed ed addio a anaaseehaduduseuaueuss 100 6 7 10 Create External DN Seeng sua teca ediciones lode di nainaaceerseattureeuelan 101 6 7 Lb Create User BebglStel Soo es ttr eo tesa dv tte s T 103 6 7 12 Configuration Download sese eene 104 6 713 Bula XIF for Port Net aCe soa cus oete eoe Seneca ds iom pane Fett naa o ieusabdos 105 6 M4 Enable L gacy NM Mode scarce hop SERO ipaa repe eie epos o ix 105 6 7 15 Upload Dynamic NVs from Device ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 106 6 2 F6 Upload the System LOT arietis eo E dh atti tur ts ewan esu RA RIMIS 106 6 8 Advanced CEA 709 Configuration eee e eee eere eee eene eene eene tetto 107 6 8 1 Import Devices from XIF Templates se 107 6 5 2 Install Unconticured DeviIGes ios odio tes eo is iere add dai etos e ie 108 6 8 3 Using Feedback Data Points seeeeeenneneneeeeeeennn 109 6 8 4 Working with Configuration Properties sn 110 6 8 5 Working with UNVTs UCPTS sse 111 OF COMMCCUONS aee ei io a Ra Een Had a O
108. 6 ethO0 62 178 95 96 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 81 109 145 243 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 SIS BUS 251 56 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 3606 ethO0 TA T0 I2TDz0 0 l UH 0 0 0 lol 130 140 10 21 l192 199 01 UGH 1 6 0 ethO 192 168 0 0 292959525940 U 0 0 3 ethO 192 168 0 4 00 04 5A 26 96 1F UHL 7 0 1722 ethO0 213 18 80 166 192 168 0 1 UGH 1 148 0 ethO KKKKKKKKKKKK TCP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKK UDP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK total input packets 924 total output packets 158 KKKKKKKKKKKK ICMP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK Figure 171 IP Statistics The IP statistics menu has the additional feature of displaying any IP address conflicts If the device s IP address conflicts with another host on the network the banner shown in Figure 172 is displayed WARNING Conflicting IP address detected IP address 10 125 123 95 also used by device with MAC address 00 04 5A CC 10 41 Clear IP conflict history y n Figure 172 IP Address Conflict Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 228 LOYTEC As useful information the MAC address of the conflicting host is shown If the information about this conflict shall be cleared enter y If n is selected the conflict will show up again the next time this menu is entered Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 229 LOYTEC 16 Application Notes 16 1 The LSD Tool Please refer to application note ANOO2E LSD Tool for further
109. 65 LOYTEC oo oo 1 oo ES Tam pras 5 oo Apart from the defined value presets there exist special events that can be scheduled in a daily schedule They affect how the scheduler behaves and which exception is active Invalid If this value is scheduled the scheduler transmits the invalid value The numeric representation of that invalid value is defined by the underlying data point and is technology specific Withdraw If this value is scheduled the scheduler takes the previously value preset out of effect This means that the daily schedule with the next lower priority becomes effective If no daily schedule with lower priority applies the scheduler behaves as if it was disabled Figure 50 presents an example of the Maintenance Day exception day which schedules the maint value at 6 am and goes out of effect at 10 am If the maintenance day falls on a Monday the regular schedule for Monday will be overridden by the Maintenance schedule at 6 am and become effective again at 10 am sending the day value Temporary Disable If this value is scheduled the entire scheduler is disabled until a new event is scheduled in a daily schedule of the same or higher priority than the one that has the temporary disable event This type of event can be used to define periods for manual override Please also refer to the technology specific limitations described in Section 6 11 to learn about special behavior of the respective networking
110. 67212 September 2008 LWEB 800 User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document Ne 88074203 April 2009 LWEB 801 User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document Ne 88074703 April 2009 L VIS User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document Ne 88068512 August 2008 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 234 LOYTEC 20 Revision History 2007 02 08 02 08 Mus CES emu Initial revision V1 0 for L OPC 1 0 Lxekoee s0 STS WsirevsonYADRLINKIXGO C2000213 32 PP Added Section 63 Connections Chaper 10 Bus 2009 05 14 3 3 Updated for LINX 10X firmware release 3 3 added Chapter 11 Modbus added section 6 2 5 Behavior on Value Changes added section 6 2 6 Custom Scaling added section 7 8 2 Create Connections from a CSV File 2009 06 29 3 4 STS Updated for LINX 10X firmware release 3 4 Section 6 4 3 withdraw invalid temp disable embedded calendar next state feature Section 7 2 3 renumber filter include subfolders added Section 7 8 Advanced CEA 709 configuration including installing unconfigured devices Section 7 11 7 configure embedded exceptions Section 7 11 8 configure scheduler control data points Section 7 11 9 using SNVT tod event updated Section 7 11 11 for scheduling parts of structured NVs Section 7 15 added COV delta to math objects replace data points Added Section 14 2 M Bus cabling added Section 14 3 Modbus cabling 2010 02 26 3 5 STS Updated for LINX 10X firmware release 3 5 Removed Sec
111. Analyzer Version 3 5 When connected to a device a protocol analyzer is available for each Modbus port The protocol analyzer can be found in the Modbus Management dialog On every Modbus port a protocol analyzer tab is available Figure 156 shows the Modbus protocol analyzer The status on the right hand side of the dialog shows if the device is connected or if the protocol analyzer is stopped or started When connected to a device the protocol analyzer can be started by pressing the Start Protocol button This starts the protocol analyzer in the device Every time a transmission is made on the Modbus port the transmission is displayed in the list Additionally the protocol data 1s stored in the device in a rotating log file The protocol log can hold up to 40 kB of protocol data So also when the Configurator LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 210 LOYTEC was not running for an interesting time the protocol data can be loaded from the device using the Load From Device button The protocol data can be stored as CSV file using the Save button with the Clear button the shown protocol is deleted Modbus Device Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer R 5 455 Frotocol Analyzer TCP Start Protocol Stop Protocol Load From Device Save Clear Figure 156 Modbus protocol analyzer Figure 157 shows a typical protocol analyzer output for the Modbus TCP port It shows the following information for TCP e Seq sequenc
112. CADA packages which shall visualize the LINX 10X s data points must conform to the OPC XML DA standard This means they must support the OPC Web service and not only the COM DCOM protocol If your SCADA package does not support OPC XML DA a PC based bridge from XML DA to the COM based protocol can be used The bridge software is running on a PC and translates from COM DCOM requests into XML DA Web service requests The system is depicted in Figure 119 EE s y is JF OPC XML DA Figure 119 Using a XML DA DCOM bridge With the bridge configured to access a number of LINX 10X the COM based SCADA application can access a COM based OPC server for each LINX 10X The bridge software OPCBR 800 can be purchased and installed on any PC This is discussed in Section 9 3 If L WEB is not used customers can create their own XML DA clients based on the WSDL for OPC XML DA Refer to Section 9 4 for more information 9 1 2 Data Points Version 3 5 The data point hierarchy as configured by the LINX 10X Configurator software is exposed to the OPC tag namespace by the LINX 10X This is done internally for all data points which are marked for OPC exposure 1 e have the OPC check mark set Folders are translated into OPC nodes Any of the data point classes analog binary multi state string and user are exposed as OPC tags Each OPC tag contains the value of the data point and some of its meta data An example of browsing the OPC ta
113. Channel 1 FT LAS Path EesE linx1 B Subsysbem 1 LNS Status Configured Online Download the configuration Reboot device Commission device Update device info so 00 cJ ocn CH R o Co Pe Hardware Info Firmware version 3 5 0 Build Date Wed Feb 24 11 39 07 2010 Product Cade LINX 101 Serial Number 011301 800000039E88 Device ID 21 vendor ID 1 Platform ID 7 B Model Number n Generate Free LNS Options Automatically create bindings Force Full Upgrade Show Details Controls Task Progress oot we Figure 12 Configuration Download Dialog When the configuration process is complete a dialog box is shown which must be acknowledged by clicking OK Then the LINX 10X is up and running with the new configuration To verify the configuration go to the LINX 10X s Web interface and click on Config and OPC Data Points which brings up the Web page as shown in Figure 13 The list displays current data point values and status Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 24 LOYTEC LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Reload Device Info nid a Folder CEA709 Port Datapoints tn50 i User Registers e Ca CEA709 Port Name Dir Type METTE BELG Datapoints NV tn50Controller 1nvo00temp input analog 273 2 normal U omi NV tn50Controller 1nvi Ttemp output analog invalid value O Calendar NV tn50Controller 1nvo02lux input analog 8 normal C Scheduler NV tn5
114. Configuration 4 Inthe OPC Bridge Device Properties dialog as shown in Figure 123 add information which is not default i e Min update rate Wait time and Hold Time see Section 9 3 6 If the operator user has a non default password enter the password 5 Click Export to File OPC Bridge Device Properties x COM Server Parameters Server caption LIMX 100 Server name LOYTEC OPC Server 192 165 24 92 80 CLSID 446362F68 6925 4692 86B2 BE1D4CAFFD17 BML Server Parameters Server URL htpyfiszi68 24 95 OIDA 00 Proxy User name eperator 0000000 Password operator 0000000 Min update rate 3000 msec wait Eire 10000 msec Hald time o msec Export to OPC Bridge Export En File Cancel Figure 123 Bridge Export dialog 9 3 4 Import OPC Servers Using the Configurator When using OPC server information exported by the Configurator the exported server definition must be imported to the OPC bridge This can also be done using the Configurator software The Configurator software must be installed on the same PC as the OPC bridge for doing so To Import a Server Definition 1 Open the Configurator software 2 Select the menu File gt Import OPC Bridge Configuration 3 In the file requestor select the bridge configuration XML file which has previously been exported and click OK 4 The OPC Bridge Device Properties dialog displays the imported bridge information 5 Click Export to Bridge to add the re
115. E Figure 129 Workflow for offline engineering 10 5 6 2 Online Engineering Version 3 5 This section describes how the M Bus network is set up when the network can be accessed Figure 130 shows the workflow If necessary the addresses and baud rates the M Bus devices are using can be configured using the Configurator The devices and data points can then be configured by scanning the connected devices manual configuration or also by using the M Bus device templates LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 176 LOYTEC START M Bus devices already configured in the network no Configure M Bus devices change baudrate change address section 10 5 7 3 Y Y Manually Configure M Bus devices and data points scan M Bus devices and data points Import M Bus device templates Section 10 5 7 4 Section 10 5 7 2 section 10 5 7 5 v Download Configuration to LINX section 6 7 12 DONE Figure 130 Workflow for online engineering 10 5 7 Using the Configurator for M Bus 10 5 7 1 Automatic Naming Operations which automatically generate M Bus data points or allocate M Bus devices use auto naming Automatic naming is also used when a device is applied and no device name is specified The automatic device name is concatenated from the device medium e g Electricity the 3 character M Bus manufacturer code and the address For example the device cou
116. E C ERE FR RRU REN aR T2 LER RUE KRE REC 111 69 1 Createa New Connection dreisio eene to o et So eae Musae epe Ma gca etn Fadudos 111 6 0 2 Create Connections from a CSV File eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 113 6 9 37 MD UNIV COMME CH ONS ned eer eere pod E bere tet rato Phor eed et i bereit bases bens 113 6 9 4 COMME CIO OVERVIEW axnssonedistteuntisabadvam aes osedadadin R 114 6 10 E mail L mplates 2 eea aea eae EErEE AAEE 114 6 10 1 Greate an E mail Template srete rhone EE E EE T 114 6 10 2 Trigger E mails riia AA ee O AA 115 OIO ATO MCI Snia E 116 6s LO 4 Limit mia Send Raters a a pde oui edes aUnuUA 117 6 11 Local Schedule and Calendar eee e eee ee eene eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eeene 117 oO LET Create a local Calida ied eem aio dado Uere ede iui eise ted dduds 117 Osh Create Calendar Pattetliousden ennestesCineseeert zeodesbufeddeze ted a 118 OLES Create a Local Schedulet iu oett e Oo Mean sU ven cibus E peut beau 118 6 11 4 Configure Scheduled Data Points sssseeeeeee 119 6h Cones Daily sSehediles uss s eiae or edustumm qu au I eb tu p es 120 6 11 6 Configure Exception Days ccccccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 6 11 7 Configure Embedded Exceptions seen 123 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 7 LOYTEC 6115 Conhgute Control Data Points 5225 terreas aste en RE Oe RnR 124 6 11 9 Usine the SNVT
117. EC amp Alarm Log Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q nri T M ix 2 TN JO suchen Se Favoriten Ol R wj L rel X Adresse http 192 168 24 98 webui statistics alarm log obj handle 0x10e4e8dc amp page 0 EE Wechselnzu Links amp Snaglt E Reload Upload Alarm Log Clear Alarm Log Alarm log name Alarm Log Attached alarm objects alarms Event Time State Type Priority Description Source Name a Value Ack Source Alarm Time Clear Time 12 08 2008 21 13 35 acknowledged low limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn2 0Controller 1nvi 1temp 10 000000 admin new LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 48 12 08 2008 21 13 35 12 08 2008 21 13 21 acknowledged high limit D Light Alarm NV tn2 0Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 admin new LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 13 21 12 08 2008 21 12 48 acknowledged high limit D Overheat Alarm NV tn2 0Controller 1nvi 1temp 120 000000 admin new LINx 100 12 08 2008 21 12 45 12 08 2008 21 12 48 12 08 2008 21 12 49 e low limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 10 000000 admin new LINX 100 12 08 2008 21 12 49 12 08 2008 21 12 56 ee high limit 0 Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi03lux 4000 000000 admingnew LINX 100 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 12 56 active high limit Light Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 3lux 4000 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 56 12 08 2008 21 12 49 active low limit D Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1
118. El SE 2 Right click and select Sync Dynamic NVs in the context menu The LINX 10X Configurator then loads any new dynamic NVs which have been created and are not yet part of the port interface definition The process completes when the dialog shown in Figure 90 appears Dynamic NV Synchronization Status Done Found 0 Wys 0 new O existing Figure 90 Synchronizing dynamic NVs from the device 3 Click on Finish The new dynamic NVs now appear in the data point list and can be edited and used on the device 6 7 16 Upload the System Log Version 3 5 The system log on the device contains important log messages Log messages are generated for important operational states e g last boot time last shutdown reason or errors at run time This file is important for trouble shooting and is available on the Web UI see Section 4 3 5 The file can also be uploaded from the device with the LINX 10X Configurator LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 107 LOYTEC To Upload the System Log 1 Connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP or LNS method see Section 6 7 2 2 Click on the Upload system log button File view Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web Ds HE 2M a a Alp vole in the tool bar The upload system log dialog as shown in Figure 91 opens showing the upload progress Uploading System Log l x FTP Connection Already connected Upload var ilogisystem log Done Upload varilogisyste
119. File 0 Items NoA OPC Direction af E Datapoint Name Remote NV CEA709 LNS Scan NV tnSOController 1nvoO0temp nviOOtemp nvoootemp L CEA709 Network Scan NV tnSOController 1nviO1temp nvoO1temp nvio 1temp cr tae NV_tnS0Controller_InvoO2hux nvi 2lux nvo 2lux 53 99 pA NV tnSOController 1nvi 3lux nvo 3lux nvi0Glux System Registers 15 Items NV tnSOController 1nvoO4lev percent nviO4lev percent nvoO4lev percent User Registers 0 Items NV tnSOController 1nvi 5lev percent nvo O5lev percent nvi Slev percent CEA709 Port NV tnSOController 1nvoO6temp f nvid temp_F nvod temp_f N _tnS0Controller_1nvi07temp_f nvoO07temp f nviO7temp f lt 1 5 lt 1 lt 1 1515 Datapoints 20 Items 1 Calendar 1 Items i Scheduler 1 Items 9 Alarm 0 Items i NV tn5 Controller 1nvi Ttemp L2 Trend 0 Items 3 Statistics 18 Items ii amp LINX 100 CEA709 Port Datapoints NV tn5 Controller 1nvi Ttemp 1 Remote Devices BD Global Objects ge E Mail Configuration 0 Items Tj 3 Math Object Configuration 0 Items 0 f Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Item 2 O N 1 o 9 Data Point Type amp Analog Datapoint Figure 54 Data Point Manager Dialog 6 2 1 Folder List At the left is a list of folders which is used to sort the available data objects by their category There are a number of predefined folders available Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manua
120. IP 852 channel Therefore one must enter a list of all channel members in the CEA 852 Configuration Server menu see Section 4 2 9 This ensures that no unwanted device can join the IP 852 channel A properly configured IP 852 channel list can look like Figure 111 List of channel members NO Name IP Address Status Flags 000 local 28 168 1 253 1628 registered NAT Router 128 168 1 250 001 lip n1 TO uS S2 1529 registered 002 lip n2 L0 0 2 911621 registered 003 pos 28 168 1 37 1628 not responding Press lt RETURN gt to continue Figure 111 Properly configured IP 852 channel with 4 channel members Note that also i LON 1000 600 VNI and LOYTEC NIC852 based network nodes e g LonMaker or NL 220 applications can join the IP 852 channel managed by the configuration server Note that the built in configuration server should be used if LINX 101 or L IP devices are communicating across firewalls NAT routers For adding multiple devices behind a NAT router the configuration server supports the extended NAT mode see Section 7 4 2 The configuration server automatically switches the channel mode to extended NAT if needed Note that the i LON 600 must be configured with the i LON CS to extended NAT mode before adding the i LON 600 to the configuration server because the i LON 600 does not switch to that mode automatically 7 4 Firewall and NAT Router Configuration The LINX 101 s router can be used behind a firewall and or
121. L Web Project Name In LINX Project L Web Project RAM Size Project Add New WZTOPSD ext 0 00 kB Edit Remove Gopy Tia Bownload Import Export Import Export Remove L IN Device Upload Detect Projects on Device Remove DLOYTEC Fertig d Figure 121 L WEB Projects Tab 3 Click on Add New 4 Entera new Project Name Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 163 LOYTEC Create New L Web Project X Project Mame Mew Project Create and Design Graphics Create Cancel 5 Click on Create The new project appears in the projects list L Web Project Mame In LINS Project On Device L Web Project RAM Size Project New Project 0 00 kB 9 2 2 Start a Graphical L WEB Design Note The L WEB graphical design tool is started from within the L WEB projects tab The graphical design for the L WEB project is created in the L VIS design tool The data point configuration created in the LINX 10X configuration project is available for the L WEB project and its graphical design To Start a Graphical Design 1 Select the L WEB Projects tab 2 Select an L WEB project 3 Click Edit L Web Projects an PC Add Mew 4 This opens the L VIS graphical design tool Complete the graphical design in the tool and click the Write Project to Device speed button ii New Project 1 LOYTEC L Vis Konfigurator Datei Bearbetten Mode
122. NTP Server 1 10 101 172 leave empty to disable NTP Server 2 leave empty to disable NTP Status in sync Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect El The entries marked with are required for proper operation Figure 8 Enter IP address and gateway 7 Press Save Settings and then reset the device by selecting Reset in the highlighted text This changes the IP settings of the LINX 10X 2 3 Configuration with LNS based Tools This section describes a quick start scenario for the LINX 10X In this scenario network variables of nodes connected to the FT port shall be exposed as OPC tags As a network management tool an LNS based tool is used Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 2l LOYTEC First install the LINX 100 200 Configurator Software from the setup exe This file can be downloaded from www loytec com In your LNS based tool register the LINX 100 200 Configurator as LNS plug in Then open an LNS database and add a LINX 10X device using the device template for the LINX 10X LINX 10x FT 10 Configure the added device with the LINX 100 200 Configurator plug in This opens the data point manager screen of the software as shown in Figure 9 Note that the device status is displayed as Configured on the right hand side below the speed button bar Click on the Scan Channel speed button marked by the red rectangle in Figure 9 to scan all NVs found on nodes connected to the LINX 10X s FT
123. November 2008 December 2008 SoM TW TF S 123458 Y 8 8 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2n 2 27 23 24 25 25 27 28 20 30 31 C Preview Selected July 2008 k SoM TW TF S 12345 6 7 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 2D 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January 2003 5 M TW TF S 12 3 4 5 868 7 8 49 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3D 31 24 25 26 27 28 29 28 28 30 31 3n 12 34528 7 Save Changes Cancel Figure 101 Configure Calendar Pattern Dialog 6 Click Save Changes when all exception days have been entered If not sure how a date configuration affects the calendar days click on a pattern in the Tip Pattern Entries list and the affected days will be highlighted in the Preview 6 11 7 Configure Embedded Exceptions Besides exception days of the calendar special exception days can be embedded into the scheduler These embedded exception days are not visible or accessible in other scheduler objects To Configure an Embedded Exception 1 Open the Configure Schedule dialog to configure daily schedules as described in Section 6 11 4 2 Click on the Create button below the Weekly Exception Schedule Configuration list Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 124 LOYTEC Weekly Exception Schedule Configuration Weekday Exception Priority Holiday 126 lowest v 0 Maintenance Days 126 lowest Create The Create Pattern d
124. OPC server This is done when the LINX 10X configuration 1s downloaded into the device To Configure the Bridge Locally 1 Open the Configurator software and configure the LINX 10X as described in Section 6 7 2 In the LINX 10X Configurator menu go to Settings gt Project settings This opens the project settings dialog on the tab General as shown in Figure 122 Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 cEAz09 as Project Mame Unnamed Project Default FTP Connection Settings Username admin ts Password admin OPC Bridge v Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC bridge Figure 122 Enable bridge export in the project settings 3 Puta check mark on Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC bridge 4 Click OK 5 Downloading the configuration also makes the LINX 10X available as a COM OPC server through the local bridge 9 3 3 Export OPC Servers for another PC Version 3 5 If the bridge software is not installed locally on the same PC where the LINX 10X configuration is created it must be exported to make the OPC server information available The exported file can then be transferred to the OPC bridge To Export the Bridge Configuration l Open the LINX 10X Configurator 2 Connect to the LINX 10X which shall be available in the bridge LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 166 LOYTEC 3 Select the menu File gt Export to OPC Bridge
125. OYTEC LPA IP supports this advanced feature The functionality is shown in Figure 118 The LPA IP runs on a Windows PC that is connected to the Ethernet network In the NIC IP RNI device selection window one can for example select the LINX 100 with IP address 192 168 1 210 and display all packets on the FT 10 channel connected to the LINX 100 with IP address 192 168 1 210 Please consult our product literature for the LPA IP to learn more about this IP based CEA 709 protocol analyzer IP 192 168 1 210 IP 192 168 1 10 LPA IP Ethernet Figure 118 Remote LPA on the LINX 100 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 154 LOYTEC Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 155 LOYTEC 9 OPC Server 9 1 XML DA OPC Server 9 1 1 Access Methods Note Version 3 5 The primary function of the LINX 10X is to expose data points to the built in OPC server The OPC tag namespace is built from the data point hierarchy which has been configured by the Configurator software The OPC server on the device implements the data access standard via the Web service interface XML DA The OPC XML DA Web service is accessible via the URI http 192 168 24 100 DA where the IP address has to be replaced with the actual IP address of the LINX 10X The Web service is accessible over the same TCP port as the Web server The default TCP port is 80 The Web server port can only be changed via the console or in the L Config t
126. Received Filter on program ID Filter on channel Channel FT 10 Figure 69 The LINX 10X has been added to the drawing 6 6 Replace a LINX 10X This Section describes how to replace as LINX 10X in your LNS database The description refers to LonMaker TE Let s assume there is a device linx in the LNS database as shown in Figure 70 Gateway 0 li Channel FT 10 Figure 70 LonMaker drawing with one LINX 10X To Replace a Device in LonMaker TE 1 Select the device and right click on the device shape 2 Select Commissioning gt Replace This opens the LonMaker Replace Device Wizard as shown in Figure 71 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 90 LOYTEC Replace Device Wizard LINX 10x FT 10 Figure 71 LonMaker replace device wizard 3 Choose the existing device template and click Next 4 Inthe following window shown in Figure 72 click Next Replace Device Wizard m Figure 72 Click Next without loading an application image 5 Then select Online as shown in Figure 73 and click Next Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 9 LOYTEC Replace Device Wizard Lt Include Wy type GPs I Figure 73 Select online state 6 Select the Service pin method and click on Finish as shown in Figure 74 Figure 74 Select Service Pin and click Finish 7 Then the service pin requestor opens Press the service pin on the replacement LINX
127. S Port 71 Datapoints 0 Items bud i Calendar 0 Items 71 Scheduler 0 Items m O Alarm 0 Items 8 Trend 0 Items 3 Statistics 18 Items tal Datapoint Mame A NV DDCVittual Functional BlacknvaTemp I Remote Devices 53 Datapoint Description p Global Objects be E Mail Configuration 0 Items Iid Pollcycle s amp n 5d E Math Object Configuration 0 Items imd Max Cache Age ms ME Infinite i Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items inf Point Type Analog Datapoint intl Direction alr imd Ny Allocation intl Data Type lint Unit Text External NV Unsigned Long 16 bit unsigned integer degrees Celsius DLOYTEC Configurator ready Figure 79 Imported NVs 4 Now the CSV File folder is populated with the imported NVs as shown in Figure 79 The list can be sorted by each column Selecting a line will display a number of associated properties in the property view below Multiple items can be selected by using the lt Ctrl gt key and clicking with the mouse All items can be selected by pressing lt Ctrl A gt 6 7 6 Scanning NVs online from the Network LOYTEC devices also support an online network scan on the CEA 709 network In this scan the device searches for other devices on the CEA 709 network and pulls in NV information of these devices These NVs can then be used instead of importing them from a CSV file Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X Us
128. SS 3012 34 56 7 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28293031 1 2 3 4567 8 910 Reset Contact networks under control Logout MTWTFSS 28293031 1 2 3 45678 910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DUUM JE E3 3125 2 3333 355 35 55 SS i eee 2S a z Poo O O O OEC T NAbwmememe 0 0 Re 7 Figure 45 Scheduler Statistics Page 4 3 8 Alarm Log Page Version 3 5 The alarm log page provides an overview of all alarm logs on the system Click on one of the links to view a specific alarm log Each alarm log contains a historical log of alarm transitions When an inactive and acknowledged alarm disappears from the alarm summary page live list the alarm log contains this last transition and maintains it over a reboot An example is shown in Figure 46 To refresh the alarm log contents click on the Reload button Currently active alarms cannot be acknowledged in this historical view Follow the link to the attached alarm objects to get to the respective live lists where alarms can be acknowledged on the Web interface see Section 4 2 15 The alarm log contents can be uploaded from the device in a CSV formatted file Click on the button Upload Alarm Log to upload the current log To clear the log press the button Clear Alarm Log Please note that this permanently purges all historical alarm log data of this alarm log LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 56 LOYT
129. Scheduled Data Points When a local scheduler has been created it needs to be configured which data points it shall schedule This is done by attaching data points to the scheduler Note that there may be limits how many and which data points may be attached see Section 6 11 11 This configuration must be done as an initial setup Which data points are scheduled cannot be changed at run time The daily schedules however can be changed later in the Web UI or over the network To Attach Data Points to a Scheduler 1 Select the scheduler data point in the Scheduler sub folder 2 Right click and select Configure Schedule from the context menu The same dialog which appears when a new scheduler is created 1s shown and allows configuring the scheduler Of course this step can also be done directly when the data point is created 3 Select the tab Scheduled Datapoints Configure Schedule temp sched Configuration Scheduled Datapoints Detach Selected Datapoint Attach Datapoints Datapoint Description Group Default 4 Click the button Attach Datapoints This opens another data point selector window 5 Select the data points to attach and click OK For each of the attached data points one or more lines appear in the list below the attach button If the attached point is a structure there will be one line for each element of the structure Tip Data points can also be attached to a scheduler by selecting a data point
130. String qingin2in hon Port com gt WakeUp String qingin Download r Statistics Progress 0 Passed 0 Failed Status Idle Console Figure 165 LSU Serial Upgrade Tool in Idle Mode 2 If the LINX 10X is not connected to COMI you can change the port to COM2 COMG or COMA Make sure that the product shown under Product matches the device you are upgrading Press Download to start the download A progress bar as shown in Figure 166 can be seen Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 224 LOYTEC El LSU Serial Upgrade Tool 2 0 1 Figure 166 Progress Bar during Firmware Download 3 Ifthe upgrade is successful the following window appears Figure 167 Figure 167 Successful Firmware Upgrade 4 Double check that the new firmware is executed by selecting 1 and pressing Enter in the console window This will bring up the device information which shows the current firmware version Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 225 LOYTEC 15 Troubleshooting 15 1 Technical Support LOYTEC offers free telephone and e mail support for the LINX 10X product series If none of the above descriptions solves your specific problem please contact us at the following address LOYTEC electronics GmbH Blumengasse 35 A 1170 Vienna Austria Europe e mail support loytec com Web http www loytec com te
131. User Manual 3 LOYTEC Contents T IBILrOGUCLOI uiri iR Eee aee Ere rae oe eripe einer ioo Ea eina 13 LI JONVGFVION Ie E vei mu T e M di DM iu PauE 13 1 2 LINX T007 LINA IOl cisnes dong EYE Seba Rayo ide eno E NSS 15 I ME Dien TO EMT 16 L4 MP re M 16 IF MEE CUI T 16 2 Quick Start GUIOG s ier hi EO Pe epe aeu erase D pe e vivas yd esta P ben 17 2 1 Hardware InstallatiOlz uio eire eere vett Pete ed vr Eis Per rta EYE EPe EE spese va Ps E Dk U2REUT 17 2 2 Configuration of the LINX T X rete eiiis eoo tonos e een anke ses epus oa aede y e noo eene anra vocan 17 2 2 1 IP Configuration on the Console ssssss 18 2 2 2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface ssenenn 19 2 5 Configuration with LNS based Tools ee ee ecce eere eee eee eee eene nu 20 2 4 Connect with an OPC XML DA Client eee ecce eese eee eene nennen nnn 24 3 Hardware Installati n 25 53 09 290 1065 icc0 951 e diae dre diee aeta coe eee coii 25 lt A Duci 25 dl MATIN DE A OX qp KE 25 2 JJProduct Labels ite ee etr ERE More coetu lave de eue ce s ee cv REN PEE 26 3 9 MOUNN essiens Lira b dra o PE Do eo dioe oig aaa eee 26 34 P DP ES Om al eet c RE 26 Ded POWOPIEBDGS en anon ro sie MM mM Ma 26 n7 dtu DEED checa ee etie metit E 26 30 3 SOE CAVE DD iini dama osse sedtetuxdent r abe Pramdc idees beate 26 Sd PTAC ECE B renee bi Hades eaa eoqu
132. X 110 CEA709Port Datapoints 1 hooo 21 00 16 00 Description 10 When done with the point and value setup switch back to the Configuration tab or click Save Changes to leave the dialog A shortcut to creating a scheduler object and attaching a data point is to select a data point in the data point manager right click on it and choose Schedule Datapoint from the context menu This generates a scheduler and links that data point to it 6 11 5 Configure Daily Schedules Version 3 5 Once a scheduler is configured with attached data points and value presets the daily schedules can be defined This can be done on the device or over the network at run time or also in the configuration software A daily schedule defines the time and value sequences in a 24 hour period starting at 00 00 and ending at 23 59 hours For each weekday a daily schedule can be configured In addition daily schedules can be configured for exception days from a calendar such as Holidays An exception day always overrides a normal weekday If more than one exception day is used a priority must be assigned This is necessary so that the system knows which schedule to follow on a day which matches more than one calendar pattern To Configure a Daily Schedule 1 Open the Configure Schedule dialog and click on the Configuration tab see Section 6 11 4 2 Select the day for which to configure a daily schedule Weekly f Exception Schedule Configur
133. a data point configuration The system registers such as the System time or the CPU load can be exposed to the OPC server By default all system registers are checked for being exposed to OPC To reduce the number of needed OPC tags you may deselect certain system registers which are not useful in a specific project System register can also serve as a testing setup for the OPC XML DA communication without a network data point configuration The System Time register 1s updated every second and may serve for testing subscriptions The Authentication Code register can be used to verify writing to OPC tags 5 2 8 User Registers The LINX 10X can be configured to contain user registers In contrast to system registers these are only available as a part of the data point configuration User registers are data points on the device that do not have a specific technological representation on the control network Thus they are not accessible over a specific control network technology A register merely serves as a container for intermediate data e g results of math objects The register can have the following basic data types e Double A register of base type double is represented by an analog data point It can hold any scalar value No specific scaling factors apply e Signed Integer A register of base type signed integer is represented by a multi state data point This register can hold a set of discrete states each identified by a signe
134. a Mith Oy CU esha eg nn BE 136 6 15 2 Editing a Math OD CC gcse eoe te Vr e dut cest Etpe bas nase tpe ee E eat 137 DL TDELCINX 0I ROUET nr y ERE EE EEPERS EPOR EE ETERNI IEEE Ee EUAE 139 Td CEA 709 ROUET onre 139 Tl Conheuted ROVE Modea a T va t 140 T1592 Smarr witch Mode rinneas pube eie dieu A En Rad Du naa 140 7 1 3 Store and Porwatd Repealet s n nece tete b etd 141 7 1 4 Smart Switch Mode with No Subnet Broadcast Flooding 141 7 4 CHA 52 Device of the Router uoo editio tees Ev vost oie eov o esu eed coti iosia 141 7 3 Configuration Server for Managing the IP 852 Channel 142 PsN OV CTV IG Tc T 142 7 3 2 Configuration Server Contacts IP 852 Device sss 143 7 3 3 P 852 Device Contacts Configuration Server sss 143 7 3 4 Using the Built In Configuration Server sss 144 7 4 Firewall and NAT Router Configuration ecce ee eee erento 144 7 4 1 Automatic NAT Configuration eese eene 144 7 4 2 Multiple IP 852 Devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode 145 7 4 3 Multiple IP 852 devices behind a NAT Classic Method 147 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual Version 3 5 8 LOYTEC TS Multi Cast Configuration seccsccsccvcscccscccccendsscsctsstescsececscasscscessdesdescsssesdecdsensseees 148 A6 Renrote LEA Oper aon sonsonen E DE i
135. a large number of automation devices providing Modbus communication is available Two communication methods are available for Modbus Modbus TCP utilizes Ethernet for the Modbus communication Modbus RTU uses a RS485 bus for Modbus data transfer Modbus RTU uses a serial bus which is controlled by a single master This master can request data from several slave devices connected to the network 11 2 Modbus Network Version 3 5 Modbus TCP utilizes the Ethernet for the communication Several Modbus slave devices can be connected In Modbus TCP a unit identifier is used instead of the slave address Modbus slaves may have the same unit identifier This unifier is usually used to communicate with bridges routers and gateways The Modbus RTU network utilizes an RS485 connection Several Modbus slave devices are connected in parallel to the transmission medium Each Modbus device has a unique slave address in the range from 1 to 255 The Baud rate of the RS485 can be configured to use 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Baud The parity is always none The LOYTEC Modbus interface supports 8N1 only Parity and stop bits are not configurable Modbus devices use function codes for the specification of the desired data The following function codes for read write actions are supported by the LOYTEC device e 2 Read discrete inputs e 01 Read coils e 05 Write coil e 04 Read input register e 03 Read holding registers e 06 Write hol
136. a point configuration properties of the trended data point e Trigger Mode In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged each time a trigger condition fires The trigger condition 1s applied to a trigger data point To Create a Trend Object 1 Under the port folder select the Trend sub folder to create a trend log object Elf CEA709 Port T Datapoints D Items 71 Calendar 0 Items 71 Scheduler 0 Items 3 m i Alarm 0 Items i pn 2 Right click and select New Trend from the context menu 3 In the Create New Trend Object dialog shown in Figure 107 enter a name and optionally a description for the trend log object Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 131 LOYTEC Configure Trend Object xX Properties Triggers Common Properties Mame TestTrend 0 0 Description good description Trend Mode nera Fil Mode Ring Buffer Log Size 1000 items 16 63 kB Davs Hours Minutes Seconds Log Length 0 0 16 4n Log Interval Sec Fill Level Notification pFB M fo a Figure 107 Basic Trend Object Configuration Logged Datapoints Remove Datapoint n aHumid CONV delta Trend Enable Disable Datapoint puit Remove Save Changes Cancel Select the desired Trend Mode Select the Log Size The display in the dialog will adapt the estimations for needed data logger f
137. a request Selective Read should be checked 4 The optional device information just represents manufacturer details and model details This information is used in two cases a The device name is not specified in this case a device name is automatically created from the optional device information The name is concatenated to MAN Medium address where MAN is the 3 character manufacturer code Medium is the M Bus medium e g Heat and address is the specified address b Device templates can be created from the M Bus devices The device templates store the device information in order to identify a device Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 180 LOYTEC d Click on the Create Device button This creates the M Bus device and adds it to the device list on the left hand side of the dialog When a device is selected the device information is displayed in the appropriate fields on the right hand side of the dialog The information can be changed in the fields Press the Update Device button to store the changes If a device has to be deleted select the device and press the Remove Device button To Add an M Bus Device Manually Using the Scan Device Information l Z 6 Enter the address of the device which has to be scanned Press the Scan Device Information button If the device is found in the network the device properties are filled Enter a name for the M Bus device in the Device Name fie
138. allation Version 3 5 The LOYTEC OPC Bridge software LOPC BR800 is installed as a separate application on a PC A license for the LOYTEC OPC Bridge software must be purchased separately With one software license for the OPC Bridge multiple LINX 10X devices can be accessed With the OPC Bridge software installed each configured LOYTEC LINX 10X device appears as a separate COM DCOM server The OPC Bridge software can be used with LOYTEC L INX OPC servers only The bridge won t connect to third party OPC servers System requirements e Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 Server or Windows Vista The OPC Bridge software is available on the LOYTEC Software CD or via download from the LOYTEC Web site www loytec com For installing the software a registration code must be purchased LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 165 LOYTEC To Install the OPC Bridge 1 Double click on lopc br800 1 0 setup exe and follow the installation steps 2 When asked type in the bridge s registration code Click Next 3 Finalize all remaining installation steps by clicking Next and Finish When the installation is complete the OPC Bridge software is available under Programs gt LOYTEC OPC Bridge 9 3 2 Configure the Bridge Locally If the bridge software is installed on the same PC where the LINX 10X Configurator software is used to configure the LINX 10X OPC server the server information can be automatically made available as a COM
139. alog The dialog can be entered by pressing the Edit M Bus Devices button In the management dialog the device instance can be either created manually take care of entering the correct Manufacturer ID Version and Medium or by simply importing the template again 5 Select one or more device instances from the list and press the Use On Device button This creates for each selected data point and each selected device one data point in the M Bus Port s data point list 10 5 7 6 Creating Device Templates M Bus device templates can be created from a data point configuration In fact it 1s only possible to create a device template using an existing device or an existing device template with data points This device and its data points can either be configured manually by a scan or also imported from a device template itself To Create an M Bus Device Template Using Devices 1 Select the M Bus dialog by clicking on the M Bus button se 98 es E in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab This opens the Network Management dialog as displayed in Figure 137 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 186 LOYTEC Network Management Pollaroups Protocol Analyzer Device List Device Mame Other REL 2 Heat REL 1 Electricity MzR 5 1 Water IMV 6 Electricity JAM 4 Water SEM 7 Device Properties Device Mame Electricity _MZR_5_1 Device Address Status Datapoints online
140. ame Cancel Import Figure 133 Import M Bus Device dialog 4 Press the button and select a template file from the Open dialog 5 After selecting the file the device information is displayed 6 Press Import for importing the template or Cancel for closing the dialog without any changes 7 When a template is imported a folder with the name of the device is created Under this folder a Datapoints folder containing the data points from the template file is created Data points can be added to the data points of the template by right clicking in the data point list and selecting New Datapoint When you want to create one or more device instance together with its data points use the button Create with DP instead of the button Create From Template This creates the device instance all the data points from the template can be found in the M Bus Port s data points folder To Remove an M Bus Device 1 Select the device which has to be removed also multi select is possible 2 Press the Remove Device button If the device already has data points these data points have to be deleted before the remove can be performed To Change the Properties of an M Bus Device 1 Select the device This shows the device properties Device Properties Device Mame Electricity JAM 4 Device Address 4 Device Baudrate 2400 2 Update the field Device Address or select another Baud rate in the combo box 3 Press the bu
141. anonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 3 Integer e Item Value Integer The present data point value e Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable e Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update e Item Access Rights Integer This property defines whether the tag is read only or read write e Item Description String This is the description of the data point e Item EU Type Integer This property is 2 for multi state e Enumerated EU Array of String This property contains the state texts of the data point 9 1 2 4 User Type Version 3 5 User type data points contain a byte array of user defined data Data points of user type are also exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each such data point an OPC tag is created The item value of the user defined data is a hex string without whitespace representing the byte array e g B034 The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 8 String e Item Value String A hex string without whitespace representing the byte array e Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point
142. are Double Boolean or Signed Integer Click Create Register Two data points now appear for the register one for writing the register and one for reading the register as shown in Figure 88 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 104 LOYTEC User defined registers Datapoint M ame Filter Direction lt f 9 Va Datapoint Mame Register Mame uk my register WWribEe my register Double mw register Read my register Double nf Data Type Figure 88 Manually created user register 6 7 12 Configuration Download Version 3 5 After the data points have been configured the configuration needs to be downloaded to the LINX 10X For doing so the LINX 10X must be online If the LINX 10X is not yet connected to the network the configuration can be saved to a project file on the local hard drive If connected via LNS and the NVs on the LINX 10X are Static NV or Dynamic NV the LINX 10X Configurator can create the bindings automatically This behavior can be influenced by the download dialog When connected via LNS the download procedure also manages the device template upgrade in the LNS database if the static NV interface has been changed To Download a Configuration l In the main connections window click on the Download Configuration speed button Fie View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web 0 HDn g Ae olr in the tool bar of the main connections win
143. ase enter the time in ms or 0 to disable aggregation The maximum time 1s 255 ms Note that disabling aggregation will negatively affect the performance of the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X The field MDS authentication enables or disables MD5 authentication Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the Echelon s iLON 1000 since the i LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MD5 can be used with the i LON 600 In the following field MD5 secret enter the 16 byte MDS secret Note that for security purposes the active MDS secret is not displayed You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte e g 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 39 LOYTEC Also note that entering the MD 5 secret on the Web interface may pose a security risk Since the information is transmitted over the network it can be subject for eavesdroppers on the line It is recommended to use a cross over cable In the field Location string the user can enter a descriptive test which identifies the physical location of the LINX 10X A location string can have a maximum length of 255 characters This is optional and for informational purposes only If the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X is used behind a NAT router the public IP address of the NAT router or firewall must be known To automatically detect the NAT address leave the Auto NAT checkmark
144. at ES Optional CS ae TET NH of the channel IP 192 168 1 102 1630 Auto NAT 135 23 2 1 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 rw Forward ports 1628 and 1629 to IP address 192 168 1 100 forward 1630 to IP address 192 168 1 102 forward 1631 to IP address 192 168 1 103 FT 10 IP 192 168 1 103 1631 Auto NAT 135 23 2 1 FT 10 Figure 113 Multiple LINX 101 devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode After the NAT router has been configured with the port forwarding settings and the CS has been turned on the channel members can be added This can be done either on the console UI or through the Web interface of the CS On the console UI add the devices to the channel in the configuration server menu 7 Choose a to add a device Enter the private address of the device in the IP address field Enter the public address of the NAT router in the NAT address field Modify the port as needed For example to add the LINX 101 with port 1631 in Figure 113 enter the values as shown in Figure 114 CEA 852 Member Menu 1 IP Address s 192 168 1 103 2 Port 1631 3 NAT Address 1339953 4 Device name lip 103 q Quit without saving x Exit and save Figure 114 Adding a member with extended NAT Mode on the console UI In the Web UI add the members with their private IP addresses and the client ports as defined by the port forwarding Then select the added member by checking the ch
145. at matches the trigger condition To Configure Trigger Data Points for Trending 1 Select the trend object in the Trend sub folder LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 133 LOY TEC Note re oreain randtans ise 5 1 uk TestTrend TENUIT 2 Right click and select Configure Trend from the context menu 3 Change to the Triggers tab Of course you can also change directly to the Triggers tab when creating a trend object 4 Click the Add button A data point selection dialog opens 5 Select one or more data points and click OK 6 The triggers appear now in the Trend Triggers list Add Remove Trend Triggers Datspoint state Value Update 7 Inthe Manage Trigger Conditions you can refine the trigger condition depending on the trigger data point class 8 When done with the data point setup click Save Changes to leave the dialog 6 13 4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP in CSV format see Section 12 1 2 The CSV contents are generated on the fly from the internal binary storage when accessing the file Each trend log point has one CSV file The files are located in data trend TrendLogName UID csv Where TrendLogName is the data point name of the trend Trend Name The UID 1s the unique ID of the trend log object The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list of trend log data points as shown in
146. ation Weekday Exception Mon Events Use zr oO co oo Oo Oo A O TAAA Holidays 1 highest 3 Select a value preset in the Available Data Presets box on the upper right hand side LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 121 LOYTEC Version 3 5 4 Drag and drop the preset from this list into the time table area to define the desired 5 output values on the day schedule Daily Schedule Monday gt UD 00 00 00 Default pos pa w m4 00 Completed daily schedules may be copied to other days using the Copy to button For example the Monday may serve as the template for a regular work day and be copied to Tuesday till Friday Then click OK Copy Daily Schedule X Source Monday Select Targets Daily Schedule To Use Exception Days l Select a calendar pattern which shall be used as an exception day and place a checkmark on it Sun Holidays 1 highest mM Edit the daily schedule Maintenance 0O 8 go o0 00 Default UU g2 UU If more than one calendar pattern 1s used edit the priorities For example if a given calendar day falls in both categories Holidays and Maintenance the exception day with the higher priority becomes effective on that day The highest available priority is marked highest Note that the actual priority values depend on the technology see Section 6 11 11 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
147. ation parameters are displayed in a box on the right hand side To save the settings of the currently opened protocol click the Save Settings button Pressing Get Settings retrieves the current settings from the device 4 2 4 IP Configuration Version 3 5 The TCP IP configuration is done under the Ethernet port tab as shown in Figure 23 The mandatory IP settings which are needed to operate the device are marked with a red asterisk IP address netmask gateway The Enable DHCP checkbox switches between manual entry of the IP address netmask and gateway address and automatic configuration from a DHCP server LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 36 Version 3 5 LOYTEC Hostname and Domainname are optional entries and can be left empty For some DHCP configurations it may be necessary to enter a hostname Please contact your system administrator on how to configure DHCP to acquire an IP address Further you can configure up to 3 Domain Name Servers Currently these entries are not used 4 DLOYTEC Logged in as admin O Porti Port2 Ethernet Device Info er EIE C Enable DHCP v FIP Config dp IP Address 192 168 24 21 v Telnet E System E HTP IP Netmask 255 255 192 0 z m j w m Passwords a IP Gateway 192 168 1 1 m Backup Restore e m Port Config Cc Hostname m E mail 3 NEM B Data Points ui Sosa m Scheduler E leave empty to disable re been O DNS Server 2 _ m Alarm c
148. bleshooting without any additional analysis tools or deep system knowledge The LSD Tool can be used for a more detailed view of the collected statistics data See Section 16 1 for more information on this powerful system diagnostics tool The LINX 10X also includes channel monitoring objects for the FT and the IP 852 channel which make the channel statistics available through NVs The channel statistics is also exposed to the OPC interface The built in Web server allows convenient device configuration through a standard Web browser such as the Internet Explorer or Firefox The Web interface also provides statistics information for system installation and network troubleshooting il Value i 15 32 km h Quality good Timestamp 12 25 18 Hl OPC XML DA Ethernet IP IP 852 FT Figure 1 LINX 10X application example with an IP 852 channel The LINX 10X 1s used for e Exposing CEA 709 network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs as OPC tags e visualization of a CEA 709 network with the supplied LOY TEC L Web software e visualization of a CEA 709 network in an OPC XML DA SCADA package e automatic meter reading applications via CEA 709 M Bus and Modbus e reading writing and subscribing to CEA 709 NVs and CPs via Web services NET e building custom Web pages with active content e browsing data points on the Web interface LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 15 LOYTEC e
149. cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 10 5 2 Data Point Manager for M Bus cccccecccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 OSS Foldet UN EO TO E Um 173 I0 5 4 Network Port EOllets 5 nine tesa e uacua eode n Ueaa eR T 174 I0 5 5 M BUS Proper eS diii tend a pesa in eerte feet tae a tates 174 10 5 6 MSBUSSWOERITOWs nte ety aes duh ER Nautisme Du Ue RM aa RATER ales 175 10 5 7 Using the Configurator for MI BUS encre i ri ene epi eid 176 IT NEOUDUS 26er E b o Deor Peer doner E nO eed Penso Pipe e ua oe PE Ove P Den EIUS 192 11 1 IHtroduciloi o irn ees penat een se each do tias ueu Ine aat rau pr cadsasesendecsucansosseataneasns 192 11 2 Modbus NetWOEK aieo eate eei tene aea eae eaa aa abre ea Feb o e e a paupe ee pEE 192 IES Web Inte rtaces et 193 LT SL Port COngutabiOD c5 e east xa tus a SEI Deb ee eee eee 193 1 3 22D 003 POLlfflS cocci eo Seta a o stun te ias ob dutun our a a de ned punt 194 1 309 AS EQUIS Soest eed fe ctnats Do busta i ee Pu uS uta Dacus ni deum nated a S 194 11 3 4 Modbus Protocol Analyzer 2d reete eds ee e rendre as 195 TAA GIAI ILU T 195 11 4 1 Activating Modbus Configuration ssssssssn 195 11 4 2 Data Point Manager for Modbus seen 196 BE ASIDE T DO LLL 197 11 4 4 Network Pott Foldets esee rt tetra eo eet tes ne rtt tite eo costos 198 LAS Modbus Properties duda aea sb o etse b ae 198 LIA G Modbus Work HOW sarrerei n T concede
150. ces behind a NAT router each device needs a separate port forwarding rule in the NAT router This implies that each device must use a unique client port e g 1628 1630 1631 etc The port forwarding rules must be setup so that each port points to one of the IP 852 devices In the LINX 101 change the client port in the CEA 852 device configuration menu Figure 113 shows an example configuration for three LINX 101s behind the NAT router 135 23 2 1 It is recommended that both ports 1628 and 1629 are forwarded to the same private address It is then also possible to turn on the configuration server behind a NAT router In this case activate the CS on the LINX 101 which has port forwarding to 1628 and 1629 In the example in Figure 113 the LINX 101 with private address 192 168 1 100 also acts as a configuration server If the CS is activated on a LINX 101 behind a NAT router the NAT router must have a fixed public IP address The LINX 101 with the CS also cannot use automatic NAT discovery In this case enter the NAT address of the NAT router manually in the IP configuration menu Auto NAT can no longer be enabled on a LINX 101 with a CS To LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 146 LOYTEC Version 3 5 diagnose possible problems in the NAT configuration with port forwarding use the enhanced communications test see Section 4 3 3 IP 192 168 1 100 1628 NAT 135 23 2 1 L INX rm wen wa Firewall NAT Router Bu
151. channel Figure 10 shows an example result of the scan Now select the NVs which shall be exposed as OPC tags and click on the Use on Device speed button as marked by the red rectangle in Figure 10 EA LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt BE B x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help 8 x Oe Eu HRS ft Et D t Connected Device test linx1O00 Subsystem 1 linx 21 Channel 2 IF Info Status Configured Online BA Elf LINX 100 SIF Tata Connections Connection Overview Statistics L Wweb Projects Web Interface 50s MET Bus Bu Model No Joo Auto Datapoint Configuration Local datapoints Mame Filter Include subfolders Ef Imported 7 CEA09 CSV File D Items Datapoint Name Direction di Ou Local NV pan ji CEA 712 LAS Scan 71 CEA709 Network Scan 0 7 CEATUS Devices From XIF Device Templates 0 7 CEATU9 Device Templates EHE Filter Templates be 1 1 System Registers 15 Items owl User Registers 0 Items Ef CEA709 Port j m o Datapoints D Items j m Calendar 0 Items D Scheduler 0 Items D Alarm 0 Items 71 Trend 0 Items 71 Statistics 18 Items soll Remote Devices 93 Global Objects bas fe E Mail Configuration 0 Items bas i Math Object Configuration 0 Items je Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items DLOYTEC Fetia d Version 3 5 Figure 9 LINX 100 200 Configurator main screen
152. constitute to the LINX 10X s port interface definition These data points are created on the LINX 10X when the configuration is downloaded For Modbus additional sub folders exist o Modbus Port RS 485 This folder contains the remote Modbus data points of the Modbus RS 485 port which are used on the device o Modbus Port TCP This folder contains the remote Modbus data points of the Modbus TCP port which are used on the device Using the context menu on a folder sub folders may be created to organize the available objects If new objects are created automatically they are usually placed in the base folder Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 198 LOYTEC and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub folders Note that the folder structure described above cannot be changed by adding or deleting folders at that level 11 4 4 Network Port Folders The Modbus network port folder on the device has the same structure of sub folders as the other network port folders in Section 6 2 2 Currently only the Datapoints folder exists for the Modbus network ports 11 4 5 Modbus Properties Apart from the common data point properties discussed in Section 6 2 4 the data points of the Modbus technology have additional properties e Modbus Device Name This property defines the name of the Modbus slave device which contains the data point e Modbus Device Address This property defines the address of the Modbus slave de
153. ctronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 103 LOYTEC Local datapoints Datapoint M ame Filter Ma OPC Direction a O ied Datapoint Name Local NV Remote NV 1 W v Qut my external switch nva exkernal External NV Allocation External MV j Structured xl Figure 86 Manually created external NV in the port interface definition 6 7 11 Create User Registers Version 3 5 User registers are data points on the device that do not have a representation on the network Thus they are not accessible over a specific technology A register merely serves as a container for intermediate data e g results of math objects Since a register has no network direction it can be written and read Therefore two data points are generated for each register one for writing the register output and one for reading the register input To Create a User Register l Select the LINX 10X User Registers folder Elf LINK 100 s System Registers 9 Items Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the register creation dialog as shown in Figure 87 Create New Register X Datapoint Mame my register Register Mame Type Double Cancel Create Register Figure 87 Create a user register Enter a Datapoint Name for the register You may leave the Register Name blank to give the underlying register the same name as the data point Select a Type Available
154. d for the appropriate port The project settings are described in detail in Section 6 3 To Activate the Modbus Configuration 1 Open the project settings dialog Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 196 LOYTEC 2 In the Device Config tab enable the Modbus check boxes on the desired ports as shown in Figure 145 Setting the check box enables Modbus on that port Edit the Modbus communication settings 3 If slave mode is enabled you may change the default Modbus register layout in the Modbus Slave Register Configuration box 4 Click the Download button to activate the changes in the configuration Project Settings E General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 cEA709 ast Device Configuration El System p Device Modbus port mode SLAVE ju Date Time Earth Position Baud rate 38400 v j i SY delimiter E Mail Parity NONE Part configuration ee Part 1 Mode RTU L7 Disabl POP 3S Transmission delay o ms B Port 2 Slave address i Modbus R5 485 Configuration Modbus Slave Register Configuration Important El Serial Coil start address 0 0 E5535 Po LR 2 poa Coil end address 99 0 E5535 fers M Bus 3 Ethernet Discrete input start address jo 0 65535 E VP Discrete input end address EE 0 66535 pe IF Settings l l i NTP Settings Register input start address jo 0 66535 v Web Server Register input end address 39 0 55535
155. d stats ID e Boolean A register of base type Boolean is represented by a binary data point This register can hold a Boolean value Since a register has no network direction it can be written and read Therefore two data points are generated for each register one for writing the register output and one for reading the register input A suffix is added to the register name to identify the respective data point For example the register MyValue will have two data points generated for MyValue_Read and MyValue_Write 5 2 9 Math Objects Math objects are advanced application objects that can execute mathematical operations on data points A math object takes a number of input data points variables vi v2 Vn and calculates a result value according to a specified formula The result is written to a set of Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 62 LOYTEC output data points The formula is calculated each time one of the input data points updated its value The formula is only evaluated if all of the input data points have a valid value 1 e don t show the invalid value status 5 3 Connections With the use of connections data points can interact with each other Connections specify which data points exchange values with each other Both types of connections 1 n and m l connections are supported The single data point is referred to as the hub data point whereas the other data points are the
156. d and use the same MDS secret can share information with each other If the configuration server has MD5 enabled only devices that have MD5 enabled and use the same MD5 secret as the configuration server can join the logical IP 852 channel Please refer to Section 4 2 6 and 4 2 8 for details LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 152 LOYTEC 7 8 3 Dynamic NAT Addresses Version 3 5 A common practice for Internet providers is to assign addresses on a per session basis to a client Each time a connection is established e g an ADSL link is set up the Internet provider may choose an IP address from a pool Since this address will be the public address of a NAT router the NAT address configured in the LINX 101 would need to be updated The Auto NAT feature in the LINX 101 permanently monitors the current NAT address When the LINX 101 detects a change in the NAT address it re registers with the configuration server using this new address This feature requires a LOYTEC configuration server e g LINX 101 L IP and Roaming Members enabled on that CS A consequence of this monitoring process is that the LINX 101 contacts the CS every 45 seconds to probe for the NAT address This causes a small amount of additional traffic on the Internet link The Auto NAT feature also causes any shut down connection to be re established The NAT monitoring functions as a keep alive for the connection If neither the additional traffic nor the automa
157. d selecting New Datapoint Importing a device template from the folder list does not create a device instance Device instances can only be created using the import in the Network Management Dialog To Use Imported Data Points Using imported data points is a little different to the use of scanned data points For a scanned device a device instance already exists the important information address and baud rate devices imported from templates do not have an address or baud rate l Goto the Datapoints folder of the device of the M Bus Templates 2 Select the desired data points also multi select 1s possible Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 185 LOYTEC 3 Either press on the Use on Device button or right click and select Use on Device This opens the M Bus Configure Device For Use dialog shown in Figure 136 Choose M Bus Device Instance x Device Template Properties Manufacturer ID REL Compatible Device Instances Device Mame Device Address Status Datapoints Template version 65 Heat_REL_1 1 online D Medium e Model Name mE Default Read selective Read Edit M Bus Devices Use On Device Cancel Figure 136 Use on Device dialog 4 The device list displays all devices which have the same Manufacturer ID version number and Medium If no device instance matches the device template create one by entering the network management di
158. d the n th state 1s propagated over a connection For example the 2nd state on the hub has the state ID 2 while on the target the 2nd state has the state ID 0 e String No special restrictions exist e User Only user data points of the same length can be placed in a connection 5 4 AST Features 5 4 1 Alarming Version 3 5 The alarming architecture comprises a number of entities Objects that monitor values of data points and generate alarms depending on an alarm condition are called alarm sources The alarms are reported to an alarm server on the same device The alarm server maintains a list of alarm records called the alarm summary The alarm server is the interface to access the local alarms This can be done over the network or the Web UI An alarm record contains the information about the alarm This includes information about the alarm time the source of the alarm an alarm text an alarm value an alarm type an LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 63 LOYTEC alarm priority and an alarm state An alarm record undergoes a number of state changes during its life cycle When the alarm occurs it is active When the alarm condition subsides the alarm becomes inactive Active alarms can be acknowledged by an operator Then they become active acknowledged Active alarms can also become inactive but an acknowledgement is still required Then they become ack pending When an alarm is inactive and was acknowle
159. daily schedule for Holidays The exception days are defined through a calendar The calendar contains a number of calendar patterns Each calendar pattern describes a pattern of dates that define the class of an exception e g Holidays When a calendar is defined on a system the exception days are available in all schedules When a schedule wants to define daily schedules for some of the available exception days they need to be enabled in the schedule See Figure 50 for an example where Holidays is used Exception Schedule Configuration Weekday Exception Priority Mon 2 mM o I o v o mM 0 v o v Sun v 24 12 xx Othighest lo Holiday 126 lowest v Maintenance Days 126 lowest Figure 50 Example of used Exception Days The function of the exception is simple The daily schedule of a regular weekday is overridden by the daily schedule of the exception when one of the specified date patterns is in effect e g July 14 in Holidays overrides the regular weekday If more than one exception days are in use there may be conflicts on specific dates These conflicts are resolved by defining priorities for the different exceptions The daily schedule of the exception with the higher priority 1s eventually in effect If two exceptions with the same priority exist it 1s not defined which one is in effect Therefore always use distinct priorities LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual
160. data may be used to fill in the values at the right side but some additional resources should be planned to allow for configuration changes which need more resources e Auto Set This button may be used to let the configuration software decide on the best settings to use based on the current project Since the current projects resource usage is taken as a starting point all schedulers and calendar patterns in the project should first be configured before this button 1s used Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 82 LOYTEC e Set Defaults This button will choose standard values for all settings In most cases these settings will provide more resources than necessary 6 3 5 Device Configuration This tab is shown in Figure 60 It is available only with the newest firmware version and can be used to configure the device through the Configurator In the configuration tree on the left hand side the user can select certain groups of settings e g Web server settings The dialog displays the settings of the selected group in the dialog area The structure is similar to the menu structure on the Web UI Under the port configuration tree the user can enable or disable communication protocols on the device s ports Enabled protocols are marked with a checkmark Click on the checkmark and toggle it Note that depending on the device model communication protocols on other ports may be disabled The IP address settings cannot b
161. ded calendars behave like the regular calendar Figure 50 shows an example for an embedded exception day named 24 12 xx A schedule defines at which time instants certain states of the scheduled data points are maintained The next state feature allows looking ahead into the future and predicting when the next scheduled state will occur There are two data points involved the time to next state is a counter in minutes to the next scheduled event and the next state data point is the state of the next scheduled event This information can be used by controllers to optimize their algorithms e g pre heat a room for the scheduled occupancy state Use the SNVT tod event in CEA 709 to accomplish this task When a scheduler is executing the schedule on the local device it is called a local scheduler Such a scheduler is configured to schedule data points and later its daily schedules can be modified When accessing the daily schedules of a scheduler which executes on a remote device the object is called a remote scheduler A remote scheduler has the same interface to the user to modify daily schedules A remote scheduler object can be used as a user interface for schedulers that execute on different devices Trending refers to the ability to log values of data points over time A trend log object is responsible for this task It is configured which data points shall be trended Log records are generated either in fixed time intervals on change
162. denote currently active connections Active connections have an idle time figure specified in seconds The following lines in black represent a history of the most recent connections Inactive connections read n a in the Idle column All lines contain client information which specifies the client IP address and port of the connected client The Srve column specifies the type of Web service Web DA DL The Agent column contains information on the HTTP agent of the client and the Last Action column contains information on the last known Web service SOAP action the client has requested 4 3 7 Scheduler Statistics Page Version 3 5 The scheduler statistics page provides an overview of what is scheduled at which day and which time In the Display Schedules list select a single schedule to view its scheduled values and times Use the multi select feature to get the overview of more schedules An example is shown in Figure 45 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 55 LOYTEC Scheduler Preview Windows Internet Explorer Coo X e http 192 168 38 2 webuijstatistics sched ty x w de Scheduler Preview m dh sp Seite O Extras n DLOYTEC LINX 110 Logged in as admin Live Search go x Local Time Device Info Config 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 24 25 26 27 28 29 30123456 Statistics m CEA 709 B Scheduler July 2008 Alarm Log MTWTF
163. device the remote data point is connected to e Pollgroup Each M Bus input data point is attached to a poll group If more than one poll group is available the poll group can be selected This property is not shown for output data points 10 5 6 M Bus Workflow This section discusses the workflows for setting up an M Bus environment The network can either be set up online using the network scan function or also offline by either setting up the devices and data points manually or by using M Bus device templates The change of primary addresses and Baud rates can only be done online 10 5 6 1 Offline Engineering This section describes how an M Bus network can be set up without using the M Bus network Figure 129 shows the workflow First the address and Baud rates of the M Bus devices must be configured for example by following the device manufacturer s guidelines Afterwards the devices and data points are configured in the Configurator either configured manually or by using M Bus device templates Also mixing the two methods is possible When using the device templates also data points can be added manually The configuration is then downloaded to the device and the device is rebooted START Configure addresses and Baud rates of the M Bus devices M Bus Data Points Import M Bus Device Templates Section 10 5 7 4 Section 10 5 7 5 Download Configuration to LINX Section 6 7 12 DON
164. dged it disappears from the alarm summary Other devices can access the alarm information of an alarm server These devices are alarm clients They register with the alarm server and get notified about changes to the alarm summary Alarm clients can be used to display the current alarm summary and acknowledge alarms Depending on the underlying technology some restrictions to the available alarm information and acknowledgement behavior may exist 5 4 2 Historical Alarm Log The alarm summary of the alarm objects contains a live list of currently active and acknowledge pending alarms As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary To store a historical log of alarm transitions an alarm log is utilized An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm objects The alarm log is always local and stored as a file on the device The size of an alarm log is configurable The alarm log operates as a ring buffer As soon as its size limit 1s reached the oldest alarm log records are overwritten by newer alarm transitions The alarm log is available on the Web UI or can be uploaded from the device as a CSV file The CSV file can also be used as an e mail attachment 5 4 3 Scheduling Version 3 5 Schedulers are objects that schedule values of data points on a timely basis A scheduler object is configured by which data points it shall schedule This configuration is done by the system engine
165. ding registers LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 193 LOYTEC For optimizing the communication adjacent holding registers are usually read using a single read request This behavior can be turned of for devices which do not support reading a random number of holding registers Modbus data points are specified by the function code the address and the length Furthermore a data type has to be specified together with the information how the order of the bytes look like 11 3 Web Interface This section describes the Web interface for the Modbus port 11 3 1 Port Configuration Version 3 5 The Modbus ports can be configured under the port configuration tabs of the Web UI see Section 4 2 3 If available on a given port the Modbus protocol can be enabled If enabled the Modbus communication settings on that port are displayed on the right hand side The RS485 port configuration tab 1s Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet C Disabl d Modbus port made MASTER Modbus Baud rate 38400 default Save Settings Get Settings Parity NONE default Mode RTU Transmission Delay lo ms Slave address 1 255 Figure 141 Modbus RS485 port configuration The settings for Modbus RS485 are displayed in Figure 141 For Modbus port mode the following selections are available MASTER can be selected if the device shall operate as Modbus master SLAVE can be selected if the device shall operate as a Modbus slave o
166. dow This will open the configuration download dialog as shown in Figure 89 If no bindings shall be generated deselect the Automatically create bindings checkbox indicated by the red circle in Figure 89 If the static NV interface has been changed a new model number for the LINX 10X needs to be selected This is necessary as the static network interface of the LINX 10X changes on the CEA 709 network The LINX 10X Configurator automatically selects a usable value which can be overridden in the field Model Number marked by the blue rectangle in Figure 89 Click Start to start the download Each of the actions is displayed in the Task List section of the dialog The current progress is indicated by the progress bar below When the download process has finished a notification window appears which has to be acknowledged by clicking OK LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 105 LOYTEC Configuration Download CEAT09 Port i xj Target Device Information Task List CEA709 Device Info Device Name linx100 Unique Node ID 80000001DFBB Program ID 9000D746168A0400 Task Status Download the configuration Save dynamic NVs Model 00 Save bindings Subnet 02 Remove dynamic Mi s Mode 41 Commission device Reboot device Upgrade device Restore dynamic N s Restore bindings 10 Create dynamic W s Channel Channel FT 10 LAS Path linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 LMS Status Offl
167. e Analog Pollgroup Default Pollgroup Edit Modbus Devices Create Close Version 3 5 Figure 151 Create Modbus Datapoint dialog If the Modbus device which provides the data point is not in the list it has to be created In this case open the Modbus Management dialog by clicking the Edit Modbus Devices button Create the device in the Modbus Management dialog and close the dialog Select the device which provides the Modbus data point Enter the General Data Point Properties These are the data point name which is automatically created when not specified and the Register Type The register type of the data point is provided in the Modbus device documentation The drop down menu shows the Modbus register type the direction read and write and the function code The data point properties are entered in the presented section of the dialog General Datapoint Properties Datapoint Mame Register Type hoo read 03 v Enter the properties of the data point The register address is specified by the manufacturer Select the Modbus Data Type This type specifies how the manufacturer stores data in the Modbus device The Modbus Data Length is automatically updated according to the data type Offset Multiplier and Exponent can be used for mapping purposes The Value of the data point is calculated as follows Value ModbusValue Offset Multiplier 10 Modbus does not specify any byte orders of the data
168. e forwarded regardless of the address format This operating mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it 1s fully plug amp play and no router configuration 1s required The disadvantage is that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with more than 10 router devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for routers in repeater mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 7 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 7 1 4 Smart Switch Mode with No Subnet Broadcast Flooding This operating mode is the same as the smart switch mode from Section 7 1 2 with the only difference that subnet wide broadcasts are not flooded in this mode This operating mode can be used in large network installations where the network management tool uses group overloading to replace group addresses with subnet wide broadcasts In this operating mode the network installer must ensure that one subnet address may only exist behind one and no more than one network port This condition is met if nodes are installed using an LNS based tool on different channels that are separated with a router shape This opera
169. e Devices T BJ Global objects 223 Max Cache Age me amp Infinite lt nf Datapoint Description amp pn Math Object Configuration D Items ff Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items CY Remote Device tn20 DLOYTEC Configurator ready ve fl E Mail Configuration 0 Items Figure 10 Example result of scanned NVs from LNS channel The data points now appear in the LINX 10X device folder as shown in Figure 11 The data point name will be used as the name of the OPC tag Now click on the Download Configuration speed button as indicated by the red rectangle in Figure 11 The Configurator will require saving the project file to the hard drive Select a file name and save the file Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 23 LOYTEC w LOYTEC LINZ 100 200 Configurator LINZ 100 Unbenannt ER ni xj File View Model Firmware Settings Eammection Tools L Weh 8 xl CO co ed 8 el fh p Connected Device lnxcT0D test3 Subsyst E Channel FT 10 Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics es mo Model No oo Set Aute I Datapoint Configuration Local datapoints Datapoint Name Filter 2 1 Imported lf CEA708 CSV File 0 Items Mo OPC Direction adi Qu Datapoint Mame Local MV Remote MV Ap CEA 703 LAS Scan 1 v In MV Enz contraller 1nvo temp nvidObemp nva temp Ae us l n mM Qut Mv Enz controller 1nvi itemp nva itemp nvititemp
170. e M od temel 3 mM In Mv Enz controller 1nva zlux nviazlux rva glux j En 3 CEA709 Templates 4 mM Qut Mv Enz controller 1nvit3lux nvab3lux nevitralux E 0 LIMNx 10 0 2 v In Mv Enz controller 1nvo d4lev percent nvitdlev percent nva4lev per vee System Registers 9 Items 6 M Qut MV tnZ0Controller_invidSley percent nvo 5lev percent nviti5lev perc i i User Registers 0 Items T m MV Enz contraller invo 6temp f nvili6temp F nvaltemp f ES E B mM Qut MV Enz controller 1nvi zEemp F nva zbemp F nvitdztemp F 1 Datapoints 8 Items had i1 Calendar 0 Items T Scheduler 0 Items 1 1 Alarm 0 Items iud Trend 0 Items oof Statistics 18 Items bus Remote Devices WW Global Objects j s 9 E Mail Configuration 0 Items fl Math Object Configuration 0 Items be 3 Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items 1 LOYTEC Configurator ready a Figure 11 NVs used for OPC tags on the LINX 10X Then the Configuration Download dialog opens as depicted in Figure 12 Press Start The tasks executed are displayed and their progress is visualized by the progress bar below Configuration Download CEA 709 Port x Target Device Information CEA709 Device Info Status Device Mame linx device off Unique Node ID 800000039689 Set device offnet Program ID 9000074616540400 Save dynamic Nvs Model 00 Save bindings Subnet 01 Update dynamic N s amp bindings Node 29 Set device onnet Channel
171. e PO E Creator PO Company Name 0 0 O version Export Cancel Figure 154 Export Modbus Device Template dialog 4 Press the button and select a template file from the Save dialog 5 Enter the Creator Company Name and Version for the template This information is stored in the template file when importing the template file the information 1s displayed after selecting the file 6 Press the Export button To Create a Modbus Device Template File Using a Device Template 1 Right click on the folder of the device template that has to be exported or its data point folder and select Export Device Template from the context menu 2 This opens the Export Modbus Device Template dialog as shown in Figure 154 Proceed as described above 11 4 7 5 Pollgroups Tip Version 3 5 In a Modbus network the master has to poll the slave devices Input data points are therefore attached to a poll group If nothing else is specified the default poll group is used for input data points The default poll group has a poll cycle of 60 seconds Two different types of poll groups can be specified e Time based The poll group is triggered on a time base This means that after a specific time the poll cycle the poll group is processed e Trigger based The poll group is triggered on a special trigger data point As soon as the trigger condition is met the poll group is processed The poll group a data point is attached
172. e SEs a tumultu aoa ene 60 52 Benayvioron Value Changes arie ERR IRR n ea RE RUn MEER IRR AAT 60 3 25 C UOD S CaL TES osi Sad oir ed i rated Ret onis iere ted base bonis 61 3 20 OERE DISIE S irasci ool noe atat osi ood metodi e emt 61 3 2 ABISEIISEDISUC LS custo DUO quu pt akut R ease aac fct nhe 61 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 5 LOYTEC SA ME IE elucet NNNM 61 59 COMMCCLIONG M 62 54 AST Features M 62 JA ICM 62 54 2 Historical Alarm L0G 0104 2 ettet eroe EE eh No HRK EAR ES Un EAER iie 63 34 3 aSchedulitig Sun uas a a LI E UNE 63 e TENDO RR 66 x MB UEM m Tc A 66 539 CEA 09 Technology oe ceci e ede aint 67 Ssl oCEA709 Ddata PONS erra Pc 67 332 Stale Interface C Danes aiena lum udadin ble due a dit esp ue dox 68 6 The LINX 10X Configurator ccce eren e e eere eene ee nete eee ene 69 6 1 Tnstallatloli cione peer ei ri e PEE x eiie 69 6 1 1 Software Installation su e oaedebes e od a ctu ee OUR Dual 69 6 1 2 Registrations a Plugs I1 ioa totae toe ta tetas ise i inedite 69 RCM Operin Mode RE 7 62 Data Pome Manage oiii ro ei ee aaro redeo eese bas E a 71 UN Folder Li RHET 7 6222 3NebWOPIK POIL DOIdEES Goose estin ra e a a poda Uie inimi de T2 6 253 Data PoInt E raaa ostia eost du qus advua t itas onded toD Dnta Uca CR 73 0 2 SPO eta VIEW oeste Leia UI ees EIE 74 6 2 5 Managing Multistate Maps
173. e changed in this dialog The FTP server can not be disabled in this dialog either This ensures that the Configurator can maintain connection to the device Project Settings X General Datapoint Naming Rules CEAz09 cEA709 ast Device Configuration E system 0 be Device wi ebserver port 80 Date Time Earth Position CSV delimiter E Mail l Port configuration l Port 1 o v Disable Po Bf FT 10 l Port 2 hf Disable ef Madbus R5 485 l Serial 0 ev Console j L2 M Bus l Ethernet Ev IP o LeIP Settings i NTF Settings z V FTP Server vf Telnet Server Upload Download Figure 60 Device Configuration Settings The Upload button can be used to get the current device settings from the device and display them in this dialog The Download button can be used to explicitly transfer the settings from this dialog onto the device Those changes will be visible immediately on the Web UI but take effect only after a reboot of the device 6 4 Workflows for the LINX 10X This section discusses a number of work flows for configuring the LINX 10X in different use cases in addition to the simple use case in the quick start scenario see Chapter 2 The description 1s intended to be high level and is depicted in flow diagrams The individual Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 83 LOYTEC steps refer to later sections which describe each step in more detail In princip
174. e iab noe au bue Gus Dude 2 Sd o Ethernet Lk LED oae t diues oe E oo ete tiet 27 JAG Ethem ACUVIy LED coit ee pa ede dvi Pee ES sia 2 IE MON TPALE Ds nrc 27 SuES STN ED aerate tas E elt Ee E ME Ute o Da dE baee 28 52 19 WW I CEO aie Seitan estet e a eod eei oec es 28 34 T0 Network Dianosti oSer ensinan in eE ETE AT 28 SoD SUACUS BUCO D aae SE 28 355 1 Resetting Forwarditg Fables rr deett e eee e 29 35 0 DIP Switch Settings iiie eee aa a ebria aaa Po ETUR ONES ERE TEE 29 3 7 Terminal Layout and Power Supply eere eee eee eee ee eee eene unen aus 29 SiS MMN oue utens torii eo eint ie rie e Dried Su Leo ee D ivestu aeo eo sU Doo vu a eva var Edu 30 A Web Interiaee 220i HH e E ees 31 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 4 LOYTEC 4 1 Device Information and Account Management eeeeeeee eee eee eerte 31 4 2 Device ConflieuratiU Dus icto lees eve u ee besar vesvesuacbees Eua vos SEEE su Pres vu Up deb 33 42 1 System GConte tadtlOi o escis Roa trai So Mai ea ebbe Dr bes 33 222 Backup and RESO enan bue b EE S 34 2239 Port GontP radliOfi cesi e et E teotuetE eo ce Saas pas p rpeUe EE ptu e teed Ense 35 224 IP COnDnDeuratlofi nie eeu a tub nite a 35 2 2 5 CEA TOI Conf oura oo tr ie a PORRO ERN PrMR pd RUPEM 37 A206 CBAs852 D vice Configuratio sr see ether Ie recht IRE 37 4 2 7 CEA 709 Router Configuration Llliieeieieeeee
175. e next state feature The parts of this network variable contain Version 3 5 Current state This 1s the currently scheduled occupancy state Next state This is the next future occupancy state in the schedule Time to next state This part reflects the time in minutes until the next state becomes active LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 125 LOYTEC To Use a SNVT tod event l Create a SNVT tod event in the data point configuration 2 Add the SNVT tod event to the scheduled data points of a scheduler as described in Section 6 11 4 3 Allthree parts ofthe SNVT tod event are scheduled No OPC Direction Xi CE E4 Datapoint Name E 1 v Out nvoTodEvent 1 1 v Qut 6 current state 1 2 M Out Y next state 13 out t time to next state 6 11 10 Using the Local Scheduler Once the setup of the local scheduler is done it 1s basically operational It will immediately start to work based on the configuration data downloaded through the configuration software You can verify the daily schedules and values of scheduled data points on the Web UI see Section 4 2 13 The local schedule can be altered over the Web UI or over the network using the underlying networking protocol 6 11 11 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Schedulers CEA 709 schedulers and the CEA 709 calendar adhere to the LONMARK standard objects For CEA 709 certain restrictions exist that need to be kept in mind Attached data points can eith
176. e number which is automatically created in the device This number is unique for one port e Timestamp transmission time e Frame Type TCP or Damaged when something happened with the frame e Dir direction Either SND send or RCV receive e Trans ID Transaction ID e Prot ID Protocol ID e Unit ID Unit ID e Length Payload length of the data frame e Payload Payload in hexadecimal numbers this column cannot be used for sorting Modbus Device Management Follgroups Protocol Analyzer R5 485 Protocol Analyzer TCP Start Protocol Stop Protocol Load From Device Save Clear Frame Type Dir Trans ID Prat ID Unit ID Length Payload 312 2009 05 06 17 48 14 094 TCP SNO 8740 1 12 22 240000000601 0300 aa 00 ac Fala 2009 05 06 17 48 14 116 TCP RCV 8740 1 33 22 24000000 1B 01 03 18 40 D2 1 80 0000 00 00 40 D2 314 2009 05 06 17 48 14 120 TCP SNO 8741 1 12 22 25 000000 06 01 03 00 10 00 04 315 2009 05 06 17 48 14 138 TCP RCV B 41 1 17 e2 29 0000 00 06 01 03 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 F316 2009 05 06 17 48 14 142 TCP SND 8742 1 12 e2 26 000000 06 01 03 00 64 0006 317 2009 05 06 17 48 14 159 TCP RCV of4e 1 3 22 26 00000003 01 83 02 Figure 157 Typical protocol analyzer output for Modbus TCP port Figure 158 shows a typical protocol analyzer output for the Modbus RS 485 port It shows the following information for RS 485 e Seq sequence number which is automatically c
177. e the device name IP address and port number for this device Click Edit on a NAT router to change the NAT router address The Stats button retrieves the statistics summary page from the client device e sam Omens i registered The CEA 852 device has been successfully registered with the IP 852 channel and is fully functional unregistered The CEA 852 device has never been registered with the IP 852 channel not contacted The CEA 852 device has not been contacted since the configuration server has started not The CEA 852 device has been registered but 1s not responding responding at the moment e disabled The CEA 852 device has been disabled on the channel or rejected No extended The CEA 852 device does not support the extended NAT NAT mode This device is disabled Table 4 Possible Communication Problems in the Configuration Server 4 2 10 E mail Configuration The Web interface provides the e mail configuration page to set up an e mail account which is used to send e mails The content and time when e mails are sent is configured through the Configurator software see Section 6 9 The e mail configuration page is shown in Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 43 LOYTEC In the field for the outgoing e mail server enter the SMTP server of your Internet provider Typically the SMTP server port can be left at 25 In the field Source E mail Address
178. ead only This tag is updated with an incremented notify count for each alarm update notification This is the case for new or cleared alarm conditions and for acknowledged alarms Clients can subscribe to this tag in order to be notified about changes in the alarm summary The client has then to read the complete alarm summary when notifications occur e Ack string Write Writing to this tag acknowledges an alarm The data type is string The written data is an XML document which contains the alarmAck element The write must specify the XAID 9 1 3 4 Trend Log Objects Version 3 5 Each trend log object on the LINX 10X is represented by a folder in the OPC name space This folder contains a number of tags describing and controlling the trend log To retrieve log records however the XML DA tag interface cannot be used There are two options retrieve the complete log as a CSV file or use the LOYTEC proprietary Data Log Web service XML DL That Web service uses the logHandle provided by a tag The CSV file location can be obtained from a tag also e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains trendLog or alarmLog It identifies this folder as a trend log data log or LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 161 LOYTEC alarm log folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the node tag e Purge Boolean read write When
179. eated SNVTs are available in the Recent NV Types list Click on one to set the NV type without scrolling through the drop down box 6 9 Choose a functional block where this static NV shall be located in Click Create Static NV The static NV is created and appears in the data point list Note that the static interface of the LINX 10X will change as soon as static NVs are added or modified in the data point manager This change is reflected in a new model number which the LINX 10X will receive after the configuration download see Section 5 5 2 Also note that the manually created static NVs are not bound automatically by the LINX 10X Configurator They simply appear on the device and need to be bound in the network management tool Click Close 6 7 10 Create External NVs External NVs are not actually allocated NVs on the LINX 10X Instead the LINX 10X uses polling to read data from and explicit updates to write data to external NVs Since external NVs do not affect the static NV interface of the LINX 10X they can be used to extend a LINX 10X s interface configuration at run time where no LNS with dynamic NVs is available Version 3 5 To Create an External NV manually l Select the LINX 10X CEA 709 Port Datapoints folder LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 102 LOYTEC Er 2 LINZ 100 A System Registers 9 Items p User Registers 0 Items m E 3 ce M zs Calendar 0 Items
180. ecify the gateway address e g 192 168 1 1 e Specify the NAT address public IP address 135 23 2 1 or use automatic NAT router discovery e Enable port forwarding for ports 1628 and 1629 in the NAT router for TCP and UDP e Enable the SNTP port 123 in the firewall if SNTP is used IP 192 168 1 100 NAT 135 23 2 1 L INX UU dmt Firewall NAT Router pa Uis IP Channel 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 Forward UDP and TCP ports 1628 and 1629 to IP address 192 168 1 100 00000000 Internet FT 10 Figure 112 Operating a LINX 101 behind a NAT router and firewall Note that a LINX 101 must be used as configuration server when the device is installed behind a firewall or NAT router The LINX 101 with the configuration server can also be located behind a firewall 7 4 2 Multiple IP 852 Devices behind a NAT Extended NAT Mode Version 3 5 When using more than one IP 852 device behind a single NAT router the recommended method in the LINX 101 configuration server is to use the extended NAT mode This mode requires that all devices support this feature Currently these are LINX 101 L IP 3 0 i LON 600 the NIC852 PC software and other CEA 852 capable devices from LOYTEC If there are other devices in the channel this method does not work Incompatible devices are disabled from the channel in this case Please refer to the classic method in Section 7 4 3 to setup this network When using multiple devi
181. eck box and select the action Assign to NAT Enter the public NAT address of the NAT router An example to add the two IP 852 devices in Figure 113 through the Web UI is depicted in Figure 115 To remove a device from a NAT router but not delete it select it and choose Remove from NAT as the action LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 147 LOYTEC Z CEA 852 Channel List Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Q arik X ix a A J Suchen Se Favoriten Ol SL jw m rel 33 Adresse http 192 168 24 99 webui config eia amp S2chlist X Wechseln zu Links amp Snagit E LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Add Device Reload Recontact Action on Selected Execute No Name IP Address Stat Flags NAT Router 135 23 2 1 Edit Config E System L toca 192 168 24 99 1628 Edit NAT Router 1352321 Save Cancel e 192 168 24 102 1630 x Edit Stats O lip 103 192 168 24 103 1631 x Edit Stats D E Mail Data Points B Scheduler Calendar Alarm X unregistered not contacted registered not responding no ext NAT disabled networks under control Statistics L Web Reset Contact Logout M ooo E T Nw 7 Figure 115 Adding a member with extended NAT Mode on the Web UI 7 4 3 Multiple IP 852 devices behind a NAT Classic Method If more than one LINX 101 must be used behind the NAT router and there are devic
182. ed If not configured explicitly a default poll cycle of 10 sec 1s chosen The default poll cycle can be changed in the project settings menu Based on the NV the data point is derived from the following kinds of data points are created e Simple NVs that hold only one scalar value e g SNVT amp Those kinds on NVs are represented as analog data points The data points holds the current value NV scaling factors are applied LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 68 LOYTEC e Simple NVs based on an enumeration e g SNVT date day Enumeration types result in multi state data points They represent the state of the NV e Structured NVs that consists of a number of fields e g SNVT switch All structured NVs are represented as user point That is the data point is structured similar to the NV it is based on Beneath the user data point the individual structure fields are presented as sub data points For more information on the different types of network variables and their implications please refer to the application note in Section 16 2 For CPs the allocation type File is used 5 5 2 Static Interface Changes Version 3 5 The LINX 10X can be configured to use static NVs Unlike dynamic NVs static NVs cannot be created in the network management tool They are part of the static interface and are usually compiled into the device When static NVs are used the LINX 10X changes its static interface and boots wit
183. ed port is not available in a system configuration the value is 255 This NV is polled only LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 217 LOYTEC Version 3 5 nvoElapsedTime SNVT elapsed tm Time since LINX 10X powered up or since the statistics for this port where reset The statistics can be reset with the network variable nviClearStat in the node object see Section 12 2 2 or if the node is reset with a network management command e g while the device is commissioned If the monitored port is not available in a system configuration the value is set to the invalid value The NV is polled only nvoAvgPkts SNVT count 32 The average number of packets per second received or transmitted via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvolvalBandUtl SNVT lev cont Bandwidth utilization of associated channel during the last interval For a smooth operation of the CEA 709 segment the average bandwidth utilization must remain below 50 96 nvolvalCrcErr SNVT lev cont Percentage of packets with CRC error received on the associated channel during the last interval nvolvalMissed SNVT lev cont Percentage of packets from the associated channel which could not be processed during the last interval nvolvalPkts SNVT count 32 Number of packets received or transmitted via the associated channel during the last interval nvoTotalCrcErr SNVT count 32 Total number of pac
184. eee nean nana anna anna 39 2 2 5 CEA 852 Server CODLTIPUEA LTOPE s or obresILbee essi pesos tbe rins 39 A 29 SCH Ag 852 C hanne 8E uaa dtu sre obe a 4 42 10 E mail Configuration acceischasdeseatesdeapetdetiassntaseaeeedseeeatarncameaetaa te 42 2 2T SOAP OMS vat Sinica iat tte dpt coetus St edad Ec batis ded oM dn oup es esee 43 A2 V2 gio RC 45 2 215359 chedulef ob ieu cue ad da ease cometh onis aee bou edu E 46 qs ANC MG AT E E N FE sh nein das exitos esperes cotum dentes adiu E TE T 48 S SAM SU III A T O A adananieeces 49 AS Device Statis EICS diee rS T aS 49 Zoo Poa Sect aranicssnnsned aircasusdcosaunane tt aanteumasmes aiiasusace nae peuaateusnnmndavsonunseunees 50 q 32 CEA S32 SAIS Cs eka 50 4 3 3 Enhanced Communications Test sse 5 BO C EAS TUDSSUIUSUOS ade Stout ete ber oa dr da oett eoo mr oo b sun 52 xa boum 52 2 5 0 OPC Server Statisties P ater 2 cine ai eat aeque uua e UT Le af 53 23 Schedler Statisties Pateicu a i iban sesibes either peii based bus 54 4 3 8 arm Dog P486 coU MA Du LN 55 4d JLbWEBGG In eredi iud diede ie 56 4 5 Reset Contact EOP0Ut au oiiterr EE Eo pote riri d EL i Ten eee Pope aao o sa VE Ed areik 56 Gud c 58 S1 CH A709 OPC Serye En S8 JUMEMN Vr CET 59 mye Wee STRUM N 59 5 2 2 arare PutatHctel S6 easet bte d aad ad teet 59 SMS PISIS NL em 60 3 201 PETS ISLC HON Lenis tetti eo A fas Base alsa tet
185. eiver used for more detailed information The usual cabling is a standard telephone wire JYStY N 2 0 8 mm The maximum distance between a slave and the repeater is 350 meters at Baud rates from 300 9600 Baud by limiting the Baud rates and using fewer slaves this limit can be increased Additionally it must be ensured that the bus voltage does not fall below 12 V The maximum cable length of the system must not exceed 1000 m maximum cable capacitance of 180 nF 13 3 Modbus RS 485 Version 3 5 The LINX 10X Modbus RS 485 port is an electrical interface in accordance to EIA 485 The topology of the Modbus RS 485 consists of a trunk cable along which the devices are connected either directly or via short derivation cables Without repeater a maximum of 32 slave devices can be connected to the bus Each Modbus RS 485 network segment must be properly terminated with an LT 04 network terminator connected at each of the two ends of the segment media Some Modbus slave devices might require the use of external pull up and pull down resistors Please refer to the data sheet or user manual of the slave device Figure 161 shows the Modbus RS 485 netork including pull up and pull down resistor and the network termination The maximum length of the cabling depends on the Baud rate used Without repeater a maximum length of 1000 meters is possible at 9600 Baud According to the Modbus standard the derivation cabling must never exceed 20 m
186. elect the input data points and click OK The data points appear as v1 v2 etc 6 Ifthe data point shall trigger the math calculation only after a certain change of value enter a value into the COV delta column 7 Select the input data point and click Add Variable to push the variable on the evaluation stack yZ Add value add al az Add variable 8 Select a function to be applied on the variables and click the Add Function button Jadd at a2 Add Function 9 The resulting formula is displayed at the bottom of the dialog Alternatively the formula can be entered there OQulput v1 v2 Save Changes Cancel 10 Add output data points by clicking the Add Output DP button Add Output DP Remove Output DP Output Datapoint Datapoint Path my register write LIN 100 User Registers 11 In the data point selector dialog select the output data points and click OK 12 To create the math object click Create 6 15 2 Editing a Math Object Version 3 5 Math objects can be edited once created The formula can be changed new variables added or additional output data points added To Edit a Math Object 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the Math Object sub folder 9 Global Objects m fMath Object Configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 138 LOYTEC Version 3 5 Select the math object in the data point list Math Objects Datapoint M ame Filter
187. elections are available MASTER can be selected if the device shall operate as Modbus master SLAVE can be selected if the device shall operate as a Modbus slave on this port Configure the desired TCP port which is used by Modbus TCP devices on that channel The default Modbus port number is 502 11 3 2 Data Points Modbus data points can be accessed through the Web UI as described in Section 4 2 11 11 3 3 Statistics Figure 143 shows a typical output of the statistics information which can be displayed for the Modbus ports For each port available one statistics tab 1s displayed The statistics can be cleared for each Modbus port separately by pressing the Clear Modbus statistics button A refresh of the statistics can be done by pressing Update Modbus statistics DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin B OPC Server m Scheduler Protocol Analyzer m Alarm Log O RS485 P Device Info p Update Modbus statistics Clear Modbus statistics Config O LO General Modbus Statistics Statistics T Statistics cleared 2009 05 04 13 34 06 omy Rx packets 0 m P T Rx bytes 0 m System Log lt m CEA 852 eJ Tx packet 423 B Enh Comm Test Un Tx bytes 3384 E SEO Timeout errors 423 m Modbus Miraa TE B M Bus Checksum errors 0 Ss D Figure 143 Statistics of the Modbus port The following information is available e Statistics cleared last time of statistics reset e Rx packets
188. em This can result in inconsistencies between the actual CP contents on the device and their copy in the network management tool It is recommended to synchronize the CPs from the device into the LNS database before editing and writing them back To Synchronize CPs in NL220 1 Double click on the device object in the device tree 2 Press the Upload button on the Configuration tab of the device properties see Figure 94 General fni LonMar al Network Nis Config amp MSGs VER Filet Plugins 4 NLCAN Consult pour device s documentation about configurations Close SEFTinvrtDut SCPTinvitDut TI SCPT direction SCPT direction E SCPT driveTime SCPT drive T ime 7 SCPTmaxRcevTime SCPT masAeyT ime Help Upload Download Copy all Figure 94 Configuration Tab for Configuration Properties in NL220 To Synchronize CPs in LonMaker TE 1l Right click on a device object and select Commissioning Resync CPs from the context menu 2 This opens the dialog shown in Figure 95 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 111 LOYTEC Set Configuration Properties x Hamels Help Operation C Download current values to device f Upload values from device Reset device to default values C Set device template defaults from device Figure 95 Set Configuration Properties in LonMaker TE 3 In this dialog select the radio button Upload values from device in the Operation gr
189. emplate from the folder list does not create a device instance Device instances can only be created using the import in the Network Management Dialog In this dialog also the device instances can also be created with their data points To Use Imported Data Points using Use On Device l Goto the Datapoints folder of the device of the Modbus Templates 2 Select the desired data points also multi select 1s possible Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 206 LOYTEC 3 Either press on the Use on Device button y or right click and select Use on Device This opens the Choose Modbus Device Instance dialog Choose Modbus Device Instance x Device Template Properties Manufacturer elmeasure Model Mame ug5110 Edit Modbus Devices Compatible Device Instances Device Mame Device Address IP Address Datapoints Template ug5il 1 5 5 R5 485 40 Elmeasure ug5110_1_55 55 R5 485 O Elmeasure Use On Device Cancel Figure 153 Choose Modbus Device Instance dialog The device list displays all devices which have the same Manufacturer and the same Model Name as the template If no device instance matches the device template create one by entering the Modbus management dialog The dialog can be entered by pressing the Edit Modbus Devices button In the management dialog the device instance can be either created manually take care of entering the correct manufactu
190. enabled The Multicast Address field allows the user to add the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X into a multi cast group for the CEA 852 IP channel Enter the channel s IP multi cast address here Please contact your system administrator on how to obtain a valid multi cast address To learn when it is beneficial to use multi cast addresses in your channel please refer to the L IP User Manual 1 4 2 7 CEA 709 Router Configuration This page is only available on the LINX 101 The CEA 709 router configuration page allows configuring the built in router mode Available modes are Configured Router and Smart Switch The LINX 101 must be rebooted to let the changes on this page take effect The configured router mode is the default setting Choose this setting if you want to use the LINX 101 as a standard configured CEA 709 router that can be configured in a network management tool such as NL 200 or LonMaker The Smart Switch mode lets the device act as a self learning router like the L Switch In this configuration the LINX 101 s router doesn t need to be configured with a network management tool but is completely transparent in the network Use this operating mode in a plug amp play networking environment The switch mode should only be used in LAN networks In Smart Switch mode this page has two more configuration fields Subnet node learning and Group learning LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Router mode Configured Router
191. er e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 2 4 e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 2 6 e MDS secret if authentication is required see Section 4 2 6 If multiple IP 852 devices behind one NAT router are added the Auto NAT setting in the LINX 101 is recommended to be used with the LINX 101 configuration server 7 3 3 IP 852 Device Contacts Configuration Server Version 3 5 In this scenario the IP 852 device needs the following parameters set in order to contact the configuration server The remaining parameters are retrieved from the configuration server e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 2 4 e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 2 6 e MDS secret if authentication is required see Section 4 2 6 e Configuration server IP address and port number see Section 4 2 6 If the Auto member feature is enabled in the configuration server the IP 852 device can add itself to the IP 852 channel without explicitly adding the device at the configuration server Note that enabling auto member is a potential security hole since any device can add itself to the IP 852 channel LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 144 LOYTEC 7 3 4 Using the Built In Configuration Server For security purposes the configuration server contacts each IP 852 device on the
192. er Manual 97 LOYTEC To scan NVs online off the CEA 709 network 1 Click on the Datapoints tab mo View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help Os aa Do t a i jc mmmIESOE ve Connected Device 192 465 2401 Datapoints Connections Connection Overview Statistics L web Projects 2 Select the folder CEA709 Network Scan e Datapoint Configuration EHE Imported be n CE4709 CSV File P H Scan LNS Scan 3 Right click on that folder and select Scan CEA709 852 Network This opens the CEA709 Management dialog as shown in Figure 80 NN CEA 709 Management E Device List Node ID Prooram io subnet node Model No LIME 1D0D FT 10 linx 23 ennnnon1DbFBC 90000746 16840402 L Gate IP 852 lgate 94 annon ALI ggd 74600811900 LIN 100 IP 552 BO000001 DF 49 S000074616841905 Node BO0000058264 s000D FOS 32000052 Node FEB1137BBCB8 anono101038n00000 lal xl Status Device scan done Found 5 devices 3 new 2 existing Abort Version 3 5 Discover Network Configure CEA709 Port Discover an Subnet _ _ meran IA Discover on Service Pin Install Device Update Model Sten om wink mao Install Device Management in Database Device Mame CreateNew Mode ID Update Selected Program ID Replace Selected Subnet Mode Delete Selected Network Mame Subsystem Ma
193. er Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the standard LONMARK real time keeper object The Real Time Keeper Object is used to synchronize the system time of multiple LonMark compliant devices The object has the following network variables e nvolimeDate SNVT time stamp Propagates the devices current system time and date local time It is typically bound to the nviTimeSet input network variable of the node objects of the LonMark compliant devices which are synchronized with the system time of the LINX 10X The update rate of the nvoTimeDate can be configured using the configuration property SCPTupdateRate default every 60 seconds 12 2 4 Channel Monitor Object Version 3 5 The Channel Monitor Object functional block is responsible for network monitoring There is one object for each channel the LINX 10X is attached to The channel monitor object with index 0 corresponds to the FT port of the LINX 10X while the object with index 1 corresponds to the IP 852 port of the LINX 10X If a port is not available in the current system configuration the nvoElapsedTime is set to the invalid value and nvoPort is set to 255 Each object has the following network variables e nvoPort SNVT count Index of port associated with this Channel Monitor Object instance Port 1 corresponds to the FT port of the LINX 10X while port 2 corresponds to the IP 852 port of the LINX 10X If the monitor
194. er once when the system is designed The configuration of the times and values that shall be scheduled is not part of that initial configuration and may be changed later This distinction has to be kept in mind A scheduler object sets its data points to predefined values at specified times The function of the scheduler is state based This means that after a given time the scheduler maintains this state It can re transmit the scheduled values as appropriate e g when rebooting The predefined values are called value presets A value preset contains one or more values under a single label e g day schedules the values 20 0 TRUE 400 Which value preset 1s scheduled at what time is defined through a daily schedule The daily schedule defines the times and value presets in a 24 hour period A schedule typically contains daily schedules for the weekdays Monday through Sunday See Figure 49 for an example of a daily schedule LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 64 LOYTEC Version 3 5 Monday og i p oe ut un 03 00 Ud UH ooo ooo 3 ooo E o UU EMEN Ud oo Figure 49 Example of a Daily Schedule For some tasks the daily schedules on weekdays is sufficient However on some specific dates there may be exceptions to the regular week This can be implemented by defining daily schedules for exception days For instance there may be a separate
195. er represent an entire NV or individual elements of a structured NV CEA 709 schedulers may have several different groups of data points attached 1 e the value preset may consist of more than one element For example a CEA 709 scheduler might schedule a SNVT temp and a SNVT switch and have 3 elements in each value preset as depicted in Figure 102 Description Location Group Default LIN amp 110 CE4709 Port Datapoints i 0 00 21 00 16 00 0 00 0 00 50 00 LINS 110 CEA703 Port Datapoints 7 LINS 110 CEA703Port Datapoints Tooo ooo 100 Figure 102 Example value presets in CEA 709 schedulers nva setpoinE Priorities of exception days in a CEA 709 scheduler range from 0 the highest to 126 the lowest The value 127 is reserved as a default for weekdays Further the implementation as LONMARK standard objects requires the use of configuration properties If the number of CEA 709 schedulers or their capacities for daily schedules and value presets 1s changed the resource and static interface of the CEA 709 port changes The resources reserved for LONMARK calendar and scheduler objects can be changed in the project settings see Section 6 3 4 When downloading a project the software verifies 1f sufficient resources have been configured If it detects a problem the user is notified to update the project settings The Auto Set feature automatically selects the right amount of resources 6 12 Local Alarming
196. ersion 3 5 and higher See Section 17 for differences between the different LINX 10X firmware versions LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 17 LOYTEC 2 Quick Start Guide This chapter shows step by step instructions on how to configure the LINX 10X for a simple OPC server application 2 1 Hardware Installation Connect power 12 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC the CEA 709 network and the Ethernet cable as shown in Figure 3 More detailed instructions are shown in Chapter 3 Important Do not connect terminal 17 with Earth ground Power Supply Ethernet Figure 3 Basic Hardware Installation 2 2 Configuration of the LINX 10X The LINX 10X can be configured via a console interface or via the Web interface To configure the LINX 10X the following steps have to be performed 1 Setup IP configuration see Sections 2 2 1 and 2 2 2 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 18 LOYTEC 2 Setup the OPC configuration see Section 2 3 Note This setup procedure assumes the use of the IP interface 2 2 1 IP Configuration on the Console Use a PC terminal program with the communication settings set to 38 400 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit no handshake To connect COMI of the PC to the Console on the LINX 10X use a standard null modem cable with full handshaking Power up the LINX 10X or press Return if the LINX 10X is already running The following menu should appear on the terminal
197. es which do not support the extended NAT mode we propose the setup from Figure 116 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 148 LOYTEC IP 192 168 1 100 NAT 135 23 2 1 Configuration i Server for Firewall NAT Router KAR mE i M me IP Channel 1 IP Channel 1 u m 135 23 2 1 192 168 1 1 IP 192 168 1 101 Configuration Server for Forward ports 1628 and 1629 oe IP Channel 2 Internet to IP address 192 168 1 100 il e TP 1250 m High speed back bone mode IP 192 168 1 102 ace m FT 10 IP 192 168 1 103 IP Channel 2 L INX Aud er m Figure 116 Application that uses multiple LINX 101 devices behind a NAT router firewall The LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 100 1s member of IP Channel 1 and can be accessed through the Internet The LINX 101 devices with IP addresses 192 168 101 to 192 168 1 110 form another logical IP Channel 2 that communicates with the devices on the IP Channel 1 over the TP 1250 channel which is used in high speed backbone mode for optimum networking performance Note that devices on both IP Channels 1 and 2 can of course connect to the same physical network wiring Furthermore both IP Channels 1 and 2 must have a separate configuration server that manages the LINX 101 devices on the different channels In the example in Figure 116 the LINX 101 with address 192 168 1 100 acts as the conf
198. es are in the channel and on the traffic burden for those devices As a rule of thumb multi cast is used when there are only switches repeaters in the channel and it is not used when there are only configured routers To detect if the LINX 101 s router utilizes the multi cast feature contact the Extended CEA 852 device statistics in the statistics menu Section 4 2 6 The entry Channel Routing Mode reads SL send list if packets are routed to the multi cast group It reads CR channel routing if the normal unicast method is employed Also the entry Multi cast packets sent in the CEA 852 device statistics menu Section 4 2 6 counts the number of multicast packets transmitted to the group If this item remains zero no multi cast is used by the LINX 101 7 6 Remote LPA Operation Version 3 5 The LINX 101 supports remote LPA access This means that a CEA 709 protocol analyzer connected to the Ethernet network can connect to the LINX 101 and record all packets on the CEA 709 channel FT 10 Our LPA IP supports this sophisticated feature The functionality is shown in Figure 117 The LPA IP runs on a Windows PC that is connected to the Ethernet network In a LINX 101 device selection window one can e g select the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 210 and display all packets on the FT 10 channel connected to the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 210 For this operation the LPA IP does not need to be a member of the IP 852 channel N
199. es shall work with exception days such as Holidays If it suffices for schedules to define daily schedules for normal weekdays only no calendar needs to be created To Create a local Calendar l p gt Version 3 5 Under the port folder select the Calendar sub folder to create a calendar 71 Datapoints 0 Items be J Calendar 0 Items j ud 1 1 Scheduler 0 Items bal 2 Alarm 0 Items C Trend 0 Items Right click in the data point list view and select New local Calendar In the Create New Calendar dialog box as shown in Figure 100 enter Name and Description of the calendar Correct the effective period if necessary LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 118 LOYTEC Create New Calendar x Calendar Properties Mame calendar Description Schedule Praductian Effective Period Date DEMM 7 Start Create Calendar Cancel Figure 100 Create New Calendar dialog box 4 Click Create Calendar The calendar appears now in the data point list view 6 11 2 Create Calendar Pattern When a local calendar is used it needs to be configured with calendar patterns A calendar pattern represents a class of days such as Holidays The calendar patterns can then be used in a schedule to define daily schedules for exception days The available calendar patterns should be created when the system configuration is engineered The actually dates in the calendar patterns can be
200. escribed earlier in this document The scan folder 1s filled with available remote alarm servers E1 3 CEA709 Network Scan Ff s0000007das pf Datapoints 21 Items LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 136 LOYTEC Note 2 From the points in the import folder select the alarm server points you are interested in and click the Use on Device speed button This creates the corresponding alarm client points in your project Ea Remote Devices B E s0000007da58 i Alarm 1 Items 3 Select the new alarm client point and adjust the name of the local NV default name is nviAlarm 2 This NV is located in the Clients functional block Due to the static input NV which is required for a CEA 709 alarm client point adding alarm clients will change the static interface of the device Note The new static input NVs representing the alarm clients on the local device need to be bound to the alarm outputs of the remote device A CEA 709 device normally delivers alarms through an output NV of type SNVT alarm 2 located in the node object of the device therefore the new input NV on the local device must be bound to the alarm output NV of the remote devices node object All required information is transmitted over the alarm input NV so it is possible to later bind the alarm client to any other alarm server without rescanning the network If connected via LNS the binding to the nvoAlarm2 NV is made automatically by the configuration
201. esign flow without LNS using bindings To use the LINX 10X in the non LNS management tool commission the LINX 10X using the exported XIF file and create the bindings When changing a running LINX 10X configuration with existing bindings it is recommended to create additional data points as external NVs with polling as described in Section 6 4 3 Otherwise depending on the third party tool a new XIF file may be required to be exported for replacing the LINX 10X in the non LNS tool In this case the user would need to create all bindings again from scratch see Section 5 5 2 6 4 5 Replace a LINX 10X A LINX 10X can be replaced in the network by another unit This might be necessary if a hardware defect occurs First of all the replacement LINX 10X needs to be configured with the appropriate IP settings including all relevant CEA 852 device settings The remainder of this section focuses on the LINX 10X data point configuration The work Version 3 5 flow is depicted in Figure 64 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 86 LOY TEC START Start the Configurator stand alone Section 6 7 2 Y Load a saved LINX 10X project file Y Download configuration to LINX 10X Section 6 7 12 i Replace LINX 10X Section 6 6 Reboot the LINX 10X Section 4 4 DONE Figure 64 Basic work flow to configure a replacement device Start the Configurator software stand al
202. est finished CEA 852 Device Address Result Round Trip Comment 192 168 24 101 1629 CS I 3 ms OK 192 158 24 33 1528 I n a Peer not reachable w OK FAILED testing communication Enhanced Communication Test Summary Ok 1 Device s OK return path not tested 0 Device s FAILED 1 Device s Figure 41 Enhanced Communication Test Output LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 52 LOYTEC The Round Trip Time RTT is measured as the time a packet sent to the peer device needs to be routed back to the LINX 10X It is a measure for general network delay If the test to a specific member fails a text is displayed to describe the possible source of the problem The reasons for failure are summarized in Table 6 OK Return path not tested green Displayed for a device which is reachable but which does not support the checkmark feature to test the return path device sending to this CEA 852 device Therefore a potential NAT router configuration error cannot be detected If the tested device is an L IP it is recommended to upgrade this L IP to 3 0 or higher Not reachable not supported This is displayed for the CS if it is not reachable or the CS does not support this test To remove this uncertainty it is recommended to upgrade the L IP to 3 0 or higher Local NAT config Error This is displayed if the CEA 852 device of the LINX 10X is located behind a NAT router or firewall and the port forwarding in the NAT Router usua
203. f the M Bus port is not necessary as no parameters are required for the M Bus 10 4 2 Data Points M Bus data points can be accessed through the Web UI as described in Section 4 2 11 10 4 3 Statistics Figure 125 shows a typical output of the statistics information which can be displayed for the M Bus port Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 171 LOYTEC DLOYTEC LINX 101 Lo gge d in as guest Update M Bus statistics Clear M Bus statistics Alarm Log O Device Info pa 9x General M Bus Statistics Config Q Statistics cleared mU 17 37 09 X ES Rx bytes 32802 ENS D fs 5 2 Tx total 606 Tx errors y Tx no response 23 x Tx dropped lo 3 Tx repetitions 45 O lt Tx successful 606 i m Devices online 6 D c L Web Devices Defect Devices offline lo lo Reset Protocol Analyzer Figure 125 Statistics of the M Bus port The following information is available e Rx bytes number of bytes received e Tx bytes number of bytes sent e Tx total total number of transmissions e Tx errors number of errors during a transmission e Tx no response number of transmissions without a response e Tx dropped number of dropped transmissions in case of an error device responses or transmissions can be dropped e Tx repetitions number repeated messages e Tx successful number of successful transmissions e Devices online number of devices which are currently o
204. g send an email By supporting both alarm SNVTs SNVT alarm and SNVT alarm 2 legacy and state of the art alarm handling is supported e nviDateEvent SNVT date event nvoDateResync SNVT switch These NVs are part of the standard LONMARK node object if schedulers are used If not bound the local calendar is used If a global calendar shall be used both of these NVs must be bound to the respective NVs of the global calendar object e nvilimeSet SNVT time stamp When writing to this NV the system is set The time value is interpreted as local time e nvoSystemTemp SNVT temp This NV can be used to poll the system temperature of the LINX 10X It does not send updates and must be polled e nvosupplyVolt SNVT volt This NV can be used to poll the supply voltage of the LINX 10X It does not send updates and must be polled e nvolpAddress SNVT str asc This NV can be used to poll the IP address of the LINX 10X It does not send updates e nciEarthPos SNVT earth pos This configuration property can be used to set the earth position of the LINX 10X It has been implemented as an NV to make other devices send that configuration to the LINX 10X over the network e g from a GPS device e nviClearStat SNVT switch When writing 100 0 1 to this NV the channel monitor objects statistics data are cleared e nvoUpTime SNVT elapsed tm This NV contains the elapsed time since the last reboot 12 2 3 Real Time Keep
205. gh amount of errors IS RED flashing at 1 Hz Firmware image corrupt Please upload new firmware EO ports ORANGE ORANGE permanent Port disabled e g using LSD Tool ORANGE flashing fast Traffic on port configured as management port e g using LSD Tool Table 1 CEA 709 Activity LED Patterns 3 4 5 Ethernet Link LED The Ethernet Link LED lights up green whenever an Ethernet cable is plugged in and a physical connection with a switch hub or PC can be established 3 4 6 Ethernet Activity LED The Ethernet Activity LED lights up green for 6 ms whenever a packet is transmitted or received or when a collision is detected on the network cable 3 4 7 CNIP LED The CNIP LED is a three color LED that indicates different operating states of the LINX 10X s CEA 852 device Green The CEA 852 device is fully functional and all CEA 852 configuration data channel routing info channel membership list send list are up to date Green flicker If a valid CEA 709 packet is received or transmitted over the IP channel the CNIP LED turns off for 50 ms Only valid CEA 709 IP packets sent to the IP address of the LINX 10X can be seen Stale packets or packets not addressed to the LINX 10X are not seen Yellow Device is functional but some configuration data is not up to date device cannot contact configuration server but has configuration data saved in Flash memory Red Device is non functional because it was rejected from the CEA 852 IP
206. gs on the LINX 10X is shown in Figure 120 The OPC quality property of a given OPC tag is coupled to the data point status If a data point is offline or unreliable the OPC quality property changes to uncertain LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 157 LOYTEC 9 1 2 1 Analog 9 1 2 2 Binary Version 3 5 pg amp J OPC Server Gl Test LINX TIT 99 EMG Serveritems 3 Syste rm Registers z icy AlarmmLags Figure 120 Client browsing the OPC tag namespace on a LINX 10X Analog data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each analog data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 5 Double Item Value Double The present data point value Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update Item Access Rights Integer This property defines whether the tag 1s read only or read write Item Description String This is the description of the data point Item EU Type Integer This property is 1 High EU Double This is the analog maximum value of the data point Low EU Double This is the a
207. h data point individually To Edit a Multistate Map 1 Click on the button in the State Count property of a multistate data point This opens the multistate map manager as shown in Figure 55 Bl Manage Multistate Maps Edit Assign In Repository Filter Clear S State Map motor state I Selected Datapoints user mg Head Assign Figure 55 Assign multistate maps in the multistate map manager 2 Select an existing state map in the State Map list and click on Assign Maps that are fixed and cannot be changed are marked with a lock symbol 3 Ifanew multistate map shall be created change to the Edit tab 4 Click on the Create button and enter a new multistate map name Then hit Enter E dit Assign 5 Inthe Configure States box enter the desired number of states and click Set 6 Edit the state texts as needed Configure States Count 3 Set 1 2 Two 3 Three One 7 Change back to the Assign tab 8 Select the newly created multistate map and click the Assign button The assigned map is now displayed next to the data point Datapoint 4 Assigned Map user ms Head user map 1 6 2 6 CEA 709 Properties Apart from the common data point properties discussed in Section 6 2 4 the data points of the CEA 709 technology have additional properties Depending on if a NV is local or external remote the properties may vary Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
208. h a new one Each time the static interface of the LINX 10X changes 1 e static NVs are added deleted or modified the model number is changed The model number is the last byte of the program ID Thus a change in the static interface results in a change of the program ID and a new device template needs to be created in the network management tool A new device template usually means that the device has to be deleted and added again in the database All bindings and dynamic NVs have to be created again for the new device When the LINX 10X Configurator is connected via LNS it supports the process of changing the device template for the new static interface It automatically upgrades the device template of the LINX 10X device in the LNS database and restores the previous bindings and dynamic NVs If the LINX 10X is not configured with an LNS based tool this support is not available The new static interface is only available in a new XIF file or by uploading the new device template into the database For more information on the static interface and device templates please refer to the application note in Section 16 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 69 LOYTEC 6 The LINX 10X Configurator This Chapter gives step by step instructions on how to commission LINX 10X create a data point configuration with input and output network variables and how to expose those data points to the OPC server We show the configuration steps using
209. he On Device column are L WEB projects which are also stored on the device A red No identifies the L WEB project to be missing in the project or on the device respectively 4 If you want to download an L WEB project to the device which is missing there select the project and click Download After the download the project appears with a green Yes in On Device L Web Project RAM Size Project In LINK Project New Project 57 17 kB Second Project Wes 26 02 2010 17107 5 31 KB Yes 28 02 2010 16 67 5 31 kB 57 18 ke L Web Project Mame 5 If you want to remove a project from the device click Remove in the LINX Device box L Web Project Mame In LIMX Project L Web Project RAM Size Project New Project 57 17 kB Second Project esygB 02 2010 17 03 5 81 ke Ne s7 18 le 6 If you want to remove the project from the current LINX 10X project file click Remove in the L WEB Projects on PC box L Web Project Name In LINS Project L Web Project RAM Size Project New Project 57 17 kB Second Project 0 00 kB 7 If you want to export the L WEB project into a separate L WEB project file click Export and select a file name in the file requestor dialog 8 If you want to import an L WEB project from a separate L WEB project file click Import and select the file in the file requestor dialog The L WEB project appears in the project but not on the device 9 3 Using the OPC Bridge 9 3 1 Software Inst
210. height above sea level This setting is used for an astronomical clock For fixed locations such as a building the position can be entered on this page For moving locations this setting can be updated over the network using the network variable nciEarthPos see Section 12 2 2 For generating CSV files for trend logs alarm logs etc the delimiter for those CSV files can be configured This setting can be changes between a comma and a semi colon The change takes effect immediately for all files generated by the device 4 2 2 Backup and Restore Version 3 5 A configuration backup of the LINX 10X device can be downloaded via the Web interface Press the Backup Restore link as shown in Figure 21 to start the download The LINX 10X device assembles a single file including all required files A file requestor dialog allows specifying the location where the backup file shall be stored To restore the device settings simply select a previously generated backup file in the Restore Configuration section of the page by clicking the button next to the Filename field Then press the Restore button The backed up configuration data consists of e Device settings Passwords IP settings e mail config etc e Data point configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 35 LOYTEC e CEA 709 binding information e AST settings e L Web configuration and custom Web pages LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin
211. his is a constant tag of type string which contains email It identifies this folder as an e mail template folder e Send Boolean read write When writing TRUE to this tag the e mail transmission is triggered 9 2 Using L WEB Version 3 5 The L WEB is a Web based visualization software that comes free with the LINX 10X It uses the standard Web technologies to visualize and control data provided by one or more LINX 10X or LINX 20X Automation Servers on a Windows PC The L WEB software uses the standardized OPC XML DA Web service to communicate between L WEB and remote LINX 10X or LINX 20X Automation Servers which makes it extremely firewall friendly and easy to setup The graphical design of the L WEB user interface consists of pages which can simply be created by using the L VIS L WEB Configurator software without any know how in HTML Java etc Dynamic information is shown in the form of numeric values text changing icons bar graphs trend logs alarm and event lists or schedule controls The complete set of automation functions of the LINX 10X or LINX 20X Automation Server is fully supported by L WEB The automation services are residing in the embedded LINX 10X or LINX 20X Automation Servers and distributed over the network to build up a dependable system with L WEB only accessing these services Furthermore any kind of calculations data point connections etc are implemented on the embedded Automation LOYTEC elect
212. ht click on that folder and in the context menu select Build XIF 3 This opens a file requestor where the XIF file name needs to be entered Select a useful name to identify the LINX 10X e g as linx 10X_1 xif 6 7 14 Enable Legacy NM Mode For network management tools which do not support the ECS enhanced command set network management commands the legacy network management mode must be configured Please contact the tool s vendor for information whether ECS is supported or Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 106 LOYTEC not Note that changing to legacy network management mode changes the static interface of the device To Enable Legacy NM Mode 1 Inthe LINX 10X Configurator menu go to Settings gt Project settings 2 Click on the tab CEA709 3 Putacheck mark in Enable Legacy Network Management Mode Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules EA7093 EA7093 AST 4 Click OK 5 Download the configuration to activate the change 6 7 15 Upload Dynamic NVs from Device In LNS based tools it is possible to create dynamic NVs on the device manually This is a possible workflow to engineer the NV interface of the device in the LNS database To use those manually created dynamic NVs the LINX 10X Configurator must synchronize its dynamic NV information with the port To Upload Dynamic NVs 1 Select the CEA709 Port folder Elf LINX 100 B System Registers 9 Items m
213. ialog opens You can enter exactly one pattern entry for the embedded exception It is recommended to choose a descriptive name for the day e g 24 12 xx for every 24 of December ma ISS KS IRS KS KS ks Configure Click Create Pattern The embedded exception is now available Sun 0 v 24 12 xx O highest lo Holiday 126 lowest v Maintenance Days 126 lowest 6 11 8 Configure Control Data Points A scheduler object can be configured to use special control data points An enable disable data point can be configured which enables or disables the scheduler depending on its Boolean value An enable disable feedback data point is updated with the current enabled state of the scheduler This also reflects and an enable from the network The Preset Name data point can be attached to be updated with the name of the currently active preset To Configure Control Data Points l Open the Configure Schedule dialog to configure daily schedules as described in Section 6 11 4 Go to the Scheduled Datapoints tab In the Control Datapoints group box click the button to add the desired control data point A data point selection dialog opens Select a matching data point and click OK For the preset name a string data point must be selected To remove an undesired control data point click on the Remove button 6 11 9 Using the SNVT tod event The SNVT tod event can be used in a schedule for implementing th
214. ice LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 80 LOYTEC Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules E4709 cEAz09 AST Device Configuration Enable Legacy Network Management Mode Datapoint Settings Default Polleycle For External Nis 60 5 Use shate member of snvt_switch as binary datapoint f multistate datapoint Omit unused child datapoints of UNYT UICPT structures Configuration Download Configure device s domain Domain Length bytes O T Domain ID tin hex ae Subnet Made 254 i 120 Figure 58 CEA 709 Project Settings 6 3 4 AST Settings For CEA 709 devices the use of alarming scheduling and trending AST features requires additional resources functional objects and NVs This changes the static interface Since the number of used resources also influences the performance the CEA 709 AST tab allows configuring those resources for the project In this tab the required number of scheduler units that may be instantiated and their capacity may be configured how many time value entries value templates bytes per value template etc It contains the following options and settings which are relevant to calendar and scheduler functionality of the device Version 3 5 Enable Calendar Object This checkbox enables a LONMARK compliant calendar object on the device It is automatically enabled together with local schedulers since the two are always used together Enab
215. ice IY Automatically structure imported datapoints for faster OPC browsing Figure 56 General Project Settings LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 79 LOYTEC 6 3 2 Data Point Naming Rules The data point naming rules tab see Figure 57 allows specifying how data point names are automatically derived from scanned network variables The preview shows how names would look like when the check marks are modified Project Settings x General Datapoint Naming Rules Options cEAz0s cEA709 AST Select how the scanned datapoints name should be set v Add Application Device Name Add Functional Black Mame vw Add Network variable Mame Preview MV DeviceMame FunctianalBlackMarme HvMame Figure 57 Data Point Naming Rules Project Settings 6 3 3 CEA 709 Settings The CEA 709 configuration tab as shown in Figure 58 allows configuring properties of the device s CEA 709 port The options are Version 3 5 Enable Legacy Network Management Mode This group box contains check boxes for each CEA 709 port of the device Put a check mark on the port if this port shall be operated in the legacy network management mode In that mode the port does not use the extended command set ECS of network management commands This can be necessary to operate the device with some network management tools that do not support the ECS Default Pollcycle for External NVs When using external NVs this poll cycle is set as a
216. idge eroe ee eorr tet ev eria eoru Eee aa esae aae eb oco ee vodd 164 9 3 1 Software Installation cocer atop e ote b Puts Ee Yea Eo vod eee rebates 164 9 3 2 Configure the Bridge Locally oerte een 165 9 3 3 Export OPC Servers for another PC ete nt edes 165 9 3 4 Import OPC Servers Using the Configurator seeeeeeeeee 166 9 3 5 Manually Configure Servers sronto treine Tode n nit me edis 166 9 5 0 Bridge Timing Patdt eleEs ue en ate Re Yd een E ees 167 94 Usinge Custom Web PageS iie e eate opor b oed ene po ree guet Quos abe dese 168 UN 1 1 Caen ee ene Perret rer eene Peer UU EU e MI LAE 169 10 1 Introduction uuu tibiis e aD oossoo tois adea Casa co bv os e Capui co ripa eoa Capua 169 10 2 Hardware Installation cedo EE PL egeo i2 dp LOREM E CEU EN ER EEG EL EP TEEN ETE 169 10 3 M B s NetwOoEK 4o e iion ee eel Deae ae uuo e En PEE EE RREEE e eau t opes SAE 169 10 4 Web InterfaQeunssguiotoetietiieeto ito eo pii teo Disi Dv vos to aeo top voco eld Lev Givi Dover to aeo eaeoe 170 IO A COMM CUA ON oce ettet EU PE tre erra ette a ue ES a ette ens 170 Hd 2 Data Pontes iut RR otra Db Gesn ene Uta cien aUe nin MCT uos 170 TOC 29 E T E Beto EE ANSE EA E EA A tatu dcin utu E 170 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 9 LOY TEC 10 44 Me Bus Protocol Analyzer moredet retenti pd eo etur bntiun east Romeo 171 im uM Ghi 172 10 5 1 Activating M Bus Configuration cccccccccccccccc
217. ields specifying the date and time when this CSV log was generated The line log capacity has two fields the current number of log entries in the file and the log capacity Following are one or more lines of log item Each line specifies a trended data point The first field is the index the second the ID of the logged data point the third the data point name The data point name can be augmented by engineering units in square brackets Log entries in the CSV refer to the item index to identify the data point for which the entry was logged log csv ver 2 log device LOYTEC Product Code Firmware Version Device ID String Serial No log info Log ID Log Name log create YYY MM DD HH MM SS log capacity filled capacity log item index UID data point name units 4E E H HE HE HE After those lines any number of comment lines starting with a hash character are allowed One line contains the column headings Lines that are not comments specify one log record per line using the column information as described below The columns are separated by commas or semi colons If commas are used as a separator the decimal point must be a point If semi colons are used the decimal point must be a comma Sequence Number Source The log record sequence number This is the monotonously increasing sequence number which is unique for each log record Data point source identifier Indexes into logger entry header
218. if major changes to the configuration of the network are made it is recommended to reset the LINX 10X configuration to factory defaults Important Wait at least 30 seconds after power up of the LINX 10X before pressing the Status Button to ensure that the LINX 10X has booted properly 3 6 DIP Switch Settings The DIP switch assignment for the LINX 10X is shown in Table 2 Please leave all switches at default state DIP Switch Factory Default Must be OFF OFF Must be OFF OFF Table 2 DIP Switch Settings for LINX 10X 3 Terminal Layout and Power Supply The LINX 10X provides screw terminals to connect to the network as well as to the power supply The screw terminals can be used for wires of a maximum thickness of 1 5 mm AWG12 The device can either be DC or AC powered Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 30 LOYTEC Modbus RS 485 Ground n HER 5 6 CEA 709 A B of TP FT 10 Channel Port s Bemei Baer O OOOO 15 Earth Ground 16 17 Power Supply 12 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC 10 96 enna ec pod Table 3 LINX 10X Terminals 3 8 Wiring The CEA 709 network segment connected to the LINX 10X needs to be terminated according to the rules found in the specification of the transceiver see Section 13 1 Important When using shielded network cables only one side of the cable should be connected to earth ground Thus the shield must be connected to earth ground either at the LINX 10X te
219. iguration server for IP Channel 1 and the LINX 101 with IP address 192 168 1 101 acts as the configuration server for IP Channel 2 7 5 Multi Cast Configuration Version 3 5 IP multi casting 1s a feature of the IP protocol that allows one packet to be delivered to a group of IP hosts To receive such multi cast packets each IP host must be member of a multi cast group This group is identified by a multi cast address e g 225 0 0 37 and a UDP port number The LINX 101 supports both unicast and multi cast delivery of CNIP data packets Using multi cast is recommended when using the LINX 101 s router in the Smart Switch Mode For those LINX 101s configure a multi cast address in the IP configuration menu Please contact your system administrator to obtain a valid multi cast address for your network LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 149 LOYTEC Note that all channel members must be configured with the same multi cast address and use the same client port 1628 is recommended Also note that multi cast addresses cannot be routed on the Internet They can only be used in a LAN or VPN environment If you configure multi cast there may be some devices which do not support this feature In this case the LINX 101 uses a hybrid scheme and sends unicast to those devices which are not configured for multi cast Note that the LINX 101 determines automatically when to switch to the multi cast mode depending on what types of devic
220. iguration software to the LINX 10X To Connect to a LINX 10X Stand Alone 1 Select the FTP connection method by clicking on the FTP connect button File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web Oe HD asa ea Alp vl t in the tool bar of the main connections window The FTP connect dialog as shown in Figure 76 opens FTP Connect to Device E xj Status Target Device Recent Connections We 10 save Delete Hostname or IP Address 192 168 24 101 User admin Password ENERE FTF Fort Zl Telnet Pork 23 cael Figure 76 FTP connection dialog 2 Enter the IP address of the LINX 10X the user name and password The default user is admin and the default password is admin 3 Optionally click into the Recent Connections field and enter a user defined name for this connection That name can be selected later to connect Click on Save to store that connection 4 If your device is located behind a NAT router of firewall you may change the FTP and Telnet ports to your needs for accessing the device Clicking Save also stored these settings 5 Click on Connect This establishes the connection to the device 6 7 3 Uploading the Configuration Version 3 5 To get the current network variable configuration of the LINX 10X the port interface needs to be uploaded This will upload the entire configuration from the LINX 10X including data points dynamic NVs and schedules To Up
221. igured router or it can be used as a self learning plug amp play router based on the high performance well proven routing core from our L Switch plug amp play multi port router devices smart switch mode The self learning router doesn t need a network management tool for configuration but is a true plug amp play and easy to use IP infrastructure component The LINX 100 can be configured to run either on the CEA 852 interface IP 852 mode or on the FT interface FT mode In the FT mode the device provides a remote network interface RNI which appears like a LOY TEC NIC IP is intended to be used together with the LOYTEC NIC software 2 The RNI can be utilized for remote access and configuration as well as trouble shooting with the remote LPA Please consult our product literature for the LPA IP to learn more about this IP based CEA 709 protocol analyzer LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 16 LOYTEC 1 3 M Bus 1 4 Modbus 1 5 Scope Version 3 5 In addition to the basic network technologies above this device supports the M Bus interface according to the standards EN 13757 2 and EN 13757 3 To gain access to the M Bus network an external M Bus interface must be attached to the device s serial connector The user can turn M Bus support on and off via a DIP switch on the device Through the M Bus interface the device can be used to scan the attached M Bus network for devices pull M Bus data points into a configuration
222. ile size in KB and duration of the trend log Alternatively for interval trends the estimated log duration and log interval can be edited Select a Fill Level Notification percentage This will decide at which fill level trigger will fire A fill level trigger can be used to trigger the transmission of an e mail see Section 6 13 5 Click Save Changes to store the basic configuration of the trend object The new trend log object appears in the data point list of the Trend folder 6 13 2 Configure Trended Data Points Version 3 5 When a local trend object has been created it needs to be configured which data points it shall log This is done by attaching data points to the trend object Only simple data points can be attached for trending 1 e of class analog binary or multi state For trend log objects in the CEA 709 technology multiple data points can be attached for trending The trending can be enabled disabled on behalf of an enable data point This data point should be of type binary If the value of that enable data point is TRUE the trend object logs data as defined by the trend mode If the value of the enable is FALSE trending is disabled If no enable data point 1s configured the trend log is always enabled To Attach Data Points for Trending Select the trend object in the Trend sub folder Te presion irean ue 5 1 Cu TestTrend n 1014 Right click and select Configure Trend from the context me
223. ine OO a OM QR us CO P3 om Hardware Infa Firmware Version TE 11 iCommission device me en 12 Reboot device Product Code ia iii 13 Create bindings Serial Number Device ID N A 14 Register an device template Vendor ID N A 15 Update device info Model Number ol Generate Free Task Progress Figure 89 Configuration Download Dialog Note that after the download is complete the interface changes become active on the LINX 10X 1 e the static NV interface has changed Refresh the network management tool to synchronize the tool with the changes to the LNS database made by the LINX 10X Configurator e g use the menu LonMaker Refresh in LonMaker or hit F5 in NL 220 Normally the Configurator software optimizes the download process by not executing certain LNS operations if not necessary For example only those bindings and dynamic NVs are deleted and re created which correspond to real changes in the interface The user can check the Force Full Upgrade option to clean and re do all steps 6 7 13 Build XIF for Port Interface When using static NVs on the LINX 10X the LINX 100 200 Configurator can export a new XIF file for the changed static interface To Create a XIF File 1 Select the CEA 709 Port folder sls LINX 100 e System Registers 9 Items i Bu User kena 2 Items m D prem 1 Items oo J Calendar 0 Items P P Scheduler 0 Items 2 Rig
224. information about the LOYTEC system diagnostics tool for the LINX 10X 16 2 Use of Static Dynamic and External NVs on a Device Please refer to application note ANOO9E Changing Device Interface in LNS for more information on the static NV interface XIF files device templates and the use of static dynamic and external NVs on LOYTEC gateway products Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 230 LOYTEC 17 Firmware Versions Table 11 shows the most important features available only in certain firmware versions Firmware Version Features lt lt lt lt lt lt lt m et e t N er et et er er ern v N Connections PME Scheduler bm i Trend Log RENE RE MN L i i Min max average trends KM V Alarming Lae y i Alarm Log Y CX qx qw Y E mail pv y fv v fv Backup Restore Configuration EE DL Web Service 1 1 pw cp qa qwe M Bus pv of v Vv m EN D EON xe uc L L e L je j L je ee A a eerta L je j L L L Modbus Slave eR EM EN ea Sam aia Support for the Master Scheduler Configurator e an Em EHE EHE IM x Next state SNVT tod event Embedded calendar L L L HA HFHH Run Time Configuration Table 11 Available Features depending on Firmware Version Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 231 18 Specifications 18 1 LINX 10X 18 1 1 Physical Specifications Operating Voltage Power Consumption In
225. ing static NVs from scanned or imported data points static NVs can also be created manually in the LINX 10X CEA 709 folder To Create Static NVs Manually 1 Select the LINX 10X CEA 709 Port Datapoint folder Er 2 LINE 100 olf System Registers 3 Items 77 User Registers 0 Items Fl CEA709 Port za L atapoints 0 Items 7 Calendar 0 Items m 2 Scheduler 0 Items 7 Alarm 0 Items 73 Trend B Items 73 Statistics 18 Items 7 Remote Devices 2 Right click in the data point list and select New Datapoint in the context menu This opens the NV creation dialog as shown in Figure 84 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 101 LOYTEC Tip TT 800000 static External Application Device Froperties Resource File STANDARD Datapoint Mame miMyTem Programmatic Mame Resource File saw rv Tvpe temp 39 Direction output i Functional Block Gateway 0 NY Flags v Auth Cfg Unack Repeated v Priority Cfg Authenticate Priority Polled Syne Create Static Mv Figure 84 Create a static NV manually Enter a data point name and a programmatic name The programmatic name is the name of the static NV which is being created Select a resource file To create a SNVT let the STANDARD resource file be selected Select a SNVT and a direction If a non standard resource file has been selected choose from one of the UNVTs Recently cr
226. int three times and select the different aggregation types 8 Inaddition a special Trend Enable data point can be selected If configured the trend log will only log data if the value of this data point evaluates true 1 e is not zero Click the button to select a data point T Enable Disable Datapoint g 9 To remove the enable data point click the Remove button 10 When done with the data point setup click Save Changes to leave the dialog A shortcut to creating a trend log object and attaching a data point is to select a data point in the data point manager right click on it and choose Trend Datapoint from the context menu This generates a trend log and links that data point to it 6 13 3 Trend Triggers Version 3 5 Local trend objects in CEA 709 can be operated in trigger mode In this mode one or more trigger data points cause the generation of a snapshot containing the values of the trended data points at the time instant the trigger 1s activated For a trend object one or more trigger conditions can be defined Depending on the trigger data point type the trigger conditions can be refined Note that the behavior of the trigger data point is influenced by the COV properties of the data point If the Only notify on COV property is checked the data point triggers only if its value changes to the value of the trigger condition If that property is not checked the data point triggers on every write with a value th
227. isable enable delete assign to NAT and remove from NAT For more information on the actions on NAT routers refer to Section 7 4 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 42 LOYTEC J L IP Config Channel List Microsoft Internet Explorer Bl x Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras a f AED pr Q Zur ck T ix 5B A yo Suchen f Favoriten gA LIS L4 33 Adresse E http 192 168 1 253 config eia amp 52chlisk Wechseln zu Links Norton AntiVirus M be DLOYTEC Logged in as Administrator Device Info c Add Device Reload Recontact Action on Selected Execute O WU No Name IP Address Stat Flags QU local 192 168 1 253 1628 I Edit C NAT Router 192 168 1 250 Edit 1 lip n1 10 0 2 2 1628 Edit Stats Iv P erver Te B nd m EIA 852 Ch List 2 lip n2 10 0 2 3 1531 I Edit Stats Iv Passwords x B Backup oO 3 pea 192 158 1 37 1528 Edit Stats E 2 Statistics pP U X unregistered notcontacted registered notresponding 9 no ext NAT disabled Reset Contact Logout n E Fertig zi a m J Lokales Intranet Figure 29 CEA 852 channel membership list The device status information is indicated with descriptive icons of different colors The description for the different status indicators is shown in Table 4 The Flags column indicates with an A that the device is an auto member Click on the Edit button to chang
228. ized meter data A trigger data point triggers a synchronization message over the M Bus network The M Bus meters which are able to perform the synchronization action store the meter values These values are read out afterwards Version 3 5 To Trend Synchronized Meter Data l Create a binary trigger data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 190 LOYTEC 2 Create a trigger based poll group with synchronization 3 Create a trend log as described in Section 6 13 Set the Trend Mode to Change of Value COV and add all required data points 10 5 7 9 M Bus Protocol Analyzer When connected to a device a protocol analyzer is available for the M Bus port The protocol analyzer can be found in the M Bus Management dialog Figure 139 shows the dialog for the M bus protocol analyzer The status on the right hand side of the dialog shows if the device is connected or if the protocol analyzer is stopped or started When connected to a device the protocol analyzer can be started by pressing the Start Protocol button This starts the protocol analyzer in the device Every time a transmission is made on the M Bus port the transmission is displayed in the list Additionally the protocol data is stored in the device in a rotating log file The protocol log can hold up to 40 kB of protocol data So also when the Configurator was not running for an interesting time the protocol data can be loaded from the device using the Load From
229. k Domain Length bytes 1 Install ESSET Domain ID fin hex ea Subnet Mode 01 i 26 Close Figure 93 Install devices dialog 6 Select the device to be installed 7 Enter the domain information or click Get Domain from Network and press a service pin 8 Entera subnet and node address and click Install 9 Some nodes won t be operable on the new settings until they are reset Click the Reset button to reset the selected node 10 Repeat this step for other unconfigured devices on the network 6 8 3 Using Feedback Data Points Version 3 5 Feedback data points allow reading back the value written out over an output data point In LONMARK systems getting a feedback value is normally accomplished by creating a dedicated feedback NV on the device which can be bound back to the devices that are interested in the currently active value on an output Some nodes however do not possess such feedback NVs for certain functions To support getting feedback values on such nodes the Configurator can create feedback data points based on existing output data points This is especially interesting for bound output NVs static and dynamic alike The corresponding feedback data point is an input which uses the original output NV for polling the target NV Once the binding is changed the new target is polled No additional input NV needs to be created for the feedback value if the feedback data point feature 1s used T
230. kets with CRC error received via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoTotalMissed SNVT count 32 Total number of packets from the associated channel which could not be processed since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoTotalPkts SNVT count 32 Total number of packets received or transmitted via the associated channel since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoMaxBandUtl SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolvalBandUtl since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset For a smooth operation of the CEA 709 segment the average bandwidth utilization must remain below 50 96 nvoMaxCrcErr SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolvalCrcErr since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoMaxMissed SNVT lev cont Maximum value of nvolvalMissed since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoMaxPkts SNVT count 32 Maximum value of nvolvalPkts since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvolvalMisPre SNVT count 32 Number of missed preambles per second on the associated channel measured during the last interval A missed preamble is detected whenever the link layer receives a preamble which is shorter then the defined preamble length A large number in this counter is usually due to noise on the channel nvoTotalMisPre SNVT count 32 Total nu
231. l 6 2 2 Network Port Folders Each network port folder on the device has the same structure of sub folders These sub folders are Version 3 5 Datapoints This folder holds all data points which are allocated on the network port To create a data point select the folder and use the context menu LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 73 LOYTEC e Calendar This folder is used to hold a locally available calendar object with its calendar patterns definitions of day classes like holiday maintenance day and so on Current devices allow one local calendar object To create a calendar select the folder and use the context menu e Scheduler This folder is used for local scheduler objects Each of these objects will map to a local scheduler on the device s network port Configuring schedules through these objects actually transfers schedule configuration data to the underlying scheduler objects on the network port To create a scheduler select the folder and use the context menu e Alarm This folder is used for local alarm server objects Each of these alarm server objects represent an alarm class which other objects can report alarms to Other devices can use the alarm server object to get notified about alarms To create an alarm server object select the folder and use the context menu e Trend This folder is used for local trend log objects Each of these objects will be able to trend data points over time and store a l
232. l 72 LOYTEC Imported This folder has a number of sub folders for different import methods O CSV Import This folder is used to display data points imported from CSV files LNS Database Scan This folder is used to hold data retrieved from a network database scan CEA709 Network Scan This folder holds NVs scanned online from an attached CEA 709 network Data objects in the import folder are not stored on the device when the project is downloaded They represent data objects which are available on remote devices and are shown here as templates to create suitable data objects for use on the device by selecting the Use on Device option CEA709 Templates This folder contains the created data point templates They contain a set of properties which are applied to CEA 709 data points when they are created on the LINX 10X LINX 10X This is the device folder of the LINX 10X It contains all the necessary data points which constitute to the LINX 10X s port interface definition These data points are created on the LINX 10X when the configuration is downloaded The three subfolders represent O Global System Registers This folder contains system registers which provide information on the device itself User Registers This folder holds user definable registers These registers are not visible on the underlying network and are intended for internal usage CEA 709 Port This folder contains data points schedulers calendars t
233. l 43 1 4020805 100 fax 43 1 4020805 99 or LOYTEC Americas Inc 11258 Goodnight Lane Suite 101 Dallas Texas 75229 USA e mail support loytec americas com Web http www loytec americas com tel 1 512 402 5319 fax 1 972 243 6886 15 2 Statistics on the Console 15 2 1 Connecting to the Console Use a PC terminal program with the communication settings set to 38 400 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit no handshake To connect COMI of the PC to the Console on the device use a standard null modem cable with full handshaking Power up the device or press Return if the device is already running The menu shown in Figure 168 should appear on the terminal Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 226 LOYTEC Device Main Menu Show device information Serial firmware upgrade System configuration CEA 709 configuration IP configuration CEA 852 device configuration CEA 852 server configuration Reset configuration factory defaults Device statistics Modbus cofiguration Q 000 1001 GO Po S a Data Points 0 Reset device Please choose Figure 168 Console Main Menu 15 2 2 Reset configuration load factory defaults Note Select item 8 in the console main menu This menu item allows resetting the device into its factory default state The menu appears as shown in Figure 169 Reset Configuration Menu 1 Reset everything to factory defaults
234. l settings An example for the FTP server is shown for FTP in Figure 24 The FTP server is used for instance to update the firmware see Section 14 1 or to upload a new data point configuration Note that HTTP for the Web server can only be disabled on the console interface or by using the device configuration of the Configurator LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 37 LOYTEC Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Iv TCP IP Iv FTP M Telnet V HTTP FTP port 21 Get Setings Figure 24 FTP server configuration on the Ethernet port 4 2 5 CEA 709 Configuration The CEA 709 protocol can be enabled on the device s ports Portl Port2 etc if available To enable it click the CEA 709 radio button as shown in Figure 25 Note that depending on the device model other protocols on the same port will be disabled in this case The protocol settings box on the right hand side displays the current transceiver settings Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet C Disable Transceiver FT 10 CEA 709 j f Bitrate 78 1 kBit Save Settings Get Settings Status active Figure 25 CEA 709 Configuration Page 4 2 6 CEA 852 Device Configuration Version 3 5 The CEA 852 protocol is only available on the Ethernet port To enable CEA 852 on the device select the CEA 852 CEA 709 over IP checkbox on the Ethernet tab of the port configuration page Please note that on device models without a router or a proxy the CEA 709 protocol on other ports will be
235. ld If no name is specified the name is created automatically as described in section 10 5 7 1 from the M Bus data the device sends back Enter a device address in the Device Address field If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the end address can be specified in the input field on the right hand side of the Device Address field Device Address 7 C 0 255 Select a device Baud rate from the combo box Press the Create Device Button to add the number of devices To Add an M Bus Device Manually Using a Template l Version 3 5 Enter a name for the M Bus device in the Device Name field If no name is specified the name is created automatically as described in section 10 5 7 1 from the M Bus data the device sends back Enter a device address in the Device Address field If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the end address can be specified in the input field on the right hand side of the Device Address field Device Address 7 T_ 0 255 Click on the Create From Template button This opens the Import M Bus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 133 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 181 LOYTEC Tip Version 3 5 Import M Bus Device Templa x Import M Bus Template Template File m Creator Creation Date amp Time Company Mame version C Manufacturer Code Device Model M
236. ld be automatically named Electricity LOY 7 If a name is specified the device name of the applied device is concatenated the address e g Device 7 The automatic data point name is concatenated from the device name the data point is related with and the type of the data point For example if a data point is an energy counter value in the device Electricity LOY 7 the name Electricity LOY 7 Energy is created 10 5 7 2 Scanning the M Bus Network Version 3 5 The Configurator software can connect to the device and perform an M Bus network scan The network scan searches for connected M Bus devices and data points on those devices The device scan goes through each address on the M Bus network using the specified baud rates When scanning for a device the M Bus scanner starts with the highest specified baud rate If the device is found it is added to the device list if not the scan tries to find the device address with the next lower baud rate and so on The M Bus scan can only scan for input data points Output data points can be created manually or imported via a device template To Scan for Devices 1 Connect to the device via FTP as described in Section 6 7 2 2 Right click on the Folder M Bus Network Scan and select Scan M Bus Network This opens the M Bus Network Scan Dialog shown in Figure 131 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 177 LOYTEC Important Version 3 5 M Bus Network Scan X
237. le the LINX 10X Configurator supports the following use cases e Network Management Tool based on LNS 3 x see Section 6 4 2 e Non LNS 3 x network management tool with polling see Section 6 4 3 e Non LNS 3 x network management tool with bindings see Section 6 4 4 6 4 1 Involved Configuration Files In the configuration process there are a number of files involved e XIF file This is the standard file format to exchange the static interface of a device This file can be used to create a device in the database without having the LINX 10X on line There exists a standard XIF file for the FT port LINX 10x FT 10 xif and one for the IP 852 port LINX 10x IP 10L xif e LINX 10X Configurator project file This file contains all ports data points and connections of a project These files end with linx0 It stores all relevant configuration data and is intended to be saved on a PC to backup the LINX 10X s data point configuration 6 4 2 Configure with LNS The flow diagram in Figure 61 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X in a network with LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use dynamic NVs and bindings First the LINX 10X device must be added to LNS see Section 6 5 Then the LINX 10X Configurator must be started in plug in mode to configure the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 1 In the Configurator scan for the data points in the LNS database see Section 6 7 4 Select the data poin
238. le Scheduler Objects This checkbox enables local LONMARK compliant scheduler objects on the device Checking this box will automatically enable the calendar as well Enable Remote AST Objects This checkbox enables the functional object for NVs which are used to access remote AST objects If this box 1s checked the Clients functional block is included in the static interface Enable AST v2 This checkbox enables the AST interface version 2 for local CEA 709 schedulers on the device This interface 1s not compatible with older devices The new interface provides access to the value label descriptions in schedule presets for remote schedulers Number of calendar patterns Specifies the maximum number of different exception schedules day classes like holiday maintenance day supported by this calendar object Total number of date entries Specifies the maximum number of date definitions which may be stored by the calendar This is the sum of all date definitions from all calendar entries A date definition is for example a single date a date range or a week and day pattern Number of local schedulers This is the number of local scheduler objects which should be available on the device Each local scheduler data point created in the data point manager will connect to one of these scheduler objects There may be more scheduler objects available on the device than are actually used at a certain time It is a good idea to have some spare sched
239. leave empty to disable QD DNS Server 3 iT leave empty to disable MAC Address Iv Use Factory Default 00 0A B0 01 0C 9F NTP Server 1 10 101 172 leave empty to disable NTP Server 2 PO leave empty to disable NTP Status in sync Link Speed amp Duplex Auto Detect The entries marked with are required for proper operation Figure 23 IP Configuration Page The device comes configured with a unique MAC address This address can be changed in order to clone the MAC address of another device Please contact your system administrator to avoid MAC address conflicts The device can be configured to synchronize its clock with NTP time Enter the IP address of a primary and optionally a secondary NTP server The LINX 10X will use NTP as a time source if the time sync source in the system configuration page is set to NTP see Section 4 2 1 The field NTP status below the NTP server settings displays the current NTP synchronization status out of sync or in sync If the device is operated with a 10 Mbit s only hub the link speed should be switched from Auto Detect to 10Mbps Half Duplex With modern 100 10 Mbit s switches this setting can be left at its default Other standard protocols that are bound to the Ethernet interface are FTP Telnet and HTTP Web server By deselecting the checkbox those protocols can be individually disabled The standard UDP TCP ports can be changed in the respective protoco
240. lick Next until the plug in registration tab appears in the Network Wizard Select the LOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator Version X Y from the list of Not Registered see Figure 52 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 70 LOY TEC Network Wizard xX Plug in Registration p Pending Register l Not Registered Echelon LNS Report Generator Version 3 207 j Echelon LonMiaker XML Interface version 3 20 YTEC figuration Utility wersion 3 0 1 onfiquratar version 3 0 1 4 0 Dereqister Enable Dizabl L Vis Configuration version 3 1 1 Sale L ORION Firmware Loader version 1 0 Er Already Registered j Echelon LonMaker Browser version 3 20 Disabled i Mot Installed Locally Remove Skip this prompt when re opening this drawing Register all new plug ins when re opening this drawing Continue with advanced options Zur ck ext Fertig stellen Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 52 Select the Plug in to be registered 3 Click Register The Configurator now appears in the Pending list 4 Click Finish to complete the registration Device templates for the LINX 10X are added automatically and XIF files are copied into the LNS import directory Note If you are using multiple databases projects make sure you have registered the plug in in each project 5 Under LonMaker gt Network Properties gt Plug In Registration make sure that the LOYTEC LINX 100 Configurator Version X Y
241. line from the CEA 709 network only their actual node IDs are unknown To Import from a XIF Template 1 Select the folder CEA709 Devices from XIF 0 Datapoint Configuration Ef Imported lf CEA709 CSV File 0 Items lf CEA709 LNS Scan ff CEA709 Network Scan pee CEA 709 Devices from XIF LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 108 LOYTEC Right click on the folder and select Create device s from XIF file from the context menu In the file open dialog select a XIF file to import and click Ok The imported data points appear as a device sub folder of the CEA709 Devices from XIF folder named after the XIF file name EIU CEA709 Devices from XIF mer 1302 legacy mode basic D 1 Datapoints 80 Items bud Alarm 1 Items In that folder select those data points which shall be used on the device and use them on the device as described in Section 6 7 7 Repeat the import of XIF files for as many nodes as needed The same XIF can be imported more than one time resulting in multiple nodes of the same type in the CEA709 Devices from XIF folder 6 8 2 Install Unconfigured Devices Version 3 5 CEA 709 devices must be installed by a network management tool e g LNS based tool to be available for communication Devices can be imported from a CEA 709 network scan or from a XIF file If no network management tool is available the CEA 709 device manager must be used to install the unconfigured devices To insta
242. ll Firmware Verbindung Format Werkzeuge Ansicht Hilfe DW 588 3 zB a gt 5 The graphical design is now part of the project L WebProject Name In LINX Project Her Project L Web Project RAM Size Project 57 17 kB If the Configurator had been connected to the device the graphical design would have been added to the device in the same step 9 2 3 Organize L WEB Projects Version 3 5 L WEB projects can be organized within the LINX 10X configuration project L WEB projects can be part of the configuration project and or stored on the device For instance the configuration project may contain a number of L WEB projects but for saving space on the device only one of them is downloaded on the device The L WEB projects tab provides a number of tools to organize a set of L WEB projects To Organize L WEB Projects 1 Connect to the device as described in Section 6 7 2 2 Select the L WEB Projects tab 3 Click Detect Projects on Device This scans for all projects found on the device LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 164 LOYTEC L Web Project Mame In LINS Project L Wweb Project RAM Size Project Mew Project 57 17 kB Second Project Nes g8 02 2010 17 03 6 31 kB Yes 28 02 2010 16 03 6 31 ke 57 18 ke Projects marked as a green Yes in the In LINX Project column are L WEB projects which are part of the current LINX 10X configuration project Projects marked as a green Yes in t
243. ll a device the following steps need to be done The imported devices must be assigned to actual devices on the network This is done by setting a node ID that corresponds to a node on the network The domain information must be written to the device and it must be set configured online to be ready for data communication To Install Devices l Open the CEA 709 management dialog by clicking on the Manage CEA 709 Devices speed button amp see a a cn If devices have been imported via a XIF file they do not have a node ID all zero To assign the physical node to the device select the imported device Made Enas BOO0000S8264 anon 70532000052 1 6 50 Mode FEB1137BBCB3 anano101 03800000 3 127 ni LINX 1O0 FT 10 701309 legacy goooDr461eaagdoi Jo jo io Click the Update NodeID button and press the service button on the network node The node ID will be filled in to the selected device Alternatively the node ID can also be entered manually After node IDs have been assigned to all unassigned devices select the device s to install in the Device List of the CEA 709 management dialog Multi select of devices is possible Click the Install button This opens the Install Devices dialog as shown in Figure 93 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 109 LOYTEC Type Device Name Node ID m ID Node kn5 Di Device Information Controls Status Configured Soft Offline Set Domain From Networ
244. lly 1628 or the filter table of the firewall is incorrect red exclamation red exclamation Peer not reachable Displayed for a device if it is not reachable No RTT is displayed The device is either not online not connected to the network has no IP address or is not reachable behind its NAT router Execute this test on the suspicious device to determine any NAT configuration problem red exclamation Table 6 Possible Communication Problems 4 3 4 CEA 709 Statistics The CEA 709 statistics page displays statistics data of the CEA 709 port on the LINX 10X as shown in Figure 42 This data can be used to troubleshoot networking problems To update the data click on the button Update CEA 709 statistics LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Oo Update CEA 709 statistics Device Info our Config O Device CEA 709 FT Ae Node state unconfigured 0x02 Stalistics D Transmission errors lo NE 9 Transmit TX failures lo m System Log Receive TX full lo ERR Test Lost massages 0 0 5 lt Missed messages 0 O Layer 2 received lo E Scheduler Layer 3 received lo E Alarm Log FT Layer 3 transmitted lo Transmit TX retries lo L Web B Backlog overflows lo Late acknowledgments lo Reset Collisions 0 Contact Out buffers used lo in buffers used 0 Logout TCL active Dn TSPs used 0 Figure 42 CEA 709 Statistics Page 4 3 5 Sy
245. load a Configuration l Click on the upload button LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 94 LOYTEC File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web OSH RY wlala Alp vo r in the tool bar The configuration upload dialog opens up as shown in Figure 77 If the check box Automatically sync local dynamic NVs is marked any manually created dynamic NVs will be uploaded and merged into the data point configuration Click on the button Start to start the transfer This will upload the configuration of all ports if the software is connected stand alone via FTP or the network variable interface for which the LNS plug in was started for Configuration Upload x Target Device Information Hardware Info Dynamic My Synchronization Firmware Version 3 4 0 Build Date Mon Jun 29 07 45 49 2009 Product Code LINX 101 Serial Number 011304 800000046709 v Automatically sync local dynamic Nis Target Port Device ID 21 vendor ID 1 All CE4709 parts Platform ID 14 IP Address 192 158 24 101 Status Project Mame Unnamed Project FO RH Project Size 14650 Byte B Project Status OE MAC Address OOO4B001F 426 FTF Port 21 Abort Close Telnet Port 23 s Figure 77 Configuration upload dialog When asked if schedules shall be uploaded also click Yes if you want the current schedule configuration be extracted from the device Note that when
246. load is complete the dialog shown in Figure 164 appears C Programme LOYTEC Gateway Configuration lgatechex a x i Download successfully Finished Figure 164 FTP download success dialog 9 Click OK 10 In the Firmware Update dialog click Close 11 The device s firmware has now been successfully upgraded Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 223 LOYTEC 14 2 Firmware Update via the Console To download the firmware via the console interface the LINX 10X must be connected to the RS 232 port of a PC via its console interface as described in Section 15 2 1 You will need the LOYTEC serial upgrade tool LSU Tool which can be downloaded from our homepage at www loytec com Please make sure that the LINX 10X console shows the main menu Otherwise navigate to the main menu or simply reset the LINX 10X To Upgrade via the Console 1 Double click on the dlc file that comes with the new firmware package This should start the LSU Tool and load the firmware image referenced in the dlc file Please note that the dlc file and the dl file must be stored in the same folder The start window of the LSU tool is shown in Figure 165 LSU Serial Upgrade Tool 2 0 1 E s dal xl File Help Firmware Download File Transfer Information Control Image File linx 11x primary dl E Load Address 0x160000 Product LINX 110 Baudrate 38400 bps Verify String Please choose Download Line Settings 8N1 Menu
247. long the OPC bridge shall wait for value updates before issuing the next polled refresh to the LINX This time can be higher than the update rate because changes are notified within the wait time as soon as they occur on the LINX The recommended default is 10 seconds e Hold Time This parameter specifies that changes will be held back by the LINX for the given amount of time before they are notified to the client Normally changes in the LINX are notified at the update rate s granularity In rare cases this can be used to hold back changes beyond the update rate The recommended default is 0 9 4 Using Custom Web Pages Version 3 5 Custom Web pages can also be developed for the LINX 10X For doing so the applications engineer must implement an OPC XML DA Web service client which adheres to the WSDL interface This can be done in C or scripting languages such as Perl The WSDL must be obtained from the OPC Foundation s Web site following the OPC XML DA namespace http opcfoundation org webservices xmlda 1 0 Any Web content including scripts applications or static Web pages can be stored directly on the LINX 10X s file system Use the admin account to upload the content via FTP into the directory var www For example a page named my page html put directly into var www can be accessed via http 192 168 24 100 my page html given that the IP address is correct LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 169
248. ls Renumber Datapoints The OPC column provides check boxes for each data point If checked the respective data point is exposed to OPC on the device Deselect the check box if a data points shall not be exposed to OPC Note that deselected data points do not add to the OPC tag limit New objects may be created in the selected folder by pressing the New button to the right of the list or via the New command in the context menu A plus sign in the list indicates that the data point contains sub points These can be structure members for structured SNVTs Clicking on the plus B sign expands the view For the alarming scheduling trending AST features there are columns which display icons for data points that are attached to an AST function See Table 7 for details LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 74 LOYTEC dem Data Point Usage Ni Data point is scheduled Data point has an active alarm condition Data point has an inactive alarm condition B Data point is a trigger for e mails Data point used for trending Table 7 Icons for used data points in the data point list view 6 2 4 Property View Version 3 5 When one or multiple data points are selected the available properties are displayed in the property view Properties which are read only are marked with a lock sign When applying multi select only those properties common to all selected data points are displayed Depending on the network technology a
249. lt value if no other value source initializes the data point Default values are beneficial if certain input data points are not used by the network and need a pre defined value e g for calculations Default values are overridden by persistent values or values determined by poll on startup 5 2 4 Persistency Data point values are by default not persistent This means that their value is lost after a power on reset There exist different strategies for initializing data points with an appropriate value after the device has started For input data points the value can be actively polled from the network when starting up Use the Poll on Startup feature for this behavior Polling the network values has the advantage that intermediate changes on the network are reflected An input data point can be made persistent if the last received value shall be available after a power on reset before a poll on startup completes This can be beneficial if the remote device is temporarily offline and the last value is considered usable For output data points the value can be restored after starting up by the application For example if the output data point s value is determined by an input data point and a math object or the output data point is in a connection with an input the input can poll its value on startup If the output data point has no specific other value source e g it is a configuration parameter set by the user it can be made persistent
250. lways assigns the same IP address to a given MAC address Use the drop down box MD5 authentication to enable and disable MD5 authentication If MDS authentication is enabled all devices on the IP 852 channel must have MD5 enabled and must use the same MD5 secret Note that MD5 authentication cannot be used together with the Echelon s i LON 1000 since the i LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA 852 authentication method MDS5 can be used with the i LON 600 The MDS secret can be entered over the Web interface You may enter the 16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte e g 0011 2233 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC DD EE FF It is recommended however to enter the secret locally and not over an Internet connection It is best to use a cross over Ethernet cable connected to the PC 4 2 9 CEA 852 Channel List Version 3 5 This page is only available on the LINX 101 If the configuration server is enabled on the LINX 101 the CEA 852 device list can be seen in the CEA 852 channel list menu An example is given in Figure 25 The Add Device button is used to add another CEA 852 device to the IP 852 channel The Reload button updates the Web page and the Recontact button contacts all devices to update their status The Execute button executes the option selected in the adjacent drop down box on the checked members Each member can be selected for that action in an individual check box in the Sel column Actions available are d
251. ly to the Mail Triggers tab when creating an e mail template 4 Click the Add button A data point selection dialog opens 5 Select one or more data points and click OK 6 The triggers appear now in the Mail Triggers list The data points that serve as e mail triggers also appear with the e mail icon in the data point list E Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Condition Critical Alarm Server 7 In the Manage Trigger Conditions you can setup the trigger condition depending on the trigger data point class 8 If the trigger condition is depending on the value of an enabling data point you can add an enable data point by clicking on the button Select datapoint to enable disable E Mail template currently enabled 9 To remove such a trigger enable click the Remove Enable Trigger button 6 10 3 Attachments Version 3 5 E mail templates can be configured to have file attachments Basically any file of the device can be specified as an attachment To Configure Attachments 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E mail Configuration sub folder E Global Objects be m E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select Configure E mail Template from the context menu LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 117 LOYTEC 3 Change to the Attachments tab Note Of course you can also change directly to the Attachments tab when creating an e mail template 4 Select an available file from
252. m log 0 Done Upload varflog system log 1 Done Upload varJlog syskem lag 2 Log empty Show System Log Figure 91 Upload system log dialog 3 When the upload is finished click on Show System Log The system log window appears as shown in Figure 92 Syslog 2008 08 05 09 43 58 395 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 100 1 9 33 Build Tue Aug 5 09 11 10 2008 2008 08 05 09 43 58 399 NOTE 4pplication Reset to Factory defaults 2008 08 05 09 44 09 805 NOTE Application Boot process Finished 2008 08 05 09 45 26 411 NOTE 4pplication Shutdown 2008 08 05 09 45 26 519 NOTE 4pplication Reset 2008 08 05 09 45 26 525 NOTE G551 00000002 O551 Lag terminating 2008 08 05 09 45 49 175 NOTE Applicatian Log initialized LINX 100 1 9 33 Build Tue Aug 5 09 11 10 2008 2008 08 05 09 45 59 510 NOTE 4pplication Boot process Finished 2008 08 05 09 49 10 542 NOTE 4pplication Shutdown 2008 08 05 09 49 10 640 NOTE 4pplication Reset Figure 92 System log window 4 Click on Save to store the system log into a file on your local hard drive 6 8 Advanced CEA 709 Configuration 6 8 1 Import Devices from XIF Templates Version 3 5 When working entirely without LNS nodes on the network can be engineered via importing device templates from a XIF file The Configurator provides a XIF device template import feature Having devices imported from a XIF file is similar to have devices scanned on
253. mber of missed preambles per second on the associated channel measured since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoMaxMisPre SNVT count 532 Maximum value of nvolvalMisPre since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset nvoChnlAlarm SNVT switch Signals an overload alarm condition of the channel during the last statistic interval A channel can be overloaded due to one of the following conditions o The bandwidth utilization during the last statistic interval nvolvalBandUtl exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimit1 default 70 OR LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 218 LOYTEC o The CRC Error Rate during the last statistic interval nvolvalCrcErr exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimit default 5 OR o The Missed Packets Rate during the last statistic interval nvolvalMissed was not zero OR o The Missed Preamble Rate during the last statistic interval nvolvalMisPre exceeded the limit defined by the SCPThighLimitI default switched off If an overload is detected the network variable is set to 100 ON If no error occurred it is set to 0 OFF e nvoChnlAlarmRat SNVT lev cont Ratio between statistic intervals during which the channel was in overload alarm condition and intervals during which the channel was not in overload alarm condition since power up or since the statistics for this port where reset In addition each channel monitor
254. me Device Origin Figure 80 CEA 709 network scan dialog 4 as shown in Figure 81 If the device has not been installed with a network management tool e g LNS based tool press the Configure CEA709 Port button This opens the device install dialog LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 98 LOY TEC Note Tip Version 3 5 lll Configure CEA709 Port E x Connected Scanner Device f 92 168 24 21 Configured Online Abort Refresh State v Manually set domain Domain Length bytes hor Domain ID in hex amp Subnet Made FEN m Set Domain Get Domain from Network Get Domain from Project Settings Figure 81 Configure CEA 709 port dialog 5 Select the Manually set domain check box and click the Set button This sets the device configured online to start the scan Then click Close You need to set the same domain as the devices to be scanned Click Get Domain from Network and press a service pin on some other already installed device to retrieve the domain information before setting the device online 6 Click on the button Discover Devices This starts a network scan The results are put in the device list box 7 Alternatively click the button Discover on Service Pin Then press the service pin of a particular device on the network This device will be added to the device list 8 Select a device in the device list To give the device a usable name enter the na
255. me in the Device Name field and click on the Update Selected button 9 Then click the button Scan This scans the NVs on the selected device and adds them to the CEA709 852 Network Scan folder as a separate sub folder for the device as shown in Figure 82 If you are not sure which device you have selected click on Wink The selected device will execute its wink sequence LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 99 LOYTEC fa LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 100 Unbenannt Bl xl File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web E xl jD eR y7IERSE vbt Connected Device ismi682498 rfo Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics L eb Projects es m Model Mo oo set Auto 2 Datapoint Configuration Remote Datapoints Datapoint Name Filter fo 1 1 Imported g CEA7D9 CSV File D Items Mo Direction Datapoint Mame Remote NV Type Remote Device ool CEA709 LNS Scan B1 ou MV asiff zOds207CkrnwiDO switch nin swibch SNYT_switch aiff z d3207 E 8 CEA708 Network Scan Hz ot Mv Biff z d32 zCtrinin1 switch r1 switch SMVT switch aiffazn0da207 Ely Siff zod3en7 BH 3 ou My Biff z d32 7CkrinviD2 switch nviD2 switch SMYT switch amp 1Ff070d3207 wo Datapoints 18 It _ og See CG Ui E out Nv_S1FFOFOd3207Ctrinvi03_switch niga switch SMVT switch B1ff z d3207 Hf CEA7D09 Templates E LIN 100 EH 5 In Nv aeiFFazad3s2s zckrnvon4 swibch nwa4 switch SMVT swiEch amp iFFaz d3207
256. n this port Under Baud rate the Baud rate for the Modbus communication can be configured The available Baud rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 default Under Paritiy currently only NONE can be selected using 1 stop bit Parity and stop bits are not configurable The Mode specifies if the communication shall use the Modbus RTU mode or the Modbus ASCII mode If operated as Modbus master an additional Transmission delay can be defined in milliseconds This can improve communications on Modbus RS485 with slow devices that operate outside the timing specifications Normally leave this setting at 0 As a Modbus slave the user needs to define a unique slave address that this port will have on the Modbus channel Press the button Save Settings for storing the parameter configuration into the device or press Get Settings for overwriting the changes with the original configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 194 LOYTEC Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Changes will take effect after reset TCP IP m Modbus port mode MASTER Iv FTP Port 502 Iv Telnet er ave address x Iz HTTP 1 255 xI CEA 852 CEA 709 over IP Modbus Get Settings xI Figure 142 Modbus TCP port configuration On an Ethernet port Modbus TCP can be enabled by selecting the check box The Modbus TCP communication settings are displayed on the right hand side as shown in Figure 142 For Modbus port mode the following s
257. n Message on the active CEA 709 network port FT or CEA 852 As an alternative to pressing the status button a service pin message can be sent via the Web interface see Section 4 1 The status button can also be used to switch the device back to factory default state Press the service button and power cycle the device Keep the button pressed until the port LEDs illuminate orange permanently Release the button within five seconds from that time on to reset the device to factory defaults Alternatively the device can be switched back to factory defaults over the console UI see Section 15 2 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 29 LOYTEC 3 5 1 Resetting Forwarding Tables In order to reset the forwarding tables of the LINX 10X s router the status button needs to be pressed for at least 20 seconds during normal operation of the LINX 10X Resetting forwarding tables means e Resetting the CEA 709 transceiver to the standard values e Setting all ports to unconfigured e Clearing the group forwarding the subnet node forwarding and the router domain table when used in smart switch mode e Clearing the LINX 10X status and statistic data e But does not clear the IP address the CEA 852 configuration settings and the data point configuration All this is done when the button is released Afterwards a reset is performed to let the changes take effect Important If the LINX 10X is moved from one location to another or
258. nalog minimum value of the data point EU Units String This 1s the human readable engineering units text of the data point Binary data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each binary data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties Item Canonical Data Type SmallInt This property indicates the data type 11 Boolean Item Value Boolean The present data point value Item Quality SmallInt The value quality It is good if the data point is in normal state or uncertain if the data point has an off normal state e g offline or unreliable Item Timestamp Date This property contains the timestamp of the last value update Item Access Rights Integer This property defines whether the tag is read only or read write Item Description String This is the description of the data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 158 LOYTEC e Contact Close Label String This property contains the active text of the binary data point e Contact Close Label String This property contains the inactive text of the binary data point 9 1 2 3 Multi state Multi state data points are exposed as a one to one mapping to OPC tags For each multi state data point an OPC tag is created The OPC tag contains a number of OPC properties which are derived from the data point s properties e tem C
259. nd data point class different properties may exist Data point properties common to all technologies Datapoint Name This is the technology independent data point name This name may be longer than and different to the name of the native communication object 1 e network variable Data point names must be unique within a given folder The maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters Datapoint Path This informational property specifies the entire path of the data point within the data point hierarchy The maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters Datapoint Description This is a human readable description of the data point There are no special restrictions for a description OPC Tag If enabled the data point will be exposed to OPC If not enabled this data point does not contribute to the limit of OPC tags Use Pollcycle value as For input data points this property defines whether the input shall use a receive timeout or be constantly polling See Section 5 2 2 Poll on Startup For input data points this property defines whether the data point shall be polled once at start up Poll on startup can be enabled independently of the poll cycle See Section 5 2 2 Pollcycle For input data points this property defines the poll cycle in seconds Set this property to 0 to disable polling See Section 5 2 2 Receive Timeout For input data points this property defines the receive timeout in seconds Set this property
260. ndar objects These objects can be created from data obtained by a network scan or LNS scan To Create a Remote Scheduler 1 Execute a network scan as described earlier in this document The scan folder is filled with available schedulers Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 135 LOYTEC Note Note Fl CEAO9 Network Scan f sooo0007da58 0 Datapoints 21 Items 1 Alarm 1 Items 2 Calendar 1 Items 2 From the data points in the import folder select the scheduler objects you are interested in and click the Use on Device speed button This creates suitable remote schedulers and the corresponding calendar objects in the Remote Devices folder E Remote Devices if g0000007das8 ff Scheduler 1 Items Els Calendar 1 Items 3 Adjust the basic settings for the newly created objects such as the object name and description The object name will be used as the name for the scheduler as seen on the Web UI 4 A static NV is created to receive information from the remote device about changes to the scheduler configuration so that the local device does not need to poll the remote device Set a name for this NV default is nviSchedLink lt number gt and assign it to a suitable function block Due to the static input NV which is required for a remote CEA 709 scheduler object adding remote scheduler points will change the static interface of the device The new static input NV re
261. nections since the device is running The figure for rejected connections can be used to detect situations where too many clients try connecting at the same time LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 54 LOYTEC DLOYTEC Logged in as guest Update OPC statistics Clear OPC statistics Seconds since cleared 73011 Date Time of clear GMT Thu Feb 25 18 53 17 2010 Currently connected clients 2 Total connections accepted 24208 Rejected too many clients 0 Total Authentication header missing 97 Total Authentication failed 5 Total SOAP requests received 234660 Total SOAP responses sent 234553 Total SOAP errors sent 5 Total SOAP bytes received 1 10861048 Total SOAP bytes sent 160161950 Number of active subscriptions 2 Total tags in subscriptions 26 Client Srvc Idle s Agent Last Action 01 10 101 17 64 1130 io o L WEB 800 P SubscriptionPolledRetresh o2 10 101 17 76 2592 oa i L WEB 800 P SubscriptionPolledRefresh 03 10 101 17 46 2166 DA na L WEB801 T Read 04 10 101 17 76 3891 DA n a L WEB 800 T GetStatus 05 10 101 17 64 1228 DA na L WEB 800 T GetStatus nc LANA 4CO 4 141 4120 MED onn fT P ORA Device Info Config Statistics System Log networks under control Figure 44 OPC Server Statistics Page The Connection Details list shows more information on the history of client connections The green lines at the top
262. needs basic HTTP authentication using the password for the operator user This is operator by default Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 25 LOYTEC 3 Hardware Installation 3 1 Enclosure 3 1 1 LINX 10X The LINX 10X enclosure is 6 TE 1 TE 17 5 mm wide for DIN rail mounting following DIN 43 880 see Figure 14 1234567 OPC Status Ethernet CEA709 Console Power Status LED Status LEDs Connector ED Button and LED VDC INPUT or 12 35 12 24 VAC 40 70 Hz Ethernet SC 100Base T 4 5 6 15 16 17 55 Figure 14 LINX 10X Enclosure dimensions in mm Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 26 LOYTEC 3 2 Product Label The product label on the side of the LINX 10X contains the following information see Figure 15 e LINX 10X order number with bar code e g LINX 100 LINX 101 e serial number with bar code Ser e unique node ID and virtual ID of each port NID1 VIDI with bar code e Ethernet MAC ID with bar code MACI Node ID of CEA 709 Port 1 Virtual Node ID of CEA 852 port Ethernet LOYTEC electronics GmbH NIDI MUBEUNNUNHUNNNU iN x 101 Date Code VIDA EVN OE ANNO AI FC 810000F 12A08 MACI QUMNONHLTLIUNUNIL UELLE OOOABOOFFAA1 MADE IN EC W44 2008 MAC address of EIA 852 Ethernet port ES es AERE 006101810000F 12A07 Serial number of the device Figure 15 LINX 10X product label Unless stated otherwise all bar codes are
263. nel The field Config client port represents the IP port of the LINX 10X s CEA 852 device This setting should be left at its default 1628 unless there are more than one CEA 852 devices operating behind a single NAT router Please refer to the L IP User Manual 1 to learn more about NAT configuration In the field Device name the user can enter a descriptive name for the LINX 10X which will appear in the IP channel to identify this device You can enter a device name with up to 15 characters It is recommended to use unique device names throughout the IP channel The Channel mode field reflects the current channel mode of the CEA 852 device It is configured by the configuration server If there are any two devices in the channel which use the same IP address but different ports e g multiple LINX 10X behind one NAT router the channel switches to Extended NAT mode Please refer to the L IP User Manual 1 to learn more about configuring the Extended NAT mode in the configuration server The configuration server sets the SNTP server addresses and the Channel timeout The filed Escrow timeout defines how long the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X waits for out of sequence CEA 852 data packets before they are discarded Please enter the time in ms or 0 to disable escrowing The maximum time is 255 ms The field Aggregation timeout defines the time interval in which multiple CEA 709 packets are combined into a single CEA 852 data packet Ple
264. nel FT 10 Statistics L Web Projects Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 96 LOYTEC 2 Select the folder CEA709 CSV File om zl Datapoint Configuration ae D EE m remp MM Poo t CEA7089 Network Scan Le ie CEA709 Templates 3 Right click and select Import File In the following file selector dialog choose the CSV import file and click OK il LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINZ 100 Unbenannt l E nm x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tool L Web amp xl jDa kg 75 t amp 8 E t t Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 linx Channel FT 10 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Statistics L web Prajects seme Modelo n0 set Auto e Datapoint Configuration Remote Datapoints Datapoint M ame Filter Po E 1 MD CEA7 09 CSV File a Datapoints 6 Items 1 DOCVirtual Functional BlocknyvoTempnvoTemp SMVT Eemp DDC 2 oo pn CEA 708 LNS Scan 2 uk a eee nviPower SMVT power f DOZ PO E CEA7O9 Network Scan 3 Out MV L Visvirtual Functional Blocknvian nviangle F 5MVT angle f L Vis 8 LES 4 In MV L Visvirbuial Funckianal Blackrreaan nvoangle f SMVT angle f L V is jf System Registers 9 Items z Dut NY _L Vis irtual_Functional_Blocknyvicon nviconfig_sr SMWT config src L Vis P User Registers 0 Items 6 In N _L Vis irtual_Functional_Blocknyvoco neoconfig sr SMVT config src L Vis ip CEAr0
265. nes that the NV is a synchronous NV the columns defined below must be filled in Otherwise they can be left out The program ID string of the network device The NID of the network device The subnet address of the network device Use 0 if the device has no subnet address information The node address of the network device Use 0 if the device has no node address information The location string of the network device Use 0 if no information is available The device name of the network device Leave this field blank if this information is not available Self documentation string of the device special characters are escaped NV length in bytes NV self documentation string special characters are escaped Define how this NV shall be allocated external 1 default static 2 file 3 Table 10 CSV Columns of the NV Import File The LINX 10X provides a node object conforming to the LONMARK guidelines e The Node Object accepts the following commands via nviRequest RQ NORMAL RQ UPDATE STATUS RQ REPORT MASK RQ ENABLE RQ DISABLE RQ UPDATE ALARM RQ CLEAR ALARM RQ RESET RQ CLEAR RESET Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 216 LOYTEC e LONMARK alarming is supported via nvoAlarm SNVT alarm and nvoAlarm 2 SNVT alarm 2 This allows devices supporting the LONMARK alarm notifier profile to receive alarms generated by the LINX 10X and react with a defined action e
266. nline 10 4 4 M Bus Protocol Analyzer By activating the link Protocol Analyzer available in all M Bus statistics tabs the protocol analyzer page is shown as displayed in Figure 126 LOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as guest Stop Protocol Analyzer Status Running Protocol analyzer log is empty Device Info Config Statistics IP System Log CEA 852 Enh Comm Test CEA 709 Modbus M Bus OPC Server Scheduler Alarm Log networks under control L Web Figure 126 M Bus protocol analyzer Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 172 LOYTEC Next to the button the status of the protocol analyzer is shown If the analyzer is started an automatic refresh is performed every 60 seconds By pressing the button Start Protocol Analyzer Stop Protocol Analyzer the protocol analyzer can be started stopped For every frame sent or received a line is presented using comma separated values 10 5 Configurator This section describes how to use the Configurator software for the management of M Bus data points For further information on the Configurator software refer to Chapter 6 10 5 1 Activating M Bus Configuration Before a new M Bus configuration can be managed the M Bus option must be enabled The project settings are described in detail in section 6 3 To Activate the M Bus Configuration 1 Open the project settings dialog 2 Inthe Device Configuration tab enable the M Bus check box
267. nnected to CEA 709 NVs and exposed to OPC Additionally a Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit and a Modbus TCP interface 1s supported by the LINX 10X Also the Modbus data points can be exposed to OPC and connected to CEA709 NVs BACnet objects and register data points The LINX 10X also supports the LOYTEC Alarming Scheduling and Trending AST feature set The device provides LONMARK scheduler calendar objects which can directly schedule NVs or registers For alarm conditions the LINX 10X can be configured to send e mails to predefined addresses Alarms can also be stored in a historical alarm log There can be up to 100 trend log objects with an aggregated total log buffer size of 2MB The LINX 10X provides mathematics objects which can be used to combine data points using a mathematical formula The AST objects are exposed to a set of OPC tags Trend logs can LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 14 LOYTEC Version 3 5 be uploaded from the device in CSV format In addition a dedicated Web service can be used to access trend log information The LINX 10X permanently collects statistical information from the attached network channels channel load CRC errors forwarding statistics etc Using this data the LINX 10X software is able to detect problems on these channels overload connections problems etc and warns the system operator via LEDs see Section 3 4 10 An intuitive user interface allows fast and easy network trou
268. nput field under the Device IP Address field 3 Click on the Create From Template button This opens the Import Modbus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 150 Import Modbus Dev ice Import Modbus Template Template File m Creator 1 Creation Date amp Time 1 Company Mame version 173 DE Manufacturer Device Model Name Import Cancel Figure 150 Import Modbus Device Template dialog 4 Press the button and select a template file from the Open dialog 5 After selecting the file the device information is displayed 6 Press Import for importing the template or Cancel for closing the dialog without any changes 7 When a template is imported a folder with the name of the device is created Under this folder a Datapoints folder containing the data points from the template file is created Data points can be added to the data points of the template by right clicking in the data point list and selecting New Datapoint To Add a Modbus Device Manually Using a Template Creating Data Points 1 Enter a name for the Modbus device in the Device Name field If no name is specified the name is created automatically from the name in the template file 2 Fill in the Device Address and select the Type either RS485 or TCP from the drop down box If TCP is selected also enter the Device IP Address If more devices with the same properties have to be created using subsequent addresses the
269. nu The same dialog which appears when a new trend object is created is shown and allows configuring the trend object Of course this step can also be done directly when the object is created LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 132 LOYTEC Tip Tip Tip 3 Add data points to be trended Click on Add which opens a data point selector window Remove Datapoint CON delta Type abs humidi 0 0 Value bl Logged Datapoints 4 Select the data points and click OK For each of the attached data points a line appears in the list below the add button The trended data points will also appear with the trend icon in the data point manager Data points can also be attached to a trend by selecting a data point in the data point manager drag it onto a trend object and drop it on the trend object 5 Data points can be removed from the trend by clicking Remove 6 If COV mode was selected the COV increment is displayed in the COV delta column This value can be increased to produce less trend data Note that it cannot be lowered under the trended data point s own COV increment Go to the data point configuration to change the COV increment in this case 7 Ifthe trended value of the data point shall be aggregated over the log interval select the desired aggregation in the Type column Available options are Min Max Avg For creating multiple curves with min average and maximum values add the same data po
270. o Create a Feedback Data Point 1 Select an output data point in the data point list of the CEA 709 port folder e g nvoHumid101 2 Right click and choose Create Feedback Point from the context menu 3 A new input data point is created having fb appended to the original name e g nvoHumid101 fb Note that the feedback data point maps to the same NV index as the original output data point 4 Choose an appropriate poll cycle in the data point properties for the feedback data point LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 110 LOYTEC 6 8 4 Working with Configuration Properties Configuration properties CPs are supported by the LNS network scan and the online network scan They can be selected and used on the device in a similar way as NVs There is a notable difference to NVs CPs are part of files on the remote nodes Reading and writing CPs on the LINX 10X results in a file transfer The LINX 10X supports both the LONMARK file transfer and the simpler direct memory read write method In both cases however one has to keep in mind that a file transfer incurs more overhead than a simple NV read write Therefore polling CPs should be done at a much slower rate than polling NVs Another aspect is how CPs are handled by network management tools Formerly those tools were the only instance that could modify CPs in devices Therefore most tools do not automatically read back CPs from the devices when browsing th
271. o Create an E mail Template for Trends 1 Create or configure an e mail template as described in Section 6 10 1 2 Change to the Mail Triggers tab 3 Click the Add button and select a trend object 4 In the Mail Triggers list the added trigger data point appears with the Fill Level condition E Mail Triggers Datapoint Type Condition TestTrend Fill Level 5 Change to the Attachments tab 6 Select the trend log CSV file of the trend object in the Attach File drop down box and click Add Note ZIP versions of the CSV files are also available Select those to save transmission bandwidth and mailbox space Attachments Attach File Test Trend_1014 cs Remove Attachment Device File Path Add Datetime TestTrend 1014 cev jErpjuid trend 1014 csv v 7 Click OK to complete the e mail template configuration 6 13 6 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Trends Local CEA 709 trend objects support trending multiple data points in all trend modes interval COV and trigger The enable data point is also supported All data points can be NVs registers or of any other technology There is no LONMARK object linked to the trend object Consequently trend data cannot be accessed over a LONMARK mechanism 6 14 Remote AST Objects 6 14 1 Remote Scheduler and Calendar Adding remote access to the configuration of a scheduler and calendar which is located on another device is done by creating remote scheduler and cale
272. object has the following SCPTs e SCPTifaceDesc This configuration property contains a human readable name of the monitored port Possible values on the LINX 10X are CEA 709 IP or inactive e SCPTmaxSndT Defines how often output NVs are transmitted Exceptions are nvoPort and nvoElapsedTime which are polled only 12 2 5 Calendar Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the standard LONMARK calendar object 12 2 6 Scheduler Object When the scheduler objects are enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes the configured number of standard LONMARK scheduler objects 12 2 7 Clients Object When the remote AST object feature is enabled in the project settings the LINX 10X includes a proprietary object which is a container for network variables required to implement the remote object features For remote schedulers and calendars nviSchedLink and nviCalLink NVs are created For alarm clients nviAlarm 2 NVs are created 12 2 8 Gateway Objects The LINX 10X contains eight proprietary Gateway objects These are containers for all NVs which are configured on the LINX 10X s CEA 709 port They are intended for grouping NVs When static NVs are created they can be assigned to any of the eight gateway blocks When creating dynamic NVs in the LNS based tool the NVs should be added to the gateway blocks Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 2
273. ocal trend log file To create a trend log object select the folder and use the context menu e Statistics This folder contains registers which provide communication statistics specific to the network port e Remote Devices This folder is used to collect all remote calendars schedulers trend logs and alarm client objects which were created from network scan data For each remote device a subfolder will be created where the objects referencing this device are collected 6 2 3 Data Point List Version 3 5 At the top right a list of all data objects which are available in the selected folder is shown From this list objects may be selected including multi select in order to modify some of their properties Click on the Include Subfolders button to show all data points of the selected data point folder and all its sub folders This can be a convenient way for multi select across folders To filter for data point names enter a search text into the Datapoint Name Filter text box and hit Enter A drop down list holds the previously used filters available The list can be sorted by clicking on one of the column headers For example clicking on the Direction column header will sort the list by direction Other columns display data point name NV name and SNVT To apply the current sort order as the new data point order on the device right click on the column header and select Renumber Datapoints Alternatively select from the menu Too
274. of the device is created under the M Bus Network Scan folder The data points found are placed in the Datapoints folder of the appropriate devices To Use Datapoints from a Scan Go to the Datapoints folder of the device of the M Bus scan Select the desired data points also multi select 1s possible LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 178 LOYTEC 3 Either press on the Use on Device button or right click and select Use on Device The selected data points are now available in the Datapoints subfolder of the M Bus Port folder To Create Filter Templates from a Network Scan l Z Go to the Datapoints folder of the device of the M Bus scan Select the desired data points you wish to create a template from also multi select is possible Right click on one of the selected data points and select Use as Template This creates a folder containing the selected data points To Use data points from a Scan using Filter Templates 1 4 Right click on the folder M Bus Network Scan and select either Use on device and apply single M Bus filter templates or select Use on device an apply all M Bus filter templates When all filter templates are applied all matching data points from the scan are used on the M Bus port of the device When Use on device and apply single M Bus filter templates is selected the following dialog is opened ck a Te Electricity _NZR_5 Y Number of matching datapoints 3 Cancel
275. om an LNS scan this property specifies the LNS channel name of the device where the given NV exists LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 78 LOYTEC 6 3 Project Settings 6 3 1 General Version 3 5 The project settings allow defining certain default behavior and default settings used throughout the project To access the project settings go to the menu Settings gt Project Settings This opens the project settings dialog which provides several tabs as described in the following sections The general tab of the project settings as shown in Figure 56 contains settings independent of the technology port The settings are Project Name This setting allows entering a descriptive name for the project Default FTP Connection Settings Enter a user name and password for the default FTP access This access method is used implicitly when connected via LNS and the device is accessible over IP For this implicit connection there is no dialog to ask for a username and password and the username and the default password from the project settings are used Device Configuration Download Default This group of settings defines how the download of device configuration parameters shall proceed If Do not download is selected the configuration download does not download anything else than the data point configuration If Ask is selected the download will pop up a dialog in which the user can choose what to download If Download specific i
276. one and connect via the FTP method see Section 6 7 2 Then load the LINX 10X Configurator project file from the directory which has been saved when the original LINX 10X has been configured or modified Double check if the data point configuration seems ok Then download the configuration to the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 12 If using an LNS based tool the LINX 10X device needs to be replaced in that tool see Section 6 6 If you are not using LNS then refer to your network management tool s reference manual on how to replace a device After replacing the device in the network management tool reboot the LINX 10X see Section 4 5 6 5 Adding LINX 10X To configure a LINX 10X in your LonMaker drawing the device needs to be added to the LNS database and commissioned This Section refers to LonMaker TE and describes how to add a LINX 10X to your database To Add a Device to LonMaker TE l In your LonMaker drawing drag a device stencil into the drawing Enter an appropriate name as shown in Figure 65 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 87 LOYTEC New Device Wizard Device name ir Humber of devices to create 1 W Commission device Device Template Create new device template Mame Lic Ox FT 10 af Channel Auto detect channel Type err Marne Channel FT 10 Zur ck Finish Abbrechen Hilfe Figure 65 Create a new device in the drawing
277. onfigured with a number of timing parameters The following properties are available to input or output data points respectively e Pollcycle input The value is given in seconds which specifies that this data point periodically polls data from the source e Receive Timeout input This is a variation on the poll cycle When receive timeout is enabled the data point actively polls the source unless it receives an update For example if poll cycle 1s set to 10 seconds and an update is received every 5 seconds no extra polls are sent e Poll on startup input If this flag is set the data point polls the value from the source when the system starts up Once the value has been read no further polls are sent unless a poll cycle has been defined e Minimum Send Time output This is the minimum time that elapses between two consecutive updates If updates are requested more often they are postponed and the LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 60 LOYTEC last value is eventually transmitted after the minimum send time Use this setting to limit the update rate e Maximum Send Time output This is the maximum time without sending an update If no updates are requested the last value is transmitted again after the maximum send time Use this setting to enable a heart beat feature 5 2 3 Default Values Default values can be defined for data points when needed The value of a data point will be set to the defined defau
278. ons between those data points can be created Usually the manual method to create a connection is used to create connections between different named data points A connection is an internal mapping in the device between input and output data points A connection always consists of one hub data point and one or multiple target data points LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 112 LOYTEC Note Version 3 5 Hub data points can be input or output If the hub data point is an input then the target data points must be output and vice versa All data points in the connection must be of a compatible type To manually create a new connection 1 Click on the Connections tab Datapoints Connections Connection Overview Statistics Connection List Add Connection Remove in the tool bar of the main connections window and press Add Connection A new connection is added to the connection list Rename the connection if you want to do SO 2 Click on Select Hub to select the hub point This opens a list of all available data points Select one and press OK 3 Then click on Add Target Similar to 2 select all target data points You may use multi select to select more than one data point at a time By default only compatible data points are displayed Sometimes compatible data points are available as member points e g a SNVT structure member Click on H to expand the data point and select the desired member
279. ool see NIC User Manual 2 Since the Web service is easily routable on the Internet the LINX 10X OPC server implements the basic authentication method to protect the system from unauthorized write access Read access is available without authentication The basic authentication involves the operator user and the password configured for this user On how to configure the operator s password please refer to Section 4 1 To disable the basic authentication clear the operator s password It is highly recommended to use basic authentication when exposing crucial data points over the Web service To use the exposed OPC data points there exist several possibilities e Use LOYTEC s L WEB visualization tool that comes free with the LINX 10X e use a standard OPC client or SCADA package or e create your own Web service client with custom Web Pages The easiest way to visualize the network s data points over a Web based interface using the LINX 10X is the L WEB software This software is fully integrated into the LINX 10X Configurator and allows designing graphical page content The tool is intuitive to use like the L VIS graphical page designer The resulting L WEB application is stored on the LINX 10X and can be directly accessed in your Web browser or other Internet appliances such as PDAs For more information on the L WEB refer to Section 9 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 156 LOYTEC Standard OPC clients and S
280. operty is valid for analog input data points It specifies by which amount the value needs to change before an update is generated If every write shall generate an update even when the value does not change specify 0 as the COV increment If any value change shall generate an update delete the value which results in Any Active Text For binary data points this property defines a human readable text for the active state true Inactive Text For binary data points this property defines a human readable text for the inactive state false State Count For multi state data points this property defines the number of discrete states The state count can be changed in the multistate map manager see Section 6 2 5 State Text For multi state data points this property defines a human readable state label for each state The texts can be changed in the multistate map manager see Section 6 2 5 6 2 5 Managing Multistate Maps Version 3 5 Multistate data points have a descriptive set of state texts for their state IDs To manage those state IDs and state texts among many multistate data points they refer to multistate maps Some technologies have a fixed set of such multistate maps others have freely configurable multistate maps e g user registers Editing a multistate map affects all LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 76 LOYTEC multistate data points which are using that particular map It is not necessary to edit eac
281. ote that this functionality is only available with LINX 101 Internet routers IP 192 168 1 10 IP 192 168 1 208 Configuration Se S CNN Server for EE R IP 852 Channel LPA IP Ethernet IP 192 168 1 210 L INX a ss a 5 1 gl Ef cipe Lu Figure 117 Remote LPA principle LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 150 LOYTEC 7 7 Internet Timing Aspects If the LINX 101 s router is used over the Internet or in a large Intranet with unpredictable network delays the user should become familiar with the following advanced timing aspects Channel Timeout is set in the configuration server whereas escrowing and aggregation are set in the CEA 852 client device The Channel Delay is a channel property of LNS and can be set in NL 220 LonMaker or other network management tools Table 8 summarizes the timing values that must be set when operating the LINX 101 under WAN conditions Channel Timeout Average ping delay Aggregation Timeout Escrowing Packet The smaller value of 0 25 Channel Timeout or 64ms Reorder Timer Aggregation Timeout Typically 16 ms Packet Bunching Channel Delay in Average ping delay 10 2 Aggregation Timeout LonMaker Table 8 Advanced IP 852 timing parameters Please use a PC to determine the average ping delay between the different LINX 101s in the network If multiple LINX 101s are communicating with each other always use the largest meas
282. oup box To use the current settings of the device as default values for new devices select Set device template defaults from device 4 Execute the operation by clicking the OK button 6 8 5 Working with UNVTs UCPTs This device supports user defined type including user defined network variable types UNVTs and user defined configuration property types UCPTs In order to interpret the contents of user defined types the device resource files supplied by the vendor must be added to the resource catalog on your PC Once the resource files are installed the CEA 709 network scan and the LNS scan will display the user defined types from the resource files Those data points can be used on the device like regular standard type data points Also manual creation of UNVTs can be performed To Manually Create a Static UNVT 1 Perform the steps to manually create a static NV as described in Section 6 7 9 2 When the Create New NV dialog appears change the resource file from STANDARD in the Resource File drop down box to the desired user defined resource file Resource File Ereni kpi 3 Then select the desired UNVT from the Type drop down list below This list will display the types of the selected resource file only 4 Click Create Static NV to create the UNVT on the device 6 9 Connections 6 9 1 Create a New Connection Version 3 5 After having configured the device s network ports with data points internal connecti
283. p can be changed in the data points property view Also multi select can be used in the data point property view 11 4 7 3 Importing via Device Templates Version 3 5 For some Modbus devices special templates are available which specify all available data points of a Modbus device as well as the device properties Such templates can be imported into the configuration LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 205 LOYTEC To import a Modbus Device Template 1 Right click on the Folder Modbus Device Templates and select Import device template from the context menu 2 This opens the Import Modbus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 152 Import Modbus Template Template File ia Creator Creation Date amp Time Company Mame Version Manufacturer Device Model Mame Import Cancel Figure 152 Import Device Template dialog 3 Press the button and select a template file from the Open dialog 4 After selecting the file the device information is displayed 5 Press Import for importing the template or Cancel for closing the dialog without any changes 6 When a template is imported a folder with the name of the device is created Under this folder a Datapoints folder containing the data points from the template file is created Tip Data points can be added to the data points of the template by right clicking in the data point list and selecting New Datapoint Importing a device t
284. pecial data points Some M Bus devices support a synchronized action This means that when a device receives such a synchronize command it stores specific data points for later readout This way specific information of even a larger number of devices can be read out in a synchronized manner M Bus supports network management functions such as changing the primary address of a device changing the Baud rate of a device reading all data from a device as well as pinging a device It is therefore possible to scan M Bus devices in an M Bus network M Bus data points are specified by a DIF DIFE and VIF VIFE combination The DIF DIFE data information field and data information field extension specify storage number tariff subunit as well as the data coding BCD int etc and the function min max etc of the data point The DIF DIFE can be up to 11 bytes long 1 byte for the DIF and up to 10 extensions The VIF VIFE combination value information field and value information field extension specifies the type of the data point e g energy count value and how it is presented e g the value is given in Wh Like the DIF DIFE the VIF VIFE can consist of one VIF and up to 10 VIF extensions The Configurator allows the configuration by either entering the DIF DIFE combination or by specifying the appropriate numbers 10 4 Web Interface This section describes the Web interface for the M Bus port 10 4 1 Configuration A configuration o
285. ped with an FT port CEA 709 and a 100Base T Ethernet port CEA 852 and exposes CEA 709 network variables NVs and configuration properties CPs to the OPC world The configuration software can be run as LNS plug in or stand alone The OPC server node is connected to the FT port The LINX 101 also contains a router between the FT and the IP 852 channel which can be configured like an L IP It includes a configuration server CS to manage the IP 852 channel The LINX 100 contains a remote network interface RNI instead of the router for remote network access The device is fully compliant with ANSI CEA 709 ANSI CEA 852 A EN 14908 and OPC XML DA 1 01 The OPC server s NVs can be bound in the CEA 709 network or operated as external NVs External NVs are polled or explicitly written to without allocating static or dynamic NVs on the LINX 10X In this case address information is supplied by the configuration software by importing e g a CSV file User defined network variable types UNVTs can be used as dynamic or external NVs Configuration properties CPs on other devices can be accessed through file transfer To transfer CPs the device supports both the LONMARK file transfer and the read memory access method For CPs the standard SCPTs and user defined UCPTs are supported All those CEA 709 data points can be exposed as OPC tags The LINX 10X also supports the M Bus interface according to EN 13757 2 EN 13757 3 M Bus data points can be co
286. point 4 Now the connection dialog contains a hub and two target data point as shown in Figure 96 Datapoints Connections Connection Overview Statistics Project Files Add Connection Remove Hub of connection New Connection Select Hub Remove Datapoint S Dir Type nvoswitch out Qut User Datapoint LIMX 110 CEA709 Port Datapoints 1037 Mew Connection Targets of connection New Connection Add Target Remove Datapoint Dir Type Location sivitch_out_ Read In User Datapoint LINK 110 1EC61131 Variables In User Datapoint LIMX 110 IEC61131 Variables swiEch aut Read Figure 96 Connection dialog with hub and target points LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 113 LOYTEC 6 9 2 Create Connections from a CSV File A quick way to perform batch edit on connections is to export and import connections from the connections CSV file Each line in the connections CSV file identifies a connection The first column is the connection name The second column specifies the hub data point 9 The full path to the data point must be specified using the dot as the folder separator The third and following columns specify the target data points To Create Connection from a CSV File 1 Select the menu Tools gt Export Connections 2 Select an appropriate file name and export 3 Edit the connections CSV file An example is shown in Figure 97
287. ponse This value is used by LNS to adjust the protocol timers in the CEA 709 nodes Please consult the documentation for your network management tool about the Channel Delay details LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 151 LOYTEC 7 7 3 Escrowing Timer Packet Reorder Timer The Escrowing Timer or Packet Reorder Timer is a IP 852 channel property that specifies the amount of time the device will wait for an out of sequence IP packet to arrive This parameter is important in WANs like the Internet where packets pass many routers that can change the order in which packets arrive at the destination node The default value is 64 ms Do not use the Escrowing Timer in LANs since the packet order is always guaranteed in a LAN This will add unnecessary delays which negatively impacts the performance of your CEA 852 devices if a packet is lost or destroyed Whether enabled or disabled out of sequence packets are never sent to the CEA 709 channel Please refer to Section 4 2 6 on how to enable or disable escrowing 7 7 4 SNTP Time Server Small IP networks like LANs have a small propagation delay for packets traveling in these networks In this case it is not necessary to specify an SNTP server In larger IP 852 networks like the Internet with possibly long packet delays one must specify an SNTP server to synchronize the local clocks of the LINX 101 devices The local clocks must be synchronized to a common notion of time in order to
288. ported Select if the data point is an analog input or output For analog inputs no M Bus data coding can be specified Object Type Analog Input Select if the data point shall be specified by providing the numbers for Storage number tariff subunit function field and data coding or if the information configured using the DIF DIFE list Enter Storagenumber tariff etc Enter DIFJDIFE For reference if one piece of information is entered the other one is derived from the specified data Enter the data point information Storage Number Tariff o 0 255 Subunit o 0 255 Function Field nsva Data Coding int24 DIF List FD 80 If the DIF list is entered the dialog expects hexadecimal numbers As soon as the information is entered the other fields are updated Enter the VIF VIFE list This list specifies the M Bus counter type and unit of the data point Also this field has to be specified using hexadecimal numbers VIF List FD 80 Usually data points are added to a default poll group If the data point has to be member of another poll group than default the poll group can be selected using the drop down box Pallgraup Defaut Follgroup In the drop down box the previously specified poll groups are shown If no poll group is configured only the default poll group is displayed Refer to section 10 5 7 7 for more information on poll groups Press the Create button to create the M Bus
289. presenting the remote calendar on the local device this NV is normally called nviCalLink needs to be bound to the output NV called nvoCalLink located in the Calendar functional block of the remote device and the new static nviSchedLink NVs which were created for each remote scheduler point need to be bound to the respective nvoSchedLink variable located in the Scheduler functional block of the remote device The binding between the nvoSchedLink variable on the remote device to the nviSchedLink variable on the local device defines which of the scheduler data points on the local device connect to which scheduler unit on the remote device All required information is transmitted over the link NVs so it is possible to later change the binding to any other remote scheduler without rescanning the network If connected via LNS the bindings to the nvoCalLink and nvoSchedLink NVs are made automatically by the configuration software in the download process 6 14 2 Alarm Clients Version 3 5 Accessing alarm server objects on remote devices is done by creating remote alarm data points These points may be created from data obtained by a network scan The local device is configured as an alarm client and subscribes to alarm updates from the remote alarm server The alarm client can also be used to acknowledge alarms on the remote alarm server Any updates are synchronized back to the alarm client To Create an Alarm Client 1 Execute a network scan as d
290. r a trend log and the location of those files are defined in this section The trend log CSV files are accessible either via their UID only or in combination with contents of the trend log object name The files are located in tmp uid trend UID csv data trend Datapointname UID csv The UID 1s the unique ID of the data point The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data point list as shown in Figure 108 For a more user friendly listing of the files the Datapointname contains the trend log s object name It is truncated after 23 ASCII characters to fit the requirements of the file system A trend CSV file for the trend object trend0 and the UID 107C would result in the CSV file data trend trend0_107C csv The UID remains constant for the life time of the object even when the name is changed The CSV file format for a trend log is defined in this section The CSV file starts with a header containing at least the first line which specifies the CSV format log csv ver The current version is 2 The next line contains the field log device It has trailing fields that specify the vendor product code firmware version and device ID string The Device ID String can be one of the following IP 192 168 24 100 BACnet Device 224100 CEA 709 NID NID LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 213 LOYTEC The log info line specifies the fields UID and name of the trend log object The line log create has two f
291. ration upload the current configuration from the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 3 In the Configurator import data points from a CSV import file see Section 6 7 5 Select the data points that the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 6 7 7 Alternatively you can create external NVs manually see Section 6 7 10 Finally the configuration needs to be downloaded to the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 12 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to a file for being able to replace a LINX 10X in the network START Start the Configurator stand alone Section 6 7 2 i Upload configuration Section 6 7 3 Import network variables from file Section 6 7 5 Y Select NVs and use on LINX 10X Section 6 7 7 Create other external NVs manually Section 6 7 10 r Download configuration to LINX 10X Section 6 7 12 DONE Figure 62 Basic design flow without LNS 6 4 4 Configure without LNS Using Bindings Version 3 5 The flow diagram in Figure 63 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use static NVs and bindings The advantage of this solution is that the network load is minimized However the non LNS management tool must create bindings for the LINX 10X and update an existing network Start the Configurator in stand alone mode and connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP method see Section
292. ration server can be enabled in the LINX 101 in the CEA 852 server configuration menu in Section 4 2 8 This configuration server can manage one IP 852 channel and up to 256 devices on this IP 852 channel In order to setup the configuration server one must specify the following parameters e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 2 4 e NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 2 6 e MDS5 secret if authentication is required see Section 4 2 6 e Enable the configuration server see Section 4 2 8 server LED lights up green e A list of IP 852 channel members see Section 4 2 9 If the LINX 101 is used as a configuration server it needs a fixed IP address Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 143 LOY TEC IP 852 Channel IP 192 168 1 100 Configuration Server for L INX XE ance a IP 852 Channel Ethernet IP 192 168 1 101 IP 192 168 1 102 IP 192 168 1 1xx L IHX Road RR i T hha sti rt O E 2 Aa v CEA 852 Device CEA 852 Device CEA 852 Device Figure 110 The configuration server manages the devices on an IP 852 channel 7 3 2 Configuration Server Contacts IP 852 Device In this scenario the IP 852 device needs the following parameters set in order for the configuration server to contact the device The remaining parameters are retrieved from the configuration serv
293. reated in the device This number is unique for one port e Timestamp transmission time Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 211 LOYTEC e Frame Type RTU ASCII or Damaged when something happened with the frame e Dir direction Either SND send or RCV receive e Addr Slave address e CRC CRC ofthe transmission e Length Payload length of the data frame e Payload Payload in hexadecimal numbers this column cannot be used for sorting Modbus Device Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer R5 485 Frotocol Analyzer TCP Start Frotocol Stop Protocol Load From Device Save Clear Timestamp Dir Length Payload 4 2009 05 07 16 33 17 246 RTL SMD 1 17871 0103 0000 an oc 45 5 2009 05 07 16 33 17 285 RTL RCV 1 27892 29 0103 180000 00 00 00 00 an 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000000 B OD C 6 2009 05 07 16 33 27 245 RTU SMD 1 17871 7 a1 a3 0000 0000 45 T 2009 05 07 16 3327 203 RATU RCV 1 eru 29 0103180000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O0 C a 2009 05 07 16 33 37 245 RATU SMD 1 1forl 7 01030000 00 00 45 q 2009 05 07 16 33 37 283 ATU RCV 1 27092 29 0103180000 0000 00 0000 000000000000 an an 00 000000 00 E i X 2009 05 07 16 33 47 245 RATU SMD 1 lal 7 01030000 00 oc 45 11 2009 05 07 16 33 47 291 RATU RCV 1 27892 29 0103 1800 00 00 00 00 0000 000000000000 000000000000 B OD C 12 2009 05 07 16 33 57 245 RTL SMD 1 17871 7 0103 00000000 45 13 2009
294. rend logs statistics and remote data points of the CEA 709 network technology See Section 6 2 2 Objects This top level folder contains sub folders that organize specific application objects that operate on data points O E mail Configuration This folder contains e mail templates An e mail template defines the destination address and text body of an e mail which is triggered by data points and may contain data point values or file attachments To create an e mail template select the folder and use the context menu Math Objects Configuration This folder contains math objects Math objects are used to perform a predefined calculation on a number of input data points and write the result to a defined set of output data points Each math object contains one formula To create a math object select the folder and use the context menu Alarm Log Configuration This folder contains the alarm log objects Each alarm log object creates a historical log of alarm transitions of one or more alarm objects alarm server or client To create an alarm log select the folder and use the context menu Using the context menu on a folder sub folders may be created to organize the available objects If new objects are created automatically they are usually placed in the base folder and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub folders Note that the folder structure described above cannot be changed by adding or deleting folders at that leve
295. rer and model or by simply importing the template again Select one or more device instances from the list and press the Use On Device button This creates for each selected data point and each selected device one data point in the Modbus Port s data point list 11 4 7 4 Creating Device Templates Version 3 5 Modbus device templates can be created from a data point configuration In fact it is only possible to create a device template using an existing device or an existing device template with data points This device and its data points can either be configured manually or also imported from a device template itself To Create a Modbus Device Template Using Devices Select the Modbus dialog by clicking on the Modbus button amp emma in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab This opens the Network Management dialog opens as described in Section 11 4 7 1 The device list shows all devices of the current configuration Select the device you want to export Device Mame Device Address IP Address 5 3 ugsii 1 55 R5 485 TestDevice 14 14 14 R5 485 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 207 LOYTEC Export Modbus Device Templat 3 Press the Export Device Templ button This opens the Export Modbus Device Template dialog shown in Figure 154 The list on the left side of the dialog shows the names of the data points which are exported to the template E p Template Properties Template Fil
296. rminals or somewhere else in the network Important Never connect terminal 17 to earth ground Power Supply Ethernet Figure 16 Connecting the LINX 10X Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 31 LOYTEC 4 Web Interface The LINX 10X comes with a built in Web server and a Web interface to configure the LINX 10X and extract statistics information The Web interface allows configuring the IP settings CEA 852 and CEA 709 settings 4 1 Device Information and Account Management Version 3 5 In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192 168 1 254 of the LINX 10X Note that if your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192 168 1 xxx you must open a command tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the LINX 10X To Add a Route to the Device if 2 Windows START Run Enter cmd and click OK In the command window enter the command line route add 192 168 1 254 SCOMPUTERNAME Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192 168 1 254 The device information page should appear as shown in Figure 17 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 32 LOYTEC Version 3 5 4 DLOYTEC LINX 100 Product name LINX 100 Product code LINX 100 Firmware LINX 10x Primary Image Version 3 5 0 Build date 2010 02 25 16 48 37 Serial number 011501 80000001DFA6 Free memory 8042K 561K Free flash 4267K CPU load 2 696 System temperature 43 0
297. ronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 162 LOYTEC Server which makes the application on the Automation Server completely independent from the connection to the L WEB application Starting from the LINX 10X data point configuration the user can create an L WEB project The L WEB project contains the data point configuration of the Web service interface and a graphical design for the L WEB user interface For more information on creating graphical designs using the L VIS L WEB Configurator software refer to the L VIS User Manual 5 9 2 1 Create a new L WEB Project The LINX 10X Configurator provides the data point configuration which is downloaded to the device On top of that configuration an L WEB design can be created for visualization To Create an L WEB Project 1 Start the Configurator software and change to the L WEB Projects tab Fie View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools L Web DD gQux ostittt Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 linx Channel FT 10 Datapoints Statistics LWeb Projects 2 The L WEB project tab appears as in Figure 121 EA LOYTEC LINX 100 200 Configurator LINX 101 Unbenannt E l Bl x File View Model Firmware Settings Connection Tools Help E x Dad aoc Halen Elo f Connected Device 192 168 24 101 Info Status Configured Online Datapoints Connections Connection Overview Statistics Leb Projects Web Interface Lets Pa e lo I
298. roperty specifies the programmatic name of the NV For local static NVs this 1s the programmatic name of the static NV For external NVs this is the programmatic name of the NV on the remote device Local Remote Functional Block This property specifies the programmatic name of the NV For local static NVs one of the reserved functional blocks can be selected Local Remote NV Flags This property specifies the NV flags For local static or dynamic NVs the flags can be configured For external NVs these flags are only informational Remove NV Information For external NVs this property contains the information on the remote device and the NV selector on that device Remote Device ID For external NVs this property contains information on the remote device by listing the program ID and location string Remote Device Address For external NVs this property contains the CEA 709 network addressing information to access the node 1 e subnet node and NID Retry Count For external NVs this property defines the retry count The default is 3 Repeat Timer For external NVs this property defines the repeat timer in milliseconds The default is 96 ms Transmit Timer For external NVs this property defines the transmit timer in milliseconds The default is 768 ms LNS Network Path If available from an LNS scan this property specifies the LNS network path of the device where the given NV exists LNS Channel Name If available fr
299. rt 1 FT motori def nviMotor2 L Proxy CE4709 Port 2 FT motori def L Praxy CEA709 Port 2 FT statel def nviSkatel nviState1 1046 L Proxy CEA7O9 Pork 1 FTj statel def nviSkatel nviStatel 1046 L Proxy CEG709 Port 2 FT statez d nwistate2 nvistate 105D L Proxv CEA7US8 Port 1 FT statez d nwiState2 nvistate 105D L Proxv CEA7Q08 Port 2 FT motori def nviMotorl nviMotord 105F L Proxv CEA7U08 Port 1 FT motori def nviMotorl nviMotord 105F L Praxy CEA 709 Port 2 FT motori d nviMaetarz nviMotor 1061 L Proxy CE4709 Port 1 FT motori d nviMotore nviMotor 1061 Fe 4E 48 48 44 Figure 98 Connections Summary 6 10 E mail Templates 6 10 1 Create an E mail Template E mail templates are used to assemble and transmit e mails when certain trigger conditions occur The e mail template contains the destination e mail address the subject and text Variable parameters can be added to the text by using data point sources The transmission of an e mail is triggered by one or more trigger data points For setting up e mails the e mail account information has to be configured on the device e g on the Web UI see Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden To Create an E mail Template 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E mail Configuration sub folder E Global Objects PU me E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select New E mail Template from the contex
300. rush current Operating Temperature ambient Storage Temperature Humidity non condensing operating Humidity non condensing storage Enclosure Environmental Protection Installation 18 1 2 Resource Limits Total number of data points OPC tags User registers NVs static dynamic External NVs Alias NVs Address table entries LONMARK Calendar objects Version 3 5 LOYTEC 12 35 VDC or 12 24 VAC 10 typ 3 W up to 950 mA 24 VAC 0 C to 50 C 10 C to 85 C 10 to 90 RH 50 C 10 to 90 RH 50 C Installation enclosure 6 TE DIN 43 880 IP 40 enclosure IP 20 screw terminals DIN rail mounting EN 50022 or wall mounting 10000 2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 both ECS and legacy mode 512 15 in legacy mode 1 25 calendar patterns LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 232 Version 3 5 LONMARK Scheduler objects LONMARK Alarm Servers Trend Logs E mail templates Math objects Alarm logs M Bus Modbus Connections LOYTEC 100 max AST configuration size 384KB 64 data points per scheduler I 100 total of 256 trended data points total aggregated size 6 MB 100 100 10 1000 2000 1000 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 233 LOYTEC 19 References Version 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 L IP User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document Ne 88065909 June 2006 NIC User Manual LOYTEC electronics GmbH Document Ne 880
301. s 06 00 For setting the daylight saving time DST predefined choices are offered for Europe and USA Canada DST can be switched off completely by choosing none or set LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 34 LOYTEC manually for other regions In that case start and end date of DST must be entered in the fields below al DLOYTEC Logged in as admin O Go to TCP IP Confiquration to configure the IP settings Device Info Date Time O Time sync source auto Y Local Date 2010 02 26 yyyy mm dd Local Time 12 14 44 hh mm ss a UTC Date Time 2010 02 26 11 14 44 Timezone offset 01 00 hh mm Daylight saving time DST Central Europe CET Es DST start ias Su Mar o 00 hh mm m j nn m Data Points O DST end ias su Oct 03 00 hh mm E Trend gt m Scheduler lar Save Date Time Get Date Time Calendar D B Alarm Statistics Earth Position Latitude 48 13 i 14 N Longitude 16 20 05 E Altitude 200 m Save Earth Position Get Earth Position CSV Files CSV delimiter Save CSV Settings Get CSV Settings Figure 20 System Configuration Page e g for Vienna Austria The next section on the page allows to configure the LINX 10X s earth position This setting defines the longitude latitude and elevation of the device The latitude and longitude are entered as degrees minutes and seconds The altitude is entered in meters
302. s configure Modbus device addresses v Y Configure Modbus Data Points Import Modbus Device Templates Section 11 5 7 4 Section 11 5 7 5 y Download Configuration to LINX Section 6 7 12 DONE Figure 148 Workflow for offline engineering 11 4 7 Using the Configurator for Modbus 11 4 7 1 Modbus Management Functions This section describes how the Modbus network management functions can be used It describes adding and removing Modbus The Modbus Management dialog shown in Figure 149 shows the list of devices Devices which have been imported from a template show the template name in the last column For each device the address the IP address if available the port and the number of data points available on that device is shown The Modbus Management dialog can also be used for the configuration of poll groups and for accessing the LOYTEC devices protocol analyzer To Start the Modbus Network Management Dialog 1 Connect to the device via FTP as described in section 6 7 2 2 Select the Modbus dialog by clicking on the Modbus button t fh s in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab The Modbus Management dialog opens showing the Modbus Device Management tab displayed in Figure 149 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 200 LOYTEC Modbus Device Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer R5 485 Protocol Analyzer TCP Device Mame ug5
303. s are listed below and described in more detail in the subsequent sections e Configured Router The LINX 101 acts like a standard CEA 709 configured router i LON 1000 600 alike e Smart Switch The LINX 101 acts as a self learning plug amp play router smart switch mode e Store and Forward Repeater To freeze a learned configuration and operate the switch based on the existing forwarding tables disable group learning and Subnet Node learning LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 140 LOYTEC e Smart switch with no broadcast flooding Set Subnet Node Learning to subnet In this mode the LINX 101 learns the network topology but doesn t flood subnet broadcasts 7 1 1 Configured Router Mode In this operating mode the LINX 101 acts like a standard configured router which can be configured with standard network management tools like LonMaker or NL 220 This operating mode is compatible with the i L ON 1000 and the 7 LON 600 This operating mode uses the channel routing routing strategy on the IP channel In this mode the LINX 101 is fully compatible with i LON 1000 600 devices This operating mode should also be used in networks with more than 10 IP devices on one IP channel and heavy network traffic on the IP channel more than 500 packets s since channel routing sends the IP packet only to the LINX 101 device s that connect to the CEA 709 node s addressed in this IP packet and not to all LINX 101 devices on
304. s emer Crete ouo 198 11 4 7 Using the Configurator for Modbus eeeeeeeeeee 199 12 Operating Interfaces rr 212 12 1 Common Interface eio o eter taet iesu a du Hae aad d E M d Pea 212 12 1 1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files e eme 212 12 1 2 rend Los Cow File 20s to oo uto dom ot nets 212 121 3 Nlarm op CSV PII rot ott E Eee Eee epe ee 213 122 CR X709 nter ACE n adeo ood une eee dass etal eli ald 214 E2 2 LIN EImporebtle soie Itn id NO IN 214 I 22 INOUE OD CCE ii ob a Ed L6 ot De S 215 1223 Real Time Keeper OD ECE eco edt uite et A Ie PARU eub e ONSE 216 12 2 Cannel Monitor ODbJOCU eae i Rie ons V E d tug RAN E RIAM d EIS 216 12 2 sale ndar DIE C Eossoutetintteni ted eee a eee een re ee cett 218 12 2 6 Scheduler OD CCE x00 abren iriic beds a cesses RE obese 218 I7 27 lets ODI CC aumentato oe eal neato ee ae 218 E22 8 Gale way OBJEC S sedeo eet ies ha esee Mes er es oet ted ves ditte ase tes 218 Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 10 LOYTEC D Network IVC Oa iis sien d eoe Eo Eta Ee eo o Duce CEN IO R eee E EvP Io EP No DM Ea CNN So RARE ERR 219 IEXL EE BS6eese uve Omne dui ate enun a 219 132 M BUS E 220 133 Modbus R5 485 oi ein EHE oriri RE UD RH ind 220 I4 LINX I0X Firmware Update oreet ere treno een rooted o eoe era R o nens 221 14 1 Firmware Update via the LINX 100 200 Configurator 221
305. s selected the project settings of this dialog determine what is downloaded onto the device As a default the configuration download includes the schedules and calendar patterns but does not include the device settings as defined in the Device Configuration tab see Section 6 3 5 Automatically add downloaded device to the OPC Bridge This option is only available if LOPC BR800 the LOYTEC OPC bridge software is installed on the same PC If enabled the LINX 10X device a configuration is downloaded to is automatically added to the OPC server list in the bridge For more information on using LOPC BR800 refer to Section 9 3 Automatically structure imported data points for faster OPC browsing This option enables the automatic generation of sub folders when using data points on the device A sub folder is created for each scanned or imported device This allows OPC clients to browse the OPC tags in a hierarchical way Project Settings General Datapoint Naming Rules CEA709 CEA709 AST Device Configuration Project M ame Unnamed Projet 0000000000 Default FTP Connection Settings Usermane Jadmin FTP Part c Password admin Telnet Port 5 Device Configuration Download Default Do not download device configuration C Ask which parameters are downloaded Download specific parameters Device configuration v Schedules and calendar patterns OPC Settings OPC Bridge Automatically add downloaded dev
306. s the Create New M Bus Datapoint dialog shown in Figure 134 Create M Bus Object ENT x Datapoint Properties Datapoint Mame NEEMMMMM p D DE Object Type Analog Input r Enter Storage Number Tariff etc Device Mame Device Address Status Datapoints Template Other REL 2 Heat REL 1 Electricity MzR 5 1 Water TN 6 Electricity JAM 4 Water SEM 7 online online online online Enter DIF DIFE Storage Number o Tariff o 0 255 Subunit o 0 255 Function Field insta Data Coding nonss DIF List 75 FD 80 VIF List FD 8n Pallgraup Defaut Pollgroup online ob om oe x x xk amp oo oO wm oo online Edit M Bus Devices Create Close Figure 134 Create M Bus Object dialog 4 Ifthe M Bus device which provides the data point is not in the list it has to be created In this case open the Network Management dialog by clicking the Edit M Bus Devices button Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 183 LOYTEC 10 11 12 i Create the device in the Network Management dialog and close the dialog Select the device which provides the M Bus data point The data point properties are entered in the presented section of the dialog Enter a data point name If no name is entered the data point is named as described in section 10 5 7 1 Datapoint Mame At the moment only analog M Bus data points are sup
307. s the button Update Device 4 When the device type is changed it is verified that no device with the address exists on the appropriate port on RS485 the device address has to be unique on TCP the device IP address has to be unique 11 4 7 2 Manual Configuration of Data Points It is possible to manually configure Modbus data points Manual configuration is done by specifying all information the Modbus device manufacturer provides To Manually Create an Modbus Data Point 1 Click on the Modbus port Datapoints folder 2 Right click in the data point list view and select New Datapoint Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 203 LOYTEC 3 This opens the Create New Modbus Datapoint dialog showing only the devices which are available on the appropriate port This dialog is shown in Figure 151 Create Modbus Data Point OOOO x Device Name Device Address IP Address Port Datapoints Template tenera sis pars Hieper es ugsii 1 5 5 R5 485 40 Elmmeasure_ugSi Datapoint Name TestDevice 12 12 R5 485 Register Type HOLD read 03 T TestDevice 13 13 R5 485 TestDevice 14 14 R5 485 n Segles Fries Register Start Addr 0 65535 Modbus Data Type de Modbus Data Length 8 val ModbusVal Offset multiplier 10 Expoenent OFFset Multiplier 1 Exponent Swap 16 bit Swap 32 bit Swap 64 bit Swap Preview 12345678 gt 12345678 Datapoint Typ
308. select Export Device Template from the context menu 2 Proceed as described above to export the template in the Export M Bus Device Template dialog LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 187 LOYTEC 10 5 7 7 Pollgroups Tip Version 3 5 In an M Bus network the master has to poll the slave devices Input data points are therefore attached to a poll group If nothing else is specified the default poll group is used for input data points The default poll group has a poll cycle of 60 seconds Three different types of poll groups can be specified e Time based The poll group is triggered on a time base This means that after a specific time the poll cycle the poll group is processed e Trigger based The poll group is triggered on a special trigger data point As soon as the trigger condition is met the poll group is processed e Trigger based with synchronization This type is similar to the trigger based The difference is that when the trigger condition is met a broadcast synchronization message is sent over the M Bus This causes the devices which are able to perform a sync operation to store special data points for later reading After the broadcast is sent the poll group is processed If an M Bus device is only able to process default read requests it is advisable to attach all data points of this device to the same poll group this increases the performance The poll group a data point is attached
309. select the proper value please consult Section 7 7 1 Setting a channel timeout other than 0 requires a valid SNTP server entry on the configuration server The Auto members option allows members to be automatically added to the channel If turned on CEA 852 devices can register on the IP 852 channel without the device being explicitly added on the configuration server This special feature is useful in combination with the LPA IP since it can add itself to the configuration server during the debug session Non responding auto members are automatically removed from the channel This feature 1s turned off by default and must be explicitly turned on Use this option with care because new CEA 852 devices can add themselves to the channel without knowledge of the system operator This could cause a potential security hole Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 4 LOYTEC The Roaming members option allows tracking CEA 852 devices when their IP address changes This feature must be turned on if DHCP 1s used and the DHCP server can assign different IP addresses to the same device same Neuron ID In combination with Auto NAT the LINX 101 s router can also be operated behind NAT routers which change their IP address between connection setups For more information on this topic refer to Section 7 4 1 The roaming member feature is turned on by default It is recommended to turn off this feature 1f DHCP 1s not used or if the DHCP server a
310. selector dialog for choosing the replacement data point 6 10 2 Trigger E mails E mail templates are used to assemble and transmit e mails when certain trigger conditions occur For an e mail template one or more trigger conditions can be defined The e mail will be sent when one of the trigger conditions is activated Depending of the trigger data point type the trigger conditions can be refined Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 116 LOYTEC Note Note that the behavior of the trigger data point is influenced by the COV properties of the data point If the Only notify on COV property is checked the data point triggers only if its value changes to the value of the trigger condition If that property is not checked the data point triggers on every write with a value that matches the trigger condition The trigger for sending an e mail can be enabled or disabled altogether by using an enable data point This data point must be of type binary If the value of that enable data point is TRUE the trigger conditions are evaluated If the value of the enable is FALSE no e mails are be triggered To Create an E mail Trigger 1 Under the Global Objects folder select the E mail Configuration sub folder E alobal Objects PU p E Mail Configuration 0 Items 2 Right click and select Configure E mail Template from the context menu 3 Change to the Mail Triggers tab Of course you can also change direct
311. spective COM server to the bridge 6 Click Save 9 3 5 Manually Configure Servers The OPC bridge configuration can also be edited manually The same procedure is also applicable to verify imported OPC server definitions in the bridge software After adding a server definition in the bridge software the LINX 10X will be available as a COM OPC server through the bridge Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 167 LOYTEC To Configure a Server in the Bridge 1 Start the OPC bridge from the Windows Start menu under Programs LOYTEC OPC Bridge OPC Bridge manual Setup 2 Inthe system tray right click on the bridge icon lo 3 Inthe context menu select Register new Server Shutdown 4 Inthe Register Server dialog click Add 5 A new server entry is added Enter the information on Server caption this is displayed Server name this is the COM object name and the Server URL the URL of the LINX 10X device as shown in Figure 124 Register Server X COM Server paramete Server caption LINK Server name LOYTEC OPC Server 1 Qo 168 24 98 100 CLSID BaBeg397 DOEE 4B0D 8DAD 218BDBBDB9BA AML Server parameter Server URL http 92 168 24 20 80 DA LA Proxy Jser name operator Password Min update rate 30010 msec Wait time 10000 msec Hold time fo msec Option file Add Delete Ok Cancel
312. stem Log The System Log page prints all messages stored in the system log of the LINX 10X An example is shown in Figure 43 This log data is important for trouble shooting It contains Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 53 LOYTEC log entries for reboots and abnormal operating conditions When contacting LOYTEC support have a copy of this log ready DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin oO Clear system log Update system log Device Info ber 2009 01 19 15 14 09 780 NOTE Application Log initialized unknown V3 2 0 Buil Config O 2009 01 19 15 14 09 789 NOTE Application Power on reset detected U 2009 01 19 15 14 09 799 ERR Application Upgrading product code tag um 2009 01 19 15 14 18 974 NOTE Application Boot process finished Statistics D 2009 01 19 15 15 31 262 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V3 2 0 Bui UO 2009 01 19 15 15 43 456 NOTE ipplication Boot process finished I c 2009 01 19 15 16 08 131 NOTE 4pplication Shutdouvn E System Log om 2009 01 19 15 16 08 320 NOTE Application Reset 2009 01 19 15 16 08 328 JNOTEJ OSSI JOOOO0002 OSSI Log terminating Comm Test Un 2009 01 19 15 16 31 353 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V3 2 0 Bui B CEA 709 Ra 2009 01 19 15 16 42 485 NOTE Application Boot process finished j d 2009 01 19 15 19 13 770 N TE 4pplication Shutdown O 2009 01 19 15 19 14 899 NOTE 43pplication Reset B Sched
313. stitute to the LINX 10X s port interface definition These data points are created on the LINX 10X when the configuration is downloaded For M Bus an additional sub folder exists o M Bus Port This folder contains the remote M Bus data points which are used on the device Using the context menu on a folder sub folders may be created to organize the available objects If new objects are created automatically they are usually placed in the base folder and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub folders Note that the folder structure described above cannot be changed by adding or deleting folders at that level 10 5 4 Network Port Folders The M Bus network port folder on the device has the same structure of sub folders as the other network port folders in Section 6 2 2 Currently only the Datapoints folder exists for the M Bus network port 10 5 5 M Bus Properties Apart from the common data point properties discussed in Section 6 2 4 the data points of the M Bus technology have additional properties Version 3 5 Storage Number This property defines the M Bus storage number of the data point This number can also be specified by the manufacturer using a DIF DIFE combination Tariff This property defines the tariff of the M Bus data point This number can also be specified by the manufacturer using a DIF DIFE combination Subunit This property defines the subunit of the M Bus data point This number can also be specified
314. stored in devices For some devices it may be necessary to change the byte order This is done by the check boxes Swap 16 bit Swap 32 bit and Swap 64 bit When Swap 16 bit is activated the 2 byte LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 204 LOYTEC Tip of a word are swapped when Swap 32 bit is activated the 2 words of a 32 bit value are swapped and if Swap 64 bit is activated the two 32 bit words of a 64 bit value are swapped A preview of the byte order is shown under the check boxes Select the Data Point Type of the data point analog value multi state or binary only the types which are available for the register type data type combination are shown Register Properties Register Start Addr Jo 0 65535 Modbus Data Type double Modbus Data Length 8 Val MadbusVal Offset Multiplier 10 Expanent Offset Multiplier EN Exponent Ea Swap 16 bit Swap 32 bit Swap 64 bit Swap Preview 12345678 gt 12345678 Datapoint Type Analog v Pollgroup Defaut Follgroup E 9 Select a poll group for read data points from the Pollgroup drop down box The drop down box is grayed out for write registers Additional poll groups can be configured in the Modbus Management dialog 10 Press the Create button to create the Modbus data point 11 After the point is created the dialog is not closed so additional data points can be created After creating a data point the poll grou
315. supporting standard SNVT SCPT and user defined UNVT UCPT types e scheduling CEA 709 network variables e trending data points e generating alarms e logging alarms e sending e mails on alarms trend logs or scheduled events e CEA 709 PC applications as a CEA 709 network interface e remote LPA functionality e communicating on CEA 709 with either FT or IP 852 IP channel on the Intranet Internet e connecting an FT channel to a high performance backbone using existing IP infra structure e operating as a configuration server for IP 852 devices 1 2 LINX 100 LINX 101 Version 3 5 OPC XML DA OPC XML DA OPC XML DA IP 852 IP 852 Router LINX 100 IP 852 mode a b c Figure 2 LINX 100 a b versus LINX 101 c The LINX 100 and the LINX 101 are both capable of exposing CEA 709 network variables and configuration properties to OPC XML DA Depending on additional features there are different flavors of the product Figure 2 depicts the differences The LINX 101 possesses a router between the CEA 852 interface IP 852 and the FT interface The built in router can be used behind NAT routers and firewalls which allows seamless integration in already existing Intranet networks It supports DHCP even with changing IP addresses in an Intranet environment The CEA 852 interface can be used to connect the LINX 101 to an IP based high speed backbone The LINX 101 s router can be used as a standard CEA 709 conf
316. t A prerequisite to sending e mails is the configuration of an e mail account on the LINX 10X This can be done on the Web UI see Section Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden It is recommended to use the e mail server of your Internet provider For public mailers enable the required authentication Please note that the LINX LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 67 LOYTEC 10X does currently not support the SS TLS e mail authentication mechanism Therefore Hotmail and gmail cannot be used The amount of generated e mails can be limited using a rate limit algorithm The transmission of e mails can be disabled altogether by using a special data point That data point can be scheduled or driven over the network If an E Mail cannot be sent e g the mail server is not reachable the mail delivery is retried up to 24 times every 30 minutes 5 5 CEA 709 Technology 5 5 1 CEA 709 Data Points Version 3 5 Data points in the CEA 709 network are known as network variables NVs They have a direction a name and a type known as the standard network variable type SNVT or user defined network variable type UNVT In addition to NVs also configuration properties CPs in the CEA 709 network can be accessed as data points Both standard CP types SCPTs and user defined CP types UCPTs are supported The typical procedure in configuring the LINX 10X consists of the following steps 1 Select the data points of
317. t d vetil ee eR ERU ID MEHR aS a 124 6 LLIO0 Wsine the Local Scheduler 3er e roti Ph EEEDR S TRUUERE M RA 125 6 11 11 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Schedulers 125 6 12 Local AISEBIIBE iari erbe d alaa 125 6 121 Cate an Alarm S eEVODo aient ER Edd Qe eet SERMO gU RU dus S 125 6 12 2 Create an Alarm Condition os decir etna pc ou Eee e Pad recie aei To 126 6 12 9 Deliver Alarms via E all eu eor pea rete Rhen Oe Nas da EE GR S 128 0124 Create an Alarni LOB nc GU EROR PES ICON eM EE EI 129 6 12 5 Limitations for CEA 709 Alarm Servers essessseeeeeeel 130 GIS TOCA Trendin oann REPE OE DIE eS T vip OUI Pc EI DE PLUS E EVUsS e Poe d ade 130 6 1941 Create a Local Fem x s aiio dato E a des RTL CUu Eb oa eds 130 6 13 2 Configure Trended Data Points eeeeeeesssseeeeeeeee 131 6 15 9 Trend T HBPOTS eaa osea Lodo Quse fon o DRIN ee ER SUUS 132 6 13 4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format eeeeeee 133 6 15 5 Deliver Trend Data via B fiato denicee estes s ra eee ntn a 133 6 13 6 Limitations for Local CEA 709 Trends esee 134 614 Remote AST OD ects uu cin eere TEE ded de vi eere exe Nendo 134 6 I4 T Remote scheduler and Calendar eii si ee ueber bcm io loved beUa eU 134 6 14 72 Alm E Hem ebrei routed a Pete didu d p aequ rid Ros 135 615 Math ODI CCS c srsiu oot ce cate edseaeatesiceeensis E ease es tie eeeeeaies 136 6 Ial Create
318. t select the target and click on Remove Target s LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 114 LOYTEC To Delete a Connection l Change to the Connections tab of the main window 2 Select the connection for removal Use multi select to select more than one connection 3 Click Remove 6 9 4 Connection Overview Select the Connection Summary tab to get a graphical representation of all connections It represents the two connected data points their technology they are based on and the direction of the connection An example for the overview 1s shown in Figure 98 Datapoints Connections Connection Summary Statistics Datapoint Datapoint Connection nviHumid L Praxy CEA709 Port 1 FT humid deF L Proxy CEA 709 Port 2 FT humid def nviHurmid nviHumid 1037 nviHumid L Proxy CEA709 Port 2 FT humid deF L Proxy CEA 709 Port 1 FT humid def nviHumid nviHumid 1037 nviTemp L Proxy CEA709 Port 1 FT Eemp def p L Proxy CEA 709 Port 2 FT Eemp def nviTemp nviTemp 1039 nviTemp L Proxy CEA709 Port 2 FT Eemp def p L Proxy CEA 709 Port 1 FT Eemp def nviTemp nviTemp 1039 nviSbate1 L Proxy CEA709 Port 1 FT statel _def nviStatel L Proxy CEA7US Port 2 FT skate1 def nvi5tatez L Proxy CEA7US8 Pork 1 FT state2 def nviStatez L Proxv CEA7US Port 2 FT statez def nviMotor1 L Proxv CEA7U8 Port 1 FT motor1 _def nviMotor1 L Proxv CEA7U08 Port 2 FT motori def nviMotor2 L Proxy CEA709 Po
319. t menu 3 In the Configure E mail Template dialog which is shown in Figure 99 enter the To address and the Subject Optionally Cc and Bcc addresses can be specified Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 115 LOYTEC Configure E Mail Template x Common Mail Properties mail Triggers Attachments Template Mame Critical Alarm E Mail a N Add Remove To huber xhost at Datapoint Var Cc Bcc I Subject Critical Alarm Occurred Max E Mails per day 100 send burst count 2 Selected Data Source Value B Paste to Text E Mail Text a Figure 99 Configure E Mail Template Dialog 4 Enter text in the E mail Text multi line field 5 If the e mail text shall contain values of data points add data points to the Data Sources list by clicking the Add button 6 A data point selector dialog opens Select one or more data points and click OK The selected data point appears in the Data Sources list Data Sources Datapoint Remove nvo current vi Replace 7 Select the data point in the Data Sources list In the drop down box underneath select Selected Data Source Value and click the Paste to Text button selected Data Source Value Paste to Text 8 A place holder 3 v1 for the data point value appears now in the e mail text 9 To replace an existing data source select the data point in the Data Sources list and click the Replace button This opens a data point
320. target data points This means the following connections are possible e linput data point is connected to n output data points e m inputs data points are connected to 1 output data point The most common connection will be the 1 1 connection This is the type of connection that is auto generated by the Configurator software Other types must be created manually in the Configurator In the 1 n connection the input value is distributed to all n output data points In the m 1 connection the most current input value is written to the output data point When polling the output data point in poll through mode maximum cache age is set on the output the value from the first input data point is polled Connections can connect data points of different technologies with each other also mixed among the target data points but are restricted to the same class of data points This means only data points of class analog can exchange values within a connection For certain classes of data points additional restrictions exist e Analog The value range is capped on the output data points This means if the input value in the hub does not fit into the range of an output data point the value 1s capped to the biggest or smallest allowed value e Binary No special restrictions exist e Multi state Only multi state data points of an equal number of states can be placed into a connection The actual state Ids need not be equal They are ordered an
321. temp 10 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 49 12 08 2008 21 12 49 mL high limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 120 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 45 12 08 2008 21 12 49 12 08 2008 21 12 45 active high limit 0 Overheat Alarm NV tn20Controller 1nvi 1temp 120 000000 12 08 2008 21 12 45 hd 4 b Fertig E T OF internet Z Figure 46 Alarm Log Page 4 4 L WEB This configuration page provides a download link to the L Web application installer and a listing of L Web projects available on the device see Figure 47 Clicking on Install will download the installer for L Web and start the installation process See Section 9 2 for more information on working with the L WEB visualization LOYTEC Logged in as admin Install the LOYTEC L Web Visualization software on your PC Logout O Device Info c Config O UJ Available L Web projects Statistics done D Name Last modified Size Bytes O L Web C room _5 lweb 16 01 2009 14 54 42 137591 Reset room 1 1web 16 01 2009 14 54 00 137580 amp room B Iweb 15 01 2009 15 00 39 137523 Contact amp room 3 Iweb 15 01 2009 14 52 13 137580 O room 2 Iweb 15 01 2009 14 50 50 137813 E office room lweb 16 01 2009 12 42 49 170540 D C Figure 47 L WEB Page 4 5 Reset Contact Logout The menu item Reset allows two essential operations e Rebooting the LINX 10X from a remote location or Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual
322. the CEA 709 activity LED flashes orange six times if the wink command was received on the CEA 709 channel After that the LINX 10X LEDs resume their normal behavior 3 4 10 Network Diagnostics The LINX 10X provides simple network diagnostics via its CEA 709 activity LED If the LED does not light up at all this port is not connected to any network segment or the connected network segment currently shows no traffic If the LED is flashing green the network segment connected to this port is ok If the LED is flashing red a potential problem exists on the network segment connected to this port This state 1s referred to as overload condition A port overload condition occurs if e the average bandwidth utilization of this port was higher than 70 or e the collision rate was higher than 5 or e more than 15 CRC errors have occurred on a port with a power line transceiver or more than 5 96 on a port with a transceiver other than power line or e the LINX 10X was not able to process all available messages For a deeper analysis of the reason for the overload condition it is recommended to use a protocol analyzer e g LOYTEC s LPA or a similar tool The exact reason of the overload condition can also be determined with the LSD Tool 3 5 Status Button Version 3 5 The LINX 10X is equipped with a status button see Figure 14 When pressing the status button shortly during normal operation of the LINX 10X it sends a Service Pi
323. the IP channel This is the standard operating mode 7 1 2 Smart Switch Mode Important Important Note Note Note Note Version 3 5 The LINX 101 can be configured to act as a learning switch in a CEA 709 network This operating mode is called smart switch mode In this operating mode the LINX 101 decides if the message has to be forwarded or not based on the destination address of a message Thus it isolates local network traffic e g in case of heavily loaded networks This operating mode doesn t support network loops Whenever a network is reconfigured it is recommended to clear the forwarding tables in the LINX 101 by pressing the status button for at least 20 seconds see Section 3 5 1 The router supports learning of up to 4 Domains All messages which are received on an unknown domain are forwarded to all ports The subnet node learning algorithm supports segmentation of the network traffic on a subnet node basis Thus the user does NOT need to take care of any subnets spanning multiple physical channels Even when a node is moved from one channel to another the LINX 101 keeps track and modifies its forwarding tables accordingly All messages with a destination subnet node address not yet learned are forwarded The router supports group learning Groups can span multiple router ports Group learning only works for messages using acknowledged or request response service All messages with a destination
324. the preset column The data point name column displays the short hand name defined in the configuration software DLOYTEC Logged in as admin Device Info Config Statistics networks under control DLOYTEC Logged in as admin Device Info Config TW oO S e MT yy Po fe rend cheduler Calendar gt works under control Schedule Configuration Presets Name Scheduler linx 23 Description Effective Period From Ta mn Weekly Schedule Weekday 2 v Tuesday v Wednesday v Thursday IV Friday v Saturday V Sunday Calendar used Calendar linx 23 SchedulerO linx 23 Pattern Name Priority everyday 0 holiday 0 24 12 x 128 Figure 34 Schedule Configuration Page Schedule Configuration Presets Data Points Reload Add Preset Data Point Description Data Type default day Iv Delete temp1 double 0 20 Figure 35 Scheduled Presets Configuration Page You can switch back and forth between the two tabs Once the configuration 1s complete click on the Save button This updates the schedule in the device Any changes made become effective immediately On local schedulers the Web UI also allows to reconfigure the scheduled data points This change takes effect immediately without a reboot of the device To add and remove data points to the scheduler go to the Data Points tab The configuration page is depiced in Figure
325. tic initiation of a new connection is tolerable the Auto NAT feature must be disabled and the NAT address configured manually In this case the Internet service provider needs to assign a fixed public IP address to the NAT router LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 153 LOYTEC 8 he LINX 100 RNI 8 1 RNI Function The LINX 100 provides a remote network interface RNI function if the LINX 100 is configured to use the FT interface FT mode In this mode the device provides a remote network interface which appears like a LOYTEC NIC IP it is intended to be used together with the LOYTEC NIC software The RNI can be utilized for remote access and configuration as well as trouble shooting with the remote LPA In particular the LINX 100 s RNI appears as a regular LOYTEC network interface on the PC The LOYTEC NIC software needs to be installed to utilize this interface also in LNS based applications such as NL 220 or LonMaker Using this software the LINX 100 can act as a direct interface to its local FT channel to be managed by LNS or similar tools For more information on how to configure the LOYTEC NIC software on the PC please refer to the LOYTEC NIC User Manual 2 8 2 Remote LPA Operation Version 3 5 The LINX 100 supports remote LPA access through its RNI This means that a CEA 709 protocol analyzer connected to the Ethernet network can connect to the LINX 100 and record all packets on the CEA 709 channel FT 10 The L
326. tics L Wweb Projects g Ey m rity NET Bus Us Model Mo Joo Set Auto E Datapoint Configuration Local datapoints Datapoint Hame Filter Include subfolders lf Imported l e Direction di H Ta Datapoint Mame ve J CEA7U9 CSW File 0 Items 1 CEA7US LNS Scan 2 CEA O09 Network Scan El J Filter Templates 2 hel cEATUS E 7 LINX 100 J System Registers 15 Items wolf User Registers 0 Items Ef CEA7O9 Port e Datapoints 0 Items ee Calendar 0 Items cies 1 54 Scheduler 0 Items tel Alarm 0 Items 0 Trend D Items tw Statistics 18 Items Pa Remote Devices zl Global Objects be d E Mail Configuration 0 Items DLOYTEC Configurator ready p Figure 75 LINX 10X Configurator main window 6 7 2 Starting Stand Alone The LINX 10X can also be used without LNS based tools In this case the LINX 10X Configurator needs to be started as a stand alone application Go to the Windows Start Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 93 LOYTEC menu select Programs LOYTEC LINX 10X Configurator and then click on Configure LINX 10X This starts the LINX 10X Configurator and the main connections screen is displayed If the LINX 10X is not yet connected to the network go to the Firmware menu and select the firmware version of the LINX 10X to be configured If the LINX 10X is already connected to the network it is recommended to connect the conf
327. ting mode uses the channel routing strategy on the IP channel to distribute IP packets It uses flooding to send all packets on the IP channel to all IP devices on this IP channel The advantage of this operating mode is that it 1s fully plug amp play and no router configuration 1s required The disadvantage is that this operating mode doesn t scale very well with larger networks We do not recommend this operating mode for IP channels with more than 10 devices and packet rates of more than 500 packets s Further it is recommended to configure a multi cast group for the router in the smart switch mode to reduce the traffic burden and improve scalability Refer to Section 7 5 on how to configure the LINX 101 to use multi cast 7 2 CEA 852 Device of the Router Version 3 5 Every LINX 101 acts as a device on the IP channel It either needs to contact a configuration server or a configuration server needs to contact the device in order to set up the proper routing tables Before a device can become a member of the IP 852 channel it needs to have proper IP settings see Section 4 2 4 e IP address netmask gateway either via DHCP or manual entry see Section 4 2 4 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 142 LOYTEC e Auto NAT or manual NAT address if used behind a firewall NAT router see Section 4 2 6 e MDS secret if authentication is required see Section 4 2 6 Please consult Sections 4 2 4 and 4 2 6 on how to setup a CEA 852 device
328. tion by selecting the pattern entry in the Pattern Entries list Then modify the date configuration in the Date Configuration group box LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 123 LOYTEC Configure Pattern x Pattern Mame Holidays Remove Selected Create Mew Pattern Entry Date Date Range 14th of July of every year Patkern Entries Pattern Entry Add Entry gt C Week and Day Date Configuration Year e Month uy Dav 14 Preview 4 February 2008 7 29 30 31 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1r 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 Buigust 2008 M TW T 1 345857 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 1r 18 18 20 21 27 r March 2008 hM TW TF S 1 223242587 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 3D 31 hM TW TF S 12345 amp Fo 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2n 2 22 23 24 25 25 27 April 2008 SMTW TF S 12345 Gf 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2D 21 22 23 24 25 20 27 28 29 30 hM TW TF S 1234 5 58 7 8 8 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 27 28 20 3D 31 May 2008 M TW TF 12 3 445 amp 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 20 21 27 23 24 25 25 27 28 29 30 31 5M TW TF S 1 23458578 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 18 20 21 22 23 2d 25 25 27 28 20 Preview All June 2008 5M TW TF S 123455858 7 8 9 1D 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 256 2T 28 29 30 September 2008 October 2008
329. tion on Console UI and added console statistics as Section 15 2 Added Section 4 2 3 port configuration Web UI Added Section 4 2 12 trend configuration Web UI Added Section 4 2 14 scheduler re configuration Web UI Added Section 6 2 5 Managing Multistate Maps Section 6 3 Project settings UNVT cut out added ASTv2 to project settings updated download defaults added device configuration tab Section 6 7 6 Scanning NVs online from the Network Updated to new CEA 709 management dialog Section 6 7 9 Create Static NVs updated new create dialog Section 6 8 1 Importing devices from XIF templates Section 6 8 2 Reset button in install dialog Added Section 6 8 3 Using Feedback Data Points Section 6 12 2 Create an Alarm Condition Added enable limit data points Section 6 12 4 Added alarm log fill level notification Section 9 2 New L WEB project manager Section 10 5 1 M Bus secondary address scanning new activation in project settings Section 11 3 1 Modbus speeds 1200 2400 4800 Section 11 4 1 Modbus slave device config in project settings Section 18 1 2 Resource Limits 2000 OPC tags Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH
330. to 0 to disable polling See Section 5 2 2 Min Send For output data points this property defines the min send time in seconds See Section 5 2 2 Max Send For output data points this property defines the max send time in seconds See Section 5 2 2 Send on delta For output data points this property defines if value updates shall be sent only once they meet the COV condition of the data point For analog data points the analog COV increment is used If not checked updates are always transmitted according to min and max send times See Section 5 2 6 Use Linear Scaling If this property is enabled the analog values are pre scaled from the technology to the data point This scaling is in addition to any technology specific LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 75 LOYTEC scaling factors If enabled the properties Custom Scaling Factor and Custom Scaling Offset accept the scaling factors See Section 5 2 6 Custom Scaling Factor Custom Scaling Offset These properties only exist if linear scaling 1s enabled They apply to analog data points only See Section 5 2 6 Only notify on COV This property assists for binary and multi state input data points It defines if a data point shall trigger an update only when the value changes or on every write If this 1s enabled consecutive writes with the same value do not trigger an update If you want to convey every write disable COV on the data point Persistent This property
331. to can be changed in the properties view of the data points The poll group can also be changed for multiple data points using multi select LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 188 LOYTEC To Create a Time Based M Bus Poll Group 1 Select the M Bus dialog by clicking on the M Bus button sees s w in the tool bar of the Datapoints tab The M Bus Management dialog opens 2 Open the Pollgroups tab This shows the dialog displayed in Figure 138 Network Management Pollgroups Protocol Analyzer Properties Pollgroup Mame Default Pollgroup Pollcycle 5 Jeo Pollgroup Mode Time based Delayed response Hold time ms Wait time ms Delete Selected Update Selected Create Mew Group Enable Disable Datapoint Remove Triggers Conditions Pollgroups Default Pollgroup 60 Condition Enabled Conditions Add Remove Figure 138 Pollgroup Management dialog 3 The default poll group is selected and its properties are displayed Enter the name of the new poll group and enter the poll cycle in seconds Make sure that under Pollgroup Mode Time based is selected 4 Press the Save button to store the poll group and continue editing 5 Ifa poll group needs to be updated or deleted select the poll group edit the data and press the Update Selected or Delete Selected button 6 Press the Close button to finish editing When the poll groups have not been saved a
332. ts that the LINX 10X shall expose see Section 6 7 7 Finally the configuration needs to be downloaded to the LINX 10X see Section 6 7 12 It is recommended to save the complete configuration to a file for being able to replace a LINX 10X 1n the network Add LINX 10X Section 6 5 l Start the Configurator as a plug in Section 6 7 1 Scan network variables Section 6 7 4 l Select NVs and use on LINX 10X Section 6 7 7 Download configuration to LINX 101 Section 6 7 12 DONE Figure 61 Basic design flow with LNS To add more NVs when all bindings are in place and the LINX 10X is already being used simply repeat the steps described above The Configurator software will back up the bindings create or delete the dynamic NVs and re create the bindings again Version 3 5 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 84 LOYTEC 6 4 3 Configure without LNS The flow diagram in Figure 62 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to configure the LINX 10X without LNS 3 x In this scenario the LINX 10X will use external NVs and polling The advantage of this solution is that no bindings in the non L NS tool or self binding nodes need to be changed This comes at the cost of a constant network load caused by polling Start the Configurator in stand alone mode and connect to the LINX 10X via the FTP method see Section 6 7 2 If changing an existing configu
333. tton Update Device 4 Ifa device address is specified which already exists a failure message is displayed LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 182 LOYTEC To Scan Devices Using the M Bus Network Management Dialog 1 Scan for M Bus devices as described in Section 10 5 7 2 2 Startthe scan by pressing the Scan for Devices button 3 When the device scan is finished the devices can be selected for a data scan Also multi select is possible 4 Select the devices which have to be scanned for data points and press the Scan Device Data button This scans all data points of the selected devices For every device a folder with the name of the device is created under the M Bus Network Scan folder The data points found are placed in the Datapoints folder of the appropriate devices Important If a device which is scanned is already in the device list the existing device can either be overwritten deleting all previously scanned data points of the existing device or the scanned device can be discarded A dialog is displayed for this decision 10 5 7 4 Manual Configuration of Data Points It is possible to manually configure M Bus data points Manual configuration is done by specifying all information the M Bus device manufacturer provides To Manually Create an M Bus Data Point 1 Click on the M Bus port Datapoints folder 2 Right click in the data point list view and select New Datapoint in the context menu 3 This open
334. type is string and the format is in XML The XML document contains the scheduleCfg element as the root element e Caps string read only This tag contains the schedule capabilities The data type is string and the format is in XML The XML document contains the scheduleCapabilities element as the root element e CalltemPath string Read only const This is an optional tag If present it contains the item path to the calendar object that the schedule references To read the calendar referenced by the schedule use this item path and the Calendar item name to read the calendar XML document e EmbeddedCal node This is an optional OPC node If present it contains the OPC tags for the embedded calendar The embedded calendar structure is as defined for calendar objects in Section 9 1 3 2 LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 160 LOYTEC 9 1 3 2 Calendar Object The LINX 10X exposes the calendar objects to OPC XML DA tags Each calendar object is represented by a folder in the OPC name space In that folder the following OPC tags shall be available e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains calendar It identifies this folder as a calendar folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Calendar string read write This tag configures the calendar The data type is string and the format is in
335. ual 221 LOYTEC 15 2 3 1 IP statistics A sample console output is shown in Figure 171 KKKKKKKKKKK INTERFACE STATISTICS KKKKKKKKKKKK KkKKK loO KKKKK Address 127 0 0 1 Flags Up Loopback Running Multicast Send queue limit 50 length 0 Dropped 0 KKKKK etho KkKKK Address 192 168 0 2 Broadcast Address 192 168 0 255 Flags Up Broadcast Running Simplex Multicast Send queue limit 50 length 0 Dropped 0 Network Driver Stats for CS8900 rx ready len 50 rx loaded len 0 rx packets 931 tx packets 165 rx bytes 78480 tx bytes 13627 rx interrupts 931 tx interrupts 165 rx dropped 0 rx no mbuf 0 rx no custers 0 rx oversize errors 0 px cro Gr org 0 rx runt errors 0 rx missed errors 0 tx ok 1 65 tx collisions 0 tx bid errors 0 tx wait for rdy4tx 0 tx rdy4tx 0 tx underrun errors 0 tx dropped 2 tx resends 0 int swint req 2094 int swint res 2094 int lockup 0 interrupts 3189 KKKKKKKKKKKK MBUF STATISTICS KKKKKKKKKKKK mbufs 512 clusters 64 free 14 drops 0 waits 0O drains 0 free 461 data 51 header 0 socket 0 pcb 0 rtable 0 htable 0 atable 0 soname 0 soopts 0 ftable 0 rights 0 ifaddr 0 controls oobdata 0 KKKKKKKKKKKK IP Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKK total packets received 922 datagrams delivered to upper level 922 total ip packets generated here 158 Destination Gateway Mask Hw Flags Refs Use Expire Interface default 192 168 0 1 UGS 6 0 0 ethO Oslo OSrL7 192 168 0 1 UGH 0 1 360
336. uler lt 2009 01 19 15 19 14 9068 NOTE OS551I 00000002 O55I Log terminating Alarm Log d 2009 01 19 15 19 36 352 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V3 1 0 Bui D 2009 01 19 15 19 47 048 NOTE Application Boot process finished L Web C 2009 01 19 15 21 07 824 NOTE Application Shutdown 2009 01 19 15 21 08 928 NOTE Application Reset 2009 01 19 15 21 086 937 NOTE OSSI 00000002 O5SI Log terminating Reset 2009 01 19 15 21 32 366 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V3 2 0 Bui 2009 01 19 15 21 43 510 NOTE Application Boot process finished Contact 2009 01 19 15 23 39 546 NOTE Application Shutdown 2009 01 19 15 23 41 700 NOTE Application Reset 2009 01 19 15 23 41 708 NOTE OSSI O00000002 OSSI Log terminating Logout 2009 01 19 15 24 03 364 NOTE Application Log initialized LINX 101 V3 2 0 Bui 2009 01 19 15 24 14 516 NOTE Application Boot process finished Figure 43 System Log Page aff 4 3 6 OPC Server Statistics Page Version 3 5 The OPC server statistics page shows statistics data which contains information on currently and previously connected clients An example list of OPC clients is shown in Figure 44 Clicking on the Update OPC statistics button retrieves the current statistics The Summary table on the top of the page displays the number of currently connected clients These clients occupy TCP connections The next line specifies the total number of accepted client con
337. uler objects ready in case another scheduler is needed LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual 81 LOYTEC e Number of daily schedules This is the maximum number of schedules supported by each scheduler object This number must at least be 7 since a scheduler always needs to provide one schedule for each day of the week default weekly schedule For each special day defined by the calendar or embedded exception day an additional daily schedule is required to support it e Entries in Time Value table This is the total number of entries in each scheduler defining a value template that should apply on a specific day starting at a specific time the time table e Number of value templates This is the maximum number of value templates supported by each scheduler e Data size per value template This specifies the buffer size reserved to hold the data for each value template More data points or bigger data structures require a bigger value buffer e Max number of data point maps Specifies the maximum number of individual data points that this scheduler is able to control e AST Configuration Size This number in Bytes is calculated from the scheduler settings above and represents the total size of the LONMARK configuration properties file stored on the device While certain settings can be freely edited within the given limits the resulting configuration size 1s also limited Project Settings g General Datapoint Naming R
338. ules CEA709 CEA LDS AST Device Configuration Calendar Schedule Object Settings Resources required by the current project Enable Calendar Object RITE Enable Scheduler Objects Local calendar Mo Enable Remote AST Objects Calendar patterns D Enable AST v2 Total date entries 0 v Enable Alarm Server Local schedulers 0 Daily schedules O Calendar Configuration reel Number of calendar patterns 5 max 25 B Spe Total number of date entries 100 max Remote AST Objects No Auko Set Set Defaults Scheduler Configuration Number af local schedulers 10 max 100 Number of daily schedules 62 max 256 Entries in Time Value table 5 imax 500 Number of value templates max 255 Data size per value template max 32 Max number of data point maps 16 max AST Configuration Size 0 Byte max 393 216 Byte Figure 59 CEA 709 AST Project Settings As can be seen from the above list it is not easy to configure a LONMARK scheduler object There are many technical parameters which need to be set and which require some knowledge of how these scheduler objects work internally Therefore the configuration software provides the following mechanisms to help in choosing the right settings e Resources required by the current project The absolute minimum settings required by the current project are shown in a table at the left side of the window This
339. unknown IP Packets sent lo IP Bytes sent lo IP Packets received 3 IP Bytes received 126 IP Packets data sent lo IP Packets data received lo LT Stale packets lo RFC Packets sent lao RFC Packets received 72 Avg aggregation to IP f Avg aggregation from IP f UDP Packets sent 98 TCP Packets sent lo Multi cast Packets sent lo Session ID 0x296e6d SNTP synchronized no Number of CR member infos 1 Current channel routing mode CR Message alloc count 0 Figure 40 Part of the CEA 852 Statistics Page 4 3 3 Enhanced Communications Test Version 3 5 LOYTEC The Enhanced Communications Test allows testing the CEA 852 communication path between the CEA 852 device on the LINX 10X and other CEA 852 devices as well as the configuration server The test thoroughly diagnoses the paths between individual members of the IP channel and the configuration server in each direction Port forwarding problems are recognized For older devices or devices by other manufacturers which do not support the enhanced test features the test passes as soon as a device is reachable but adds a comment that the return path could not be tested A typical output is shown in Figure 41 DLOYTEC LINX 101 Logged in as admin Device Info Config Statistics em Log m CEA 852 E Enh Comm Test Scheduler B Alarm Log networks under control Restart Enh Com Test Enhanced Communication T
340. ured average ping delay for the input value for the calculations in Table 8 Escrowing should be disabled in a LAN 0 ms The Channel Delay in LonMaker should be set to 2 Aggregation Timeout in a LAN if MDS is disabled In LANs Channel Timeout is only required if MD5 authentication is enabled Set Channel Timeout to 200 ms and Channel Delay to 20 ms 7 7 1 Channel Timeout The Channel Timeout is a property of the IP 852 channel If a packet travels across this IP 852 channel for longer than what is specified in Channel Timeout in ms the packet is discarded The LINX 101 always needs to synchronize with an SNTP timeserver when a Channel Timeout is set other than 0 ms Channel Timeout is highly recommended if MDS5 authentication is enabled in order to prevent replay attacks Set Channel Timeout to 200 ms and Channel Delay to 20 ms in a LAN environment Please refer to Section 4 2 8 on how to enable or disable the Channel Timeout If an LNS based network management tool like LonMaker or NL220 is used on a network that has channel timeout enabled please install an NTP client program e g achron4 exe on this PC that synchronizes the PC clock to the NTP time Otherwise the PC clock and the clock inside the LINX 101 will drift apart and communication between the PC and the LINX 101 will terminate 7 7 2 Channel Delay Version 3 5 Channel Delay is an LNS channel property that specifies the expected round trip time of a message and its res
341. vice which contains the Modbus data point e Modbus Register Start Address This property defines the address of the Modbus register e Modbus Register Type This property defines the register type of the data point Also the function code which specifies the register is displayed When the Modbus register type is changed from a read to a write register also the direction of the data point is changed e Modbus Data Type This property defines the representation of data in the slave This is the data type the Modbus slave uses for the data point internally This can for example be float double int16 or uint32 e Modbus Multiplier Exponent and Offset This property defines scaling parameters for the data point The value of the data point in the LOYTEC device is calculated as follows Value ModbusValue Offset Multiplier 10 Ponent e Modbus Swap 16 bit Swap 32 bit and Swap 64 bit This information specifies if the order of received Modbus data has to be changed When Swap 16 bit is set the two bytes of a 16 bit word are swapped if Swap 32 is set the two words of 32 bit are swapped and if Swap 64 bit is set the two 32 bit words of 64 bit long data are swapped Also combinations are possible This configuration is necessary because the Modbus slaves can store information in any byte order the Modbus protocol only specifies how 16 bit data is transferred e Pollgroup This property is only available for input data points
342. villmaotor state 5MVT motor state Enz Controller 1 i Statistics 18 Items 13 In Mv Enz Centroller 1rnvoi2amp nvolZamp SMVT amp tnz Contraller 1 cp Remote Devices 14 Out MV tnz Controller 1nvil3amp nvil amp SNVT_amp tn2 el Global Objects iud 93 E Mail Configuration 0 Items Controller 1 be je Math Object Configuration 0 Items iue E Alarm Log Object Configuration 0 Items 4 AM th2O0Controller 1 nyvo00temp Analog Datapoint 0 In External Mi E in LOYTEC Configurator ready E Figure 78 Scanned NVs in the LNS Database Scan Folder Figure 78 shows an example result of the database scan The list can be sorted by each column Selecting a line will display a number of associated properties in the property view below Multiple items can be selected by using the lt Ctrl gt key and clicking with the mouse All items can be selected by pressing lt Ctrl A gt 6 7 5 Importing Network Variables Without LNS the tool cannot connect to an LNS database where it scans for network variables NVs Therefore the list of NVs to be used on LINX 10X has to be available in a CSV file This file can be produced by external software or created by hand The CSV format for importing NVs is defined in 12 2 1 To Import NVs from a File l Click on the Datapoints tab L LEM Mew Model Fiare Setting Connection Took Web JOG A2e pedo Connected Device linx100 test3 Subsystem 1 flinx Chan
343. ways in effect Otherwise enter dates such as 30 1 2000 To entirely disable a scheduler de select the Enable Schedule check box Schedules are defined per day On the left hand side the weekdays Monday through Sunday can be selected or exception days from the calendar e g Holidays Once a day is selected the times and values can be defined in the daily planner on the right hand side In the example shown in Figure 34 on Monday the value day is scheduled at 8 00am The same principle applies to exception days Exception days override the settings of the normal weekday Put a check mark on those exception days from the calendar which shall be used in the schedule To edit the date ranges of exception days click on the links to the used calendars e g calendar or Scheduler_1 The Scheduler 1 is a calendar which is embedded into the schedule and not accessible by other schedulers For more information on how to set up schedules and calendars refer to Section 6 11 To define actual values for the names such as day click on the tab Presets as shown in Figure 35 Which data points are scheduled is determined by the configuration software On this page only the actual values can be changed To define a new value click on the button Add Preset This adds a new column Enter a new preset name e g day Then LOYTEC electronics GmbH LINX 10X User Manual Version 3 5 47 LOYTEC enter values for the data points in
344. work changes are directly propagated into the network This mode must be used to add the device commission the device extract the port interface definition and download the configuration into the device e Off line Mode In off line mode the network management software is not attached to the network or the device is not attached to the network respectively This mode can be used to add the device using the device templates create the port interface definition and to make the internal connections e Stand alone Mode The Configurator can also be executed as a stand alone program This mode is useful for the engineer who doesn t want to start the configuration software as a plug in from within network management software e g NL 220 LonMaker or Alex Instead the engineer can work directly with the device when online or engineer it offline 6 2 Data Point Manager The Configurator uses a central concept to manage data points The data point manager is located on the Datapoints tab as shown in Figure 54 It is used to select create edit and delete data points The dialog is divided into three sections e The folder list number 1 in Figure 54 e The data point list number 2 in Figure 54 e Anda property view number 3 in Figure 54 Datapoints Connections Connection Overviem Btatistics L Web Projects er i 5 vu P J Datapoint Configuration i Datapoint Name Filter Include subfolde 9 Import 1 E CSV
345. xceeding the OPC tag limit Please observe this limit in the Configurator s statistics tab and deselect the OPC Tag check box for unwanted structure members This helps to keep your configuration lean and improves the performance of the OPC server when browsing and subscribing 9 1 3 AST Objects The alarming scheduling and trending AST objects are more complex than regular data points The OPC XML DA standard does not have appropriate tags for those objects Therefore the LINX 10X exposes AST objects as a set of OPC tags describing the object All tags for one AST object are collected under an OPC node representing the AST object 9 1 3 1 Scheduler Object Version 3 5 The LINX 10X exposes the scheduler objects to OPC XML DA tags Each scheduler object is represented by a node in the OPC name space The content of the schedule XML document referred to in this section must be compliant to the scheduleCfg schema This schema can be found at the LOYTEC Web site The XML documents can refer to the target namespace http www loytec com xsd scheduleCfg 1 0 In that node the following OPC tags are available e ServiceType string Read only const This is a constant tag of type string which contains schedule It identifies this folder as a schedule folder This can be used as an additional identification to the vendor specific property of the folder tag e Schedule string read write This tag configures the schedule The data

LINX-10X User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents